Front ATLAS 890 System Manual (Rev A)

ATLAS_890_System_Man.. ATLAS_890_System_Manual__Rev_A_

User Manual: ATLAS 890 System Manual (Rev A)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 362 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

ATLAS 890 System Manual
Warranty & Customer Service Information
Section 1, System Description
Section 2, Engineering Guidelines
Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure
Section 4, User Interface Guide
Section 5, Detail Level Procedures
Section 6, System Event Logging
Glossary

ATLAS 890

System Manual

1200321L1 ATLAS 890 Chassis

1200322L1 System Controller Module

1200344L1 AC Power Supply

1200345L1 DC Power Supply

61200321L1-1A

May 2001

Trademarks Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered

trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders.

To the Holder of the Manual

The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN reserves

the right to change the contents without prior notice.

In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages

or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of

this publication.

901 Explorer Boulevard

P.O. Box 140000

Huntsville, AL 35814-4000

Phone: (256) 963-8000

Printed in U.S.A.

About this Manual

This manual provides a complete description of the ATLAS 890 system and system

software. The purpose of this manual is to provide the technician, system administrator,

and manager with general and specific information related to the planning, installation,

operation, and maintenance of the ATLAS 890. This manual is arranged so that needed

information can be quickly and easily found. The following is an overview of the contents.

Section 1 System Description

Provides managers with an overview of the ATLAS 890 system.

Section 2 Engineering Guidelines

Provides information to assist network designers with incorporating the ATLAS 890

system into their networks.

Section 3 Network Turnup Procedure

Provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the ATLAS 890 unit, determine the

parameters for the system, install the network and option modules, and power up the

system.

Section 4 User Interface Guide

Explains the VT-100 and Telnet interfaces, the VT-100 user interface conventions, and the

ATLAS 890 top-level menu tree.

Section 5 Detail Level Procedures (DLP)

Provides the detail level procedures called out in Section 3, NTP.

Section 6 System Event Logging

Explains the System Event Logging messages for the ATLAS 890 and provides

instructions for configuring the Event Log.

Glossary

Revision History

This is the 1st issue of this manual.

Safety Instructions

When using your telephone equipment, please follow these basic safety precautions to

reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or personal injury:

1. Do not use this product near water, such as a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, laun-

dry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

2. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless-type) during an electrical storm. There

is a remote risk of shock from lightning.

3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

4. Use only the power cord, power supply, and/or batteries indicated in the manual. Do

not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for spe-

cial disposal instructions.

Save These Important Safety Instructions

Notes provide additional useful information.

Cautions signify information that could prevent service interruption.

Warnings provide information that could prevent damage to the equipment or

endangerment to human life.

Affidavit Requirements for Connection to Digital Services

• An affidavit is required to be given to the telephone company whenever digital terminal equipment

without encoded analog content and billing protection is used to transmit digital signals containing

encoded analog content which are intended for eventual conversion into voiceband analog signals and

transmitted on the network.

• The affidavit shall affirm that either no encoded analog content or billing information is being trans-

mitted or that the output of the device meets Part 68 encoded analog content or billing protection spec-

ifications.

• End user/customer will be responsible for filing an affidavit with the local exchange carrier when con-

necting unprotected customer premise equipment (CPE) to 1.544 Mbps or subrate digital services.

• Until such time as subrate digital terminal equipment is registered for voice applications, the affidavit

requirement for subrate services is waived.

Affidavit for Connection of Customer Premises Equipment

to 1.544 Mbps and/or Subrate Digital Services

For the work to be performed in the certified territory of ___________________(telco name)

State of ________________

County of ________________

I, _______________________ (name), _____________________________(business address),

____________________ (telephone number) being duly sworn, state:

I have responsibility for the operation and maintenance of the terminal equipment to be

connected to 1.544 Mbps and/or ________ subrate digital services. The terminal equipment

to be connected complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules except for the encoded analog

content and billing protection specifications. With respect to encoded analog content and

billing protection:

( ) I attest that all operations associated with the establishment, maintenance, and adjustment of

the digital CPE with respect to analog content and encoded billing protection information con-

tinuously complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations.

( ) The digital CPE does not transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content or billing

information which is intended to be decoded within the telecommunications network.

( ) The encoded analog content and billing protection is factory set and is not under the control of

the customer.

I attest that the operator(s)/maintainer(s) of the digital CPE responsible for the establish-

ment, maintenance, and adjustment of the encoded analog content and billing information

has (have) been trained to perform these functions by successfully having completed one of

the following (check appropriate blocks):

( ) A. A training course provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode

analog signals; or

( ) B. A training course provided by the customer or authorized representative, using training

materials and instructions provided by the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to

encode analog signals; or

( ) C. An independent training course (e.g., trade school or technical institution) recognized by

the manufacturer/grantee of the equipment used to encode analog signals; or

( ) D. In lieu of the preceding training requirements, the operator(s)/maintainer(s) is (are) under

the control of a supervisor trained in accordance with _________ (circle one) above.

I agree to provide ______________________ (telco’s name) with proper documentation to

demonstrate compliance with the information as provided in the preceding paragraph, if so

requested.

_________________________________Signature

_________________________________Title

_________________________________ Date

Transcribed and sworn to before me

This ________ day of _______________, _______

_________________________________

Notary Public

My commission expires:

_________________________________

FCC regulations require that the following information be provided in this manual:

1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules. On the back of the equipment housing is a label

showing the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN). If requested, provide this

information to the telephone company.

2. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily dis-

continue service. If possible, advance notification is given; otherwise, notification is given as soon as

possible. The telephone company will advise the customer of the right to file a complaint with the

FCC.

3. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that

could affect the proper operation of this equipment. Advance notification and the opportunity to main-

tain uninterrupted service are given.

4. If experiencing difficulty with this equipment, please contact ADTRAN for repair and warranty infor-

mation. The telephone company may require this equipment to be disconnected from the network until

the problem is corrected or it is certain the equipment is not malfunctioning.

5. This unit contains no user-serviceable parts.

6. An FCC compliant telephone cord with a modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equip-

ment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using an FCC compati-

ble modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant.

7. The following information may be required when applying to the local telephone company for a dial-

up line for the V.34 modem:

8. The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and

still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas, the sum of the RENs of

all devices should not exceed five. To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your

line as determined by the REN, call your telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your

calling area.

9. This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to

party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission or corporation com-

mission for information.

Service Type REN FIC USOC

Loop Start 1.6B/0.8A 02LS2 RJ-11C

Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant

to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,

uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-

tion manual, may cause harmful interference to radio frequencies. Operation of this equipment in a resi-

dential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the

interference at his own expense.

Canadian Emissions Requirements

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus

as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the

Department of Communications.

Cet appareil nuerique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques applicables aux appareils numeriques

de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le materiel brouilleur: “Appareils Numeriques,” NMB-003 edictee

par le ministre des Communications.

Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with Class A FCC limits.

Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canadian Equipment Limitations

Notice: The Canadian Industry and Science Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification

means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety

requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities

of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable

method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual

service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The cus-

tomer should be aware that compliance with the above limitations may not prevent degradation of service

in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated

by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions,

may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,

telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution

may be particularly important in rural areas.

The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be con-

nected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop

may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Num-

bers of all devices does not exceed 100.

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contract the

appropriate electric inspection authority, or an electrician, as appropriate.

Warranty and Customer Service

ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within five years from the date of shipment if it does not meet

its published specifications or fails while in service. For detailed warranty, repair, and return information

refer to the ADTRAN Equipment Warranty and Repair and Return Policy Procedure.

Return Material Authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN.

For service, RMA requests, or further information, contact one of the numbers listed at the end of this sec-

tion.

LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY

ADTRAN warrants that for five (5) years from the date of shipment to Customer, all products manufac-

tured by ADTRAN will be free from defects in materials and workmanship. ADTRAN also warrants that

products will conform to the applicable specifications and drawings for such products, as contained in the

Product Manual or in ADTRAN's internal specifications and drawings for such products (which may or

may not be reflected in the Product Manual). This warranty only applies if Customer gives ADTRAN writ-

ten notice of defects during the warranty period. Upon such notice, ADTRAN will, at its option, either

repair or replace the defective item. If ADTRAN is unable, in a reasonable time, to repair or replace any

equipment to a condition as warranted, Customer is entitled to a full refund of the purchase price upon

return of the equipment to ADTRAN. This warranty applies only to the original purchaser and is not trans-

ferable without ADTRAN's express written permission. This warranty becomes null and void if Customer

modifies or alters the equipment in any way, other than as specifically authorized by ADTRAN.

EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE, THE FOREGOING CONSTI-

TUTES THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CUSTOMER AND THE EXCLUSIVE LIA-

BILITY OF ADTRAN AND IS IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESSED

OR IMPLIED). ADTRAN SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

(WITHOUT LIMITATION), ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, SO THIS EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER.

In no event will ADTRAN or its suppliers be liable to Customer for any incidental, special, punitive,

exemplary or consequential damages experienced by either

Customer or a third party (including, but not limited to, loss of data or information, loss of profits, or loss

of use). ADTRAN is not liable for damages for any cause

whatsoever (whether based in contract, tort, or otherwise) in excess of the amount paid for the item. Some

states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the

above limitation or exclusion may not apply to Customer.

Customer Service, Product Support Information, and Training

ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within five years from the date of shipment if the product does

not meet its published specification, or if it fails while in service.

A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN. For service,

RMA requests, training, or more information, see the toll-free contact numbers given below.

Presales Inquiries and Applications Support

Please contact your local distributor, ADTRAN Applications Engineering, or ADTRAN Sales:

Post-Sale Support

Please contact your local distributor first. If your local distributor cannot help, please contact ADTRAN

Technical Support and have the unit serial number available.

The Custom Extended Services (ACES) program offers multiple types and levels of service plans which al-

low you to choose the kind of assistance you need. For questions, call the ACES Help Desk.

Repair and Return

If ADTRAN Technical Support determines that a repair is needed, Technical Support will coordinate with

the Custom and Product Service (CAPS) department to issue an RMA number. For information regarding

equipment currently in house or possible fees associated with repair, contact CAPS directly at the following

number:

Identify the RMA number clearly on the package (below address), and return to the following address:

ADTRAN Customer and Product Service

901 Explorer Blvd.

Huntsville, Alabama 35806

RMA # _____________

Applications

Engineering (800) 615-1176

Sales (800) 827-0807

Technical Support (888) 4ADTRAN

ACES Help Desk (888) 874-2237

CAPS Department (256) 963-8722

Training

The Enterprise Network (EN) Technical Training offers training on our most popular products. These courses

include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN's product lines.

ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our fa-

cilities or at your site. For more information about training, please contact your Territory Manager or the En-

terprise Training Coordinator.

Training - phone (800) 615-1176, ext. 7500

Training - fax (256) 963-6700

Training - email training@adtran.com

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 1, System Description

Page 1 of 6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

This section of ADTRAN’s ATLAS 890 System Manual is designed for use by network engineers, planners,

and designers for overview information about the ATLAS 890.

It contains general information and describes physical and operational concepts, card functions, network

relationships, provisioning, testing, alarm status, and system monitoring. This section should be used in

conjunction with Section 2, Engineering Guidelines, of the system manual.

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Configuration and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Software Upgradeable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Signaling Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

ISDN Switch Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Dedicated Connection Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Switched Connection Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Frame Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

PPP Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

ATLAS 890 System Controller Module (P/N 1200322L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 4200261LX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module (1200186L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

8,16,24, 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221Lx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 1, System Description

Page 2 of 6

1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The ATLAS 890 is a modular, highly scalable platform that provides robust solutions for the wide-area

communication needs of medium-to-large corporations and network access providers. The ATLAS 890 is

an Integrated Access System with extensive support of dedicated bandwidth management and access

switching.

The ATLAS 890 is a higher bandwidth version of the ATLAS 800PLUS. It contains a high-performance

CPU and powerful communications drivers which supports applications such as frame relay and call

switching.

The ATLAS 890 architecture also includes a packet switching and a circuit switching bussing scheme. The

result is a system capable of supporting bandwidth requirements of up to 30 T1 or Primary Rate ISDN

(PRI) circuits. Designed for standalone or rackmount, the ATLAS 890 Base Unit provides 2

hot-swappable, redundant system controller slots and up to 16 expansion slots that accommodate

hot-swappable option modules and up to 4 hot-swappable, redundant power supplies for a variety of

applications. A 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection for IP routing and network management is standard with

the ATLAS 890 System Controller Module.

With the ATLAS 890, you can consolidate your voice, data, and video applications into a single platform

while optimizing wide area bandwidth and reducing equipment costs. The ATLAS 890 architecture and

expansion slots allow for a variety of modules, making it one of the most versatile access systems on the

market.

2. FEATURES AND BENEFITS

The following is a brief list of ATLAS 890 features and benefits:

Configuration and Management

• VT-100 Emulation

• SNMP, per MIB II (RFC1213), DS1 MIB (RFC1406), and ADTRAN private MIBs

•Telnet

• Dial up remote management via external analog modem

• Six levels of password protection and privileges

Software Upgradeable

• Flash memory

• TFTP download

• XMODEM via control port

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 1, System Description

Page 3 of 6

Signaling Support

• ISDN D Channel

• Robbed bit, E&M, Ground Start, Loop Start

• Convert between Robbed Bit Signaling and ISDN D Channel

• Direct Inward Dialing

ISDN Switch Types

• 5ESS™, DMS-100™, National ISDN, 4ESS™

Dedicated Connection Maps

• Up to five connection maps

• Time of day/day of week configurable

• Preserves signaling through cross-connect

• No effect on non-configured channels

Switched Connection Maps

• Inbound and outbound call filtering and blocking

Testing

• Local and remote: payload/line, V.54 (depending on installed modules)

• Patterns: 511, QRSS, all ones, all zeros (depending on installed modules)

Performance Monitoring

• Reports: Information stored for last 24 hours in 15 minute increments

• Performance statistics per TR54016, T1.403, RFC1406

• Alarm reporting per TR54016, T1.403

Frame Relay

• Routes Internet Protocol (IP) traffic between a public frame relay network, a private frame relay net-

work, or a point-to-point (PPP) network and the Ethernet port.

• Concentrates IP traffic from a public or private frame relay network to one or more serial ports (V.35).

The protocol passed over the serial port is frame relay (RFC 1490 encapsulation).

• Passes Systems Network Architecture (SNA), Bisync, and other legacy protocols between a public or

private frame relay network and an external DTE running frame relay to ATLAS.

• Performs voice compression/decompression (G.723.1) and interfaces to either a Private Branch Ex-

change (PBX) or the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). (This feature requires an additional

option module, the VCOM Module—P/N 1200221Lx.)

• Supports LMI, Annex D, or Annex A signaling on frame relay connections.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 1, System Description

Page 4 of 6

PPP Switching

• Supports up to 100 simultaneous PPP connections.

• Performs PAP, CHAP, or EAP authentication methods on a per connection basis.

• Includes keepalive functionality for PPP connections.

• Provides capability for numbered or unnumbered PPP interfaces.

3. OPTION MODULES

The ATLAS 890 has a system controller module and 15 option modules:

• ATLAS 890 System Controller Module (P/N 1200322L1)

• Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3)

• Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)

• Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1)

• Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 4200261Lx)

• Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module (1200186L2)

• T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)

• T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1)

• 8,16,24, 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221Lx)

• Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1)

• HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1)

• Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1)

• Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1)

Each option module is hot-swappable with configuration restored upon replacement.

Each option module has a variety of performance and alarm status information. Several features of each

module are user-configurable, although default values reflect the most common configurations. All option

modules contain an extensive self-test as well as tests designed for the technology they incorporate.

ATLAS 890 System Controller Module (P/N 1200322L1)

In addition to controlling the shelf and its contents, the system controller modules serve as the user inter-

face. The operator provisions and monitors all modules in the system, either locally or remotely, via the

system controller interface. The system controllers provision the option cards in the shelf via the faceplate

RJ-45 Admin connector of the active system controller and a VT-100 terminal (see Figure 4). Additionally,

a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet interface is provided for Telnet access.

Replacing an option module with a different module type will result in configuration loss.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 1, System Description

Page 5 of 6

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3)

The Quad T1/PRI Option Module provides four channelized T1 or PRI interfaces. Each interface can oper-

ate independently in DS-1, DSX-1, or PRI mode, and any port can deliver timing for the system.

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)

The Quad E1/PRA Option Module provides four channelized E1 or PRA interfaces using a supplied

120 ohm DB-15 converter cable. The Quad E1/PRA Option Module may also be purchased to include

BNC converter cables (P/N 4200264L1). This interface operates in CCS or CAS signaling mode and can

deliver timing for the system.

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1)

The Quad Nx 56/64 module provides four synchronous V.35 DTE ports (using supplied DB-78 to V.35

converter cables) that can operate from 56K to 2.048 Mbps in steps of 56 or 64 kbps. Any port can deliver

timing for the system.

Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 4200261LX)

The Quad USSI Option Module provides four synchronous DTE ports that can operate from 56K to

2.048 Mbps in steps of 56 or 64 kbps. The DTE ports available (using adapter cables) are: EIA-530, EIA-

530A, RS-449, RS-232, and CCITT X.21. Any port can deliver timing for the system.

Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module (1200186L2)

The Octal Basic Rate ISDN module provides eight Basic Rate ISDN (BRI) U interfaces, each capable of

operating in either NT or LT mode. Any port can deliver timing for the system.

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)

The T3 Option Module provides a single channelized T3 interface that allows bandwidth management of

up to 28 T1s. Functions as a T3 DSU/CSU, M13 multiplexer, and 3/1/0 timeslot interchange DACS. The

T3 clock or any of the odd T1s contained in the T3 circuit may deliver timing for the system.

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1)

The T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface provides a single channelized T3 interface for pri-

mary service and an additional drop and insert interface for passing T3 channels (in T1 pairs) to a second-

ary channelized T3 device. Functions as a T3 DSU/CSU, M13 multiplexer, and 3/1/0 timeslot interchange

DACS. The T3 clock or any of the odd T1s contained in the T3 circuit may deliver timing for the system.

8,16,24, 32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221Lx)

The Voice Compression Module (VCOM Module) combines with other ATLAS 890 components to

implement voice over frame relay (VoFR) capability. The Voice Compression Resources modules support

8, 16, 24, or 32 simultaneous compressed calls using G.723.1 or Netcoder compression algorithms.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 1, System Description

Page 6 of 6

Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1)

The Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Option Module supports multiple, independent BONDING sessions with

each session capable of using from 2 to 32 channels of 56K or 64K data. The Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource

Module combines with other ATLAS 890 components to provide a flexible disaster recovery system.

HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1)

Certain ATLAS applications require a large number of High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) controllers

beyond the 35 supplied on the system controller module. The HDLC Resource Module contains 128

HDLC controllers and is used when the application requirements call for more HDLC controllers than are

provided with the other ATLAS hardware components. The HDLC Resource Module provides no physical

interfaces.

Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1)

The Modem-16 Resource Module is a high-capacity card for the ATLAS Integrated Access System, capa-

ble of processing 16 modem calls and 16 ISDN calls. Modem or ISDN calls are presented to ATLAS via

one or more Primary Rate ISDN (PRI), Basic Rate ISDN (BRI), or T1 circuits. The Modem-16 Resource

Module can be used in cooperation with the Safe-T-Net feature of the ATLAS 890 to provide a V.34 disas-

ter recovery solution.The Modem-16 Resource Module combines with the Async-232 Module to enable

dial-up access for up to 32 users. The Modem-16 Resource Module provides no physical interfaces.

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1)

The Async-232 Module combines with the ATLAS 890 components to provide solutions for a variety of

wide area networking (WAN) applications. Providing sixteen asynchronous EIA-232 data terminal equip-

ment (DTE) ports, the Async-232 Module serves as the interface to terminal servers and other DTE equip-

ment. Each port of the Async-232 Module can be configured to operate at any standard asynchronous rate

up to 115.2 kbps. The Async-232 Module is only supported in dial-up applications (using the Modem-16

Resource Module) and is not a valid interface for TDM data.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 1 of 22

ENGINEERING GUIDELINES

CONTENTS

Equipment Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

AC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Reviewing the front Panel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

ACO Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

CRAFT Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Reviewing the Rear Panel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Admin Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

10/100BaseT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Alarm Relay Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

External Input Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Option Module Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 1200261L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Octal BRI Option Module (P/N 1200186L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

T3 Drop and Insert Option Module (P/N 1200225L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

At-A-Glance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

FIGURES

Figure 1. ATLAS 890 Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 2. ATLAS 890 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

TABLES

Table 1. CRAFT Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Table 2. ATLAS 890 Front Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Table 3. ATLAS 890 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Table 4. Admin In Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 2 of 22

Table 5. Ethernet Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Table 6. Alarm Relay Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Table 7. External Relay Monitor Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Table 8. T1/PRI Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Table 9. DB-15 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Table 10. DB-62 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Table 11. V.35 Winchester Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Table 12. DB-78 Pinout for the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Table 13. DB-78 Pinout for the Quad USSI Option Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Table 14. EIA-530 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Table 15. EIA-530A Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Table 16. RS-449/V.36 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Table 17. RS-232 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Table 18. CCIT X.21 V.11 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Table 19. BRI Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Table 20. DB-25 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Table 21. T3 Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Table 22. T3 Drop and Insert Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Table 23. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 3 of 22

1. EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS

The ATLAS 890 base unit is 17.08” W, 11.67” D, and 10.5” H and can be mounted in a 19-inch or 23-inch

rack (mounting brackets included in shipment). All other equipment (option modules) fit inside the base

unit.

2. POWER REQUIREMENTS

AC System

The ATLAS 890 has a maximum power consumption of 400W and a maximum current draw of 7A regard-

less of the configuration of option modules installed in the base unit.

DC System

The ATLAS 890 has a maximum power consumption of 325W and a maximum current draw of 8 amps at

-48VDC regardless of the configuration of option modules installed in the base unit.

3. REVIEWING THE FRONT PANEL DESIGN

The front panel contains the Alarm Cut-off (ACO) switch, the CRAFT port, and the controller and option

module status LEDs. The LEDs provide visual information about the ATLAS 890 Base Unit and any

option module that may be installed. Figure 1 identifies the ACO switch, the CRAFT port, and the LEDs.

Figure 1. ATLAS 890 Front Panel Layout

Controller LEDs Option Module LEDs

CRAFT

Port

ACO

Switch

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 4 of 22

ACO Switch

The ACO switch deactivates (clears) the Alarm Relay, located on the rear panel of the ATLAS 890, after

an alarm condition has occurred. If an alarm condition is corrected and then reoccurs, the Alarm Relay will

activate again.

CRAFT Port

Use the CRAFT port to configure the system via an EIA-232 connection. The connector type is shown

below, and Table 1 gives the CRAFT port pinout.

Front Panel LEDs

With the ATLAS 890 powered-up, the front panel LEDs provide visual information about the status of the

ATLAS 890 and any option modules that may be installed. Table 2 provides a brief description of the front

panel features, and Table 3 on page 5 provides detailed information about the LEDs.

CONNECTOR TYPE RJ-48C

PART NUMBER AMP# 555164-2

Table 1. CRAFT Port Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1,2 UNUSED —

3 RXDATA Data received by the ATLAS 890

4 UNUSED —

5 TXDATA Data transmitted by the ATLAS 890

6,7 UNUSED —

8 UNUSED —

Table 2. ATLAS 890 Front Panel Description

Feature Description

SYSTEM STATUS LEDS Displays the status of the fans, alarm, and ACO buttons for ATLAS 890.

(See Table 3 on page 5.)

Fans Indicates the fans are operational.

Alarm Indicates a triggered alarm condition for the alarm relays.

ACO Indicates the alarm cut-off switch is pressed.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 5 of 22

CONTROLLER MODULE

LEDS Displays the status of the network interface. (See Table 3.) All LEDs are

off if no network module is installed.

Status Indicates the operational condition of the controller installed in the

controller slot.

Online Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use.

Test Indicates that the module is in test.

Link Indicates there is an active 10/100 Ethernet connection on the installed

controller module.

OPTION MODULE LEDS Displays by row the operational condition of each module installed in the

option slots. (See Table 3.) All LEDs will be off if no option module is

installed.

Status Indicates the operational condition of modules installed in the option

slots.

Online Indicates whether the module is available for use or is currently in use. If

the module is manually taken offline, this LED is turned off.

Test Indicates that one or more ports within a module are in test.

ACO SWITCH Clears the Alarm Relay connection located on the rear panel of the

ATLAS 890.

CRAFT PORT Allows the ATLAS 890 to connect to a computer or modem using the

CRAFT port (an EIA-232 port).

Table 3. ATLAS 890 LEDs

FOR THESE LEDS... THIS COLOR

LIGHT... INDICATES THAT...

FANS Red (solid) Fan speed is too low or fan is disconnected.

Amber (solid) Fan speed is too high.

Green (solid) All fans are functioning properly.

ALARM Red (solid) A fan, external input, or power supply error has occurred.

LED will remain red until the ACO button is pressed.

ACO Amber ACO button is being pressed.

Table 2. ATLAS 890 Front Panel Description (Continued)

Feature Description

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 6 of 22

STAND-BY CONTROLLER

Status Green (slow blink) Stand-by controller is present.

Online Green (solid) Stand-by controller operational for redundancy.

Red (fast blink) Controller cannot automatically become the active

controller while the current active controller is installed.

Test N/A N/A

Link Green (solid) Ethernet link detected.

ACTIVE CONTROLLER

Status Green (slow blink) Card is not ready.

Green (fast blink) Card is not supported.

Green (solid) Active controller present.

Online Amber (solid) Controller is in test mode.

Amber (fast blink) Card is upgrading firmware.

Red (fast blink) Flash parameters are not compatible.

Green (fast blink) Card is unresponsive or not supported.

Red (fast blink) Card is not ready.

Test Amber (solid) Controller is in test mode.

Link Green (solid) Ethernet link detected.

MODULE STATUS Green (solid) Module is present.

Green (fast blink) Module has been manually taken offline by the user.

Red (solid) Module failed self-test.

Red (fast blink) Module has no response, has been removed, or is not

supported.

Red (slow blink) Module is not ready.

None No module occupies the slot.

Table 3. ATLAS 890 LEDs (Continued)

FOR THESE LEDS... THIS COLOR

LIGHT... INDICATES THAT...

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 7 of 22

4. REVIEWING THE REAR PANEL DESIGN

The ATLAS 890 rear panel contains 16 slots for housing option modules which provide a variety of addi-

tional resources and data ports. All slots are functionally identical. The ATLAS 890 also contains two slots

for housing controller modules and a single slot dedicated for power supply use only (see Figure 2). The

most common configuration is a fully redundant system with two system controllers and two power sup-

plies. A fully redundant AC-powered ATLAS 890 provides 13 option slots. A fully redundant DC-powered

ATLAS 890 provides 15 option slots.

Figure 2. ATLAS 890 Rear Panel

MODULE ONLINE Green (solid) Module has an active connection.

Green (fast blink) Module has invalid flash memory or is downloading

firmware.

MODULE TEST Yellow (solid) Module is in a test mode.

Table 3. ATLAS 890 LEDs (Continued)

FOR THESE LEDS... THIS COLOR

LIGHT... INDICATES THAT...

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 8 of 22

Admin Port

The Admin port (EIA-232) connects to a computer or modem. The control port input provides the follow-

ing functions:

• Accepts EIA-232 input from a PC or a modem for controlling the ATLAS 890.

• Operates at 2400, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps.

• Acts as input for either VT 100 or PC control.

• Acts as an interface for flash memory software downloads using XMODEM.

The Admin connection follows, and Table 4 shows the pinout.

10/100BaseT Connection

The 10/100BaseT port (RJ-48C) provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN connection, which is used for IP

Routing, TFTP, SNMP, and Telnet connections. The network connection follows, and Table 5 shows the

pinout.

CONNECTOR TYPE RJ-48C

PART NUMBER AMP# 555164-2

Table 4. Admin In Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 GND Ground - connected to unit chassis

2 RTS Request to send - flow control

3 RXDATA Data received by the ATLAS 890

4 DTR Data terminal ready

5 TXDATA Data transmitted by the ATLAS 890

6 CD Carrier detect

7UNUSED—

8 CTS Clear to send - flow control

CONNECTOR TYPE (USOC) RJ-48C

PART NUMBER AMP# 555164-2

Table 5. Ethernet Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 TX1 Transmit Positive

2 TX2 Transmit Negative

3 RX1 Receive Positive

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 9 of 22

Alarm Relay Connection

This connection alerts the user when a selected alarm condition exists. The four-pin, removable terminal

block connects with external wiring. Refer to DLP-002, Connecting the Alarm Contacts and the External

Input for detailed instructions. Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch located on the front

panel of the ATLAS 890.

Table 6 shows the pinout for the Alarm Relay connector.

External Input Connection

This connection alerts the user when a selected external alarm condition exists. This connection could be

used to monitor a UPS with dry contacts or another ATLAS 890. The three-pin, removable terminal block

connects with external wiring. Refer to DLP-002, Connecting the Alarm Contacts and the External Input

for detailed instructions. Clear the alarm condition by pressing the ACO switch located on the front panel

of the ATLAS 890.

Table 7 shows the pinout for the External Input connector.

4, 5 UNUSED —

6 RX2 Receive Negative

7, 8 UNUSED —

Table 6. Alarm Relay Connector Pinout

Pin Name Description

1 Normally Closed (NC) Opens when a selected alarm condition is present.

2 Normally Open (NO) Closes when a selected alarm condition is present.

3 Common (COM) Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO

terminal.

4 Chassis Ground (GND)

Table 7. External Relay Monitor Connector Pinout

Pin Name Description

1 INPUT Monitors for the presence or absence of -48 VDC

2 VOUT -48 VDC @ 1 mA

3 Chassis Ground (GND)

Table 5. Ethernet Pinout (Continued)

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 10 of 22

5. OPTION MODULE INTERFACES

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3)

Each port of the Quad T1/PRI Option Module uses a single, eight-position modular jack to connect to the

T1 or PRI circuit. Table 8 gives the pinout for this jack.

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)

The DB-62 port of the Quad E1/PRA Option Module supplies a DB-15 connection as defined in Table 9

using provided adapter cables. The DB-62 interface pinout is shown in Table 10.

CONNECTOR TYPE (USOC) RJ-48C

Table 8. T1/PRI Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 R1 RXDATA-RING Receive data from the network

2 T1 RXDATA-TIP Receive data from the network

3 — UNUSED —

4 R TXDATA-RING Send data towards the network

5 T TXDATA-TIP Send data towards the network

6,7,8 — UNUSED —

Table 9. DB-15 Connector Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 RT Receive Tip

2 GND Ground

3 TT Transmit Tip

4 GND Ground

5 GND Ground

7 GND Ground

9 RR Receive Ring

11 TR Transmit Ring

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 11 of 22

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200184L1)

Each DB-78 port of the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module supplies a V.35 Winchester-style connection as

defined in Table 11 using provided adapter cables. The DB-78 interface pinout is shown in Table 12.

Table 10. DB-62 Connector Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 P4 TT Port 4 Transmit Tip 42 GND Ground

2 P4 TR Port 4 Transmit Ring 43 P4 RT Port 4 Receive Tip

3 GND Ground 44 P4 RR Port 4 Receive Ring

6 GND Ground 45 GND Ground

7 P3 TT Port 3 Transmit Tip 48 GND Ground

8 P3 TR Port 3 Transmit Ring 49 P3 RT Port 3 Receive Tip

9 GND Ground 50 P3 RR Port 3 Receive Ring

12 GND Ground 51 GND Ground

13 P2 TT Port 2 Transmit Tip 54 GND Ground

14 P2 TR Port 2 Transmit Ring 55 P2 RT Port 2 Receive Tip

15 GND Ground 56 P2 RR Port 2 Receive Ring

18 GND Ground 57 GND Ground

19 P1 TT Port 1 Transmit Tip 60 GND Ground

20 P1 TR Port 1 Transmit Ring 61 P1 RT Port 1 Receive Tip

21 GND Ground 62 P1 RR Port 1 Receive Ring

Note: Pins that are not identified are not used.

P(1-4) indicates the Port

Table 11. V.35 Winchester Pinout

Pin CCITT DESCRIPTION

A 101 Protective ground (PG)

B 102 Signal ground (SG)

C 105 Request to send (RTS) from DTE

D 106 Clear to send (CTS) to DTE

E 107 Data set ready (DSR) to DTE

F 109 Received line signal detector (DCD) to DTE

H — Data terminal ready (DTR) from DTE

J — Ring indicator (RI)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 12 of 22

R 104 Received data (RD-A) to DTE

T 104 Received data (RD-B) to DTE

V 115 RX clock (RC-A) to DTE

X 115 RX clock (RC-B) to DTE

P 103 Transmitted data (TD-A) from DTE

S 103 Transmitted data (TD-B) from DTE

Y 114 TX clock (TC-A) to DTE

AA 114 TX clock (TC-B) to DTE

U 113 External TX clock (ETC-A) from DTE

W 113 External TX clock (ETC-B) from DTE

NN — Test mode (TM) to DTE

Table 12. DB-78 Pinout for the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 RXD-A 2/4 41 RTS-B 2/4

2RXD-B 2/4 42GND

3 RXC-A 2/4 43-48 Not used

4RXC-B 2/4 49MOD2

5TXD-A 2/4 50MOD0

6 TXD-B 2/4 51 EXT-TXC-A 1/3

7 TXC-A 2/4 52 DTR-B 1/3

8 TXC-B 2/4 53 DTR-A 1/3

9 EXT-TXC-A 2/4 54 DCD-B 1/3

10 EXT-TXC-A 2/4 55 DCD-A 1/3

11-17 Not used 56 DSR-B/RI 1/3

18 GND 57 DSR-A 1/3

19 GND 58 CTS-B 1/3

20 CHASIS GND 59 CTS-A 1/3

21 CTS-A 2/4 60 CHASIS GND

22 CST-B 2/4 61 GND

Note: 1/3 or 2/4 indicates the port on the Nx 56/64 Module

Table 11. V.35 Winchester Pinout (Continued)

Pin CCITT DESCRIPTION

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 13 of 22

Quad USSI Option Module (P/N 1200261L1)

Table 13 through Table 18 show pinouts for the available interfaces for the Quad USSI Option Module and

the cable part numbers required by each interface.

23 DSR-A 2/4 62-68 Not used

24 DSSR-B/RI 2/4 69 MOD1

25 DCD-A 2/4 70 EXT-TXC-B 1/3

26 DCD-B 2/4 71 TXC-B 1/3

27 DTR-A 2/4 72 TXC-A 1/3

28 DTR-B 2/4 73 TXD-B 1/3

29-37 Not used 74 TXD-A 1/3

38 RTS-A 1/3 75 RXC-B 1/3

39 RTS-B 1/3 76 RXC-A 1/3

40 RTS-A 2/4 77 RXD-B 1/3

78 RXD-A 1/3

Table 13. DB-78 Pinout for the Quad USSI Option Module

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 RXD-A 2/4 41 RTS-B 2/4

2RXD-B 2/4 42GND

3 RXC-A 2/4 43-48 Not used

4RXC-B 2/4 49MOD2

5TXD-A 2/4 50MOD0

6 TXD-B 2/4 51 EXT-TXC-A 1/3

7 TXC-A 2/4 52 DTR-B 1/3

8 TXC-B 2/4 53 DTR-A 1/3

9 EXT-TXC-A 2/4 54 DCD-B 1/3

10 EXT-TXC-A 2/4 55 DCD-A 1/3

11-17 Not used 56 DSR-B/RI 1/3

Note: 1/3 or 2/4 indicates the port on the USSI Module

Table 12. DB-78 Pinout for the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (Continued)

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

Note: 1/3 or 2/4 indicates the port on the Nx 56/64 Module

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 14 of 22

18 GND 57 DSR-A 1/3

19 GND 58 CTS-B 1/3

20 CHASIS GND 59 CTS-A 1/3

21 CTS-A 2/4 60 CHASIS GND

22 CST-B 2/4 61 GND

23 DSR-A 2/4 62-68 Not used

24 DSSR-B/RI 2/4 69 MOD1

25 DCD-A 2/4 70 EXT-TXC-B 1/3

26 DCD-B 2/4 71 TXC-B 1/3

27 DTR-A 2/4 72 TXC-A 1/3

28 DTR-B 2/4 73 TXD-B 1/3

29-37 Not used 74 TXD-A 1/3

38 RTS-A 1/3 75 RXC-B 1/3

39 RTS-B 1/3 76 RXC-A 1/3

40 RTS-A 2/4 77 RXD-B 1/3

78 RXD-A 1/3

CONNECTOR TYPE EIA-530

SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L2

Table 14. EIA-530 Connector Pinout

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 Shield (Ground) 13 Clear to Send (B)

2 Transmit Data (A) 14 Transmit Data (B)

3 Received Data (A) 15 Transmit Clock (A)

4 Request to Send (A) 16 Received Data (B)

5 Clear to Send (A) 17 Receive Clock (A)

6 DCE Ready (A) 18 Local Loopback

7 Signal Ground 19 Request to Send (B)

8 Carrier Detect (A) 20 DTE Ready (A)

Table 13. DB-78 Pinout for the Quad USSI Option Module (Continued)

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

Note: 1/3 or 2/4 indicates the port on the USSI Module

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 15 of 22

9 Received Clock (B) 21 Remote Loopback

10 Carrier Detect (B) 22 DCE Ready (B)

11 Ext. Transmit Clock (B) 23 DTE Ready (B)

12 Transmit Clock (B) 24 Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

25 Test Mode

CONNECTOR TYPE EIA-530A

SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L2

Table 15. EIA-530A Connector Pinout

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 Shield (Ground) 13 Clear to Send (B)

2 Transmit Data (A) 14 Transmit Data (B)

3 Received Data (A) 15 Transmit Clock (A)

4 Request to Send (A) 16 Received Data (B)

5 Clear to Send (A) 17 Receive Clock (A)

6 DCE Ready (A) 18 Local Loopback

7 Signal Ground 19 Request to Send (B)

8 Carrier Detect (A) 20 DTE Ready (A)

9 Received Clock (B) 21 Remote Loopback

10 Carrier Detect (B) 22 Ring Indicator

11 Ext. Transmit Clock (B) 23 Signal Ground

12 Transmit Clock (B) 24 Ext. Transmit Clock (A)

25 Test Mode

CONNECTOR TYPE RS-449/V.36

SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L1

Table 16. RS-449/V.36 Connector Pinout

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 Shield (Ground) 19 Signal Ground

2 Signaling Rate Indicator 20 Receive Common

3 Not Used 21 Not Used

Table 14. EIA-530 Connector Pinout (Continued)

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 16 of 22

4 Transmit Data (A) 22 Transmit Data (B)

5 Transmit Clock (A) 23 Transmit Clock (B)

6 Received Data (A) 24 Receive Data (B)

7 Request to Send (A) 25 Request to Send (B)

8 Receive Clock (A) 26 Receive Clock (B)

9 Clear to Send (A) 27 Clear to Send (B)

10 Local Loopback 28 Terminal in Service

11 DCE Ready (A) 29 DCE Ready (B)

12 DTE Ready (A) 30 DTE Ready (B)

13 Carrier Detect (A) 31 Carrier Detect (B)

14 Remote Loopback 32 Select Standby

15 Ring Indicator 33 Signal Quality

16 Select Frequency 34 New Signal

17 Ext. Transmit Clock (A) 35 Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

18 Test Mode 36 Standby/Indicator

37 Send Common

CONNECTOR TYPE RS-232

SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L4

Table 17. RS-232 Connector Pinout

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 Shield (Ground) 14 Sec. Transmit Data

2 Transmit Data 15 DCE Transmit Clock

3 Received Data 16 Sec. Received Data

4 Request to Send 17 Receive Signal Element Timing

5 Clear to Send 18 Not used

6 Data Set Ready 19 Sec. Request to Send

7 Signal Ground 20 Data Terminal Ready

8 Received Line Signal Detector 21 Signal Quality Detector

9 + Voltage 22 Ring Indicator

Table 16. RS-449/V.36 Connector Pinout (Continued)

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 17 of 22

Octal BRI Option Module (P/N 1200186L2)

Each port of the Octal BRI Option Module uses a single RJ-45 jack to connect to a standard BRI U inter-

face circuit. Table 19 shows the network pinout connection. The required wiring connection follows:

10 - Voltage 23 Data Signal Rate Selector

11 Not used 24 DTE Transmit Clock

12 Sec. Received LIne Signal Indicator 25 Not used

13 Sec. Clear to Send

CONNECTOR TYPE CCIT X.21 V.11

SYSTEM PART NUMBER 4200261L3

Table 18. CCIT X.21 V.11 Connector Pinout

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 Shield (Ground) 8 Signal Ground

2 Transmit Data (A) 9 Transmit Data (B)

3 Request to Send (A) 10 Request to Send (B)

4 Received Data (A) 11 Received Data (B)

5 Carrier Detect (A) 12 Carrier Detect (B)

6 Transmit/Receive Clock (A) 13 Transmit/Received Clock (B)

7 Ext. Transmit Clock (A) 14 Ext. Transmit Clock (B)

15 Not Used

CONNECTOR TYPE (USOC) RJ-45

Table 19. BRI Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 Unused —

4 Ring Ring to and from the Network Interface

5 Tip Tip to and from the Network Interface

Table 17. RS-232 Connector Pinout (Continued)

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 18 of 22

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1)

Each Async-232 Interface provides a DB-25 connection as defined in Table 20 using provided adapter

cables.

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)

Each T3 Option Module provides BNC connectors for transmit and receive connections define in Table 21.

Using provided RG 59, 75 ohm cables.

Table 20. DB-25 Connector Pinout

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Shield Shielded ground connection

2 TXD Transmit data from DTE

3 RXD Receive data to DTE

4 RTS Request to send from DTE

5 CTS Clear to send to DTE

6 DSR Data set ready to DTE

7 GND Ground

8 DCD Data carrier detect to DTE

9, 10, 11, 12, 13,

14, 15, 16, 17, 18,

19, 21, 23, 24, 25

Unused n/a

20 DTR Data terminal ready from DTE

22 RI Ring indicator to DTE

Table 21. T3 Module Connections

NAME DESCRIPTION

RX IN Receive data from the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

TX OUT Transmit data to the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 19 of 22

T3 Drop and Insert Option Module (P/N 1200225L1)

Each T3 Drop and Insert Option Module provides BNC connectors for both primary and secondary trans-

mit and receive connections as defined in Table 22 using provided RG 59, 75 ohm cables.

Table 22. T3 Drop and Insert Module Connections

NAME DESCRIPTION

Primary RX IN Primary receive data from the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Primary TX OUT Primary transmit data to the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Secondary RX IN Secondary receive data from the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

Secondary TX OUT Secondary transmit data to the network, 75 ohms ± 5%, unbalanced

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 20 of 22

6. AT-A-GLANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Table 23 lists the specifications for the ATLAS 890 system.

Table 23. Specifications

Application Feature Specification

TDM APPLICATIONS

TDM bandwidth 49 Mbps Full duplex

Dedicated map connections 766 dedicated DS0 map connections in

each of the 5 maps

SWITCHING APPLICATIONS

ISDN signaling types National ISDN

Lucent 5E

AT&T 4ESS (PRI Only)

Northern DMS-100 (Nortel Custom)

ETSI/DSS1

T1 signaling types Loop-Start

Ground-Start

E&M Wink

E&M Immediate

Feature Group D

DSP Features DTMF/MF tones support

Progress tone generation

32 available DSP channels

BRI Connections 128 connections

PRI Connections 766 DS0 connections

RBS T1 Connections 766 DS0 connections

27 simultaneous dial tones

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 21 of 22

FRAME RELAY

Packet throughput 11,700 pkts/sec (64-1500 size packets)

Management signaling

interfaces UNI (user and network)

NNI

Management signaling types ANSI T1.617-D (Annex D)

ITU-T Q.933-A (Annex A)

LMI (Group of four)

Auto

Encapsulation RFC 1490

PVC support 990 PVCs per packet endpoint

Congestion control FECN / BECN

Discard eligible (DE)

Quality of service (QOS) Prioritization on a per-PVC basis

Testing (ADTRAN proprietary) PVC loopback

Round trip delay measurement

SNMP support RFC 1315

PPP

Connection support 35 PPP connections to the internal router

(not exceeding 11,700 packets per second)

100 PPP connections to the internal router

(requires HDLC Module and cannot exceed

11,700 packets per second)

Authentication support PAP

CHAP

EAP

Keepalive support On/Off

Interface support Numbered interfaces

Un-numbered interfaces

Table 23. Specifications (Continued)

Application Feature Specification

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines

Page 22 of 22

IP ROUTING

Route discovery RIP V1

RIP V2

ICMP

ARP

IARP

UDP Relay

OSPF

SNMP support RFCs 1315, 1213, 1406

Adtran Enterprise MIB

VOICE COMPRESSION

Algorithm Voice Compression Module

G.723.1 or Netcoder (proprietary)

Number of channels supported Up to 64 compression channels

PCM coding µ-Law, A-Law (future)

Fax support 9600 bps

DTMF generation and

detection TIA 464A

Table 23. Specifications (Continued)

Application Feature Specification

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 1 of 8

NETWORK TURNUP PROCEDURE

CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Unpack and Inspect the SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Contents of ADTRAN Shipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Grounding Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Supplying Power to the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

AC Powered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

DC Powered Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Installing Network and Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Instructions for Installing the ATLAS 890 Controller and Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200311L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Quad USSI Option Module System (P/N 4200261LX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module (P/N 1200186L2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221LX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

FIGURES

Figure 1. ATLAS 890 Slot Designation (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 2 of 8

1. INTRODUCTION

This section discusses the installation process of the ATLAS 890 installation.

2. TOOLS REQUIRED

The tools required for installation of the ATLAS 890 shelf are:

• #2 Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flat-head screwdriver (for installing modules)

3. UNPACK AND INSPECT THE SYSTEM

Each ATLAS 890 is shipped in its own cardboard shipping carton. Open each carton carefully and avoid

deep penetration into the carton with sharp objects.

After unpacking the unit, inspect it for possible shipping damage. If the equipment has been damaged in

transit, immediately file a claim with the carrier, then contact ADTRAN Customer Service (see Customer

Service, Product Support Information, and Training in the front of this manual).

Contents of ADTRAN Shipments

Your ADTRAN shipment includes the following items:

• The ATLAS 890 Base Unit

• The ATLAS 890 System CD

• AC Power cord - ADTRAN P/N 3127031 (with AC systems)

• 19-23” Convertable Rackmount brackets and screws

• RJ-45—DB-25 adapter (1 for modem connection)

• RJ-45 control port cable (1) - ADTRAN P/N 3127004

• RJ-45—DB-9 adapter (1)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling mod-

ules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components.

Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working

on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically

grounded.

Customers must supply the Ethernet cable.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 3 of 8

4. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS

To following provides grounding instruction information from the Underwriters’ Laboratory UL1950

Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment, of

July 28, 1995.

An equipment grounding conductor that is not smaller in size than the ungrounded branch-circuit supply

conductors is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system. Bare, covered, or

insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding

conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow

stripes. The equipment grounding conductor is to be connected to ground at the service equipment.

The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type,

and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at

the service equipment.

A supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be installed between the product or system and

ground that is in addition to the equipment grounding conductor in the power supply cord.

The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall not be smaller in size than the ungrounded

branch-circuit supply conductors. The supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be connected

to the product at the terminal provided, and shall be connected to ground in a manner that will retain the

ground connection when the product is unplugged from the receptacle. The connection to ground of the

supplementary equipment grounding conductor shall be in compliance with the rules for terminating bond-

ing jumpers at Part K or Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Termination of the

supplementary equipment grounding conductor is permitted to be made to building steel, to a metal electri-

cal raceway system, or to any grounded item that is permanently and reliably connected to the electrical

service equipment ground.

The supplemental grounding conductor shall be connected to the equipment using a number 8 ring terminal

and should be fastened to the grounding lug provided on the rear panel of the equipment. The ring terminal

should be installed using the appropriate crimping tool (AMP P/N 59250 T-EAD Crimping Tool or equiv-

alent.)

5. SUPPLYING POWER TO THE UNIT

AC Powered Systems

The AC powered ATLAS 890 comes equipped with a detachable 6-foot power cord with a 3-prong plug for

connecting to a grounded power receptacle. As shipped, the ATLAS 890 is set to factory default condi-

tions. After installing the Base Unit and any option modules, the ATLAS 890 is ready for power-up. To

power-up the unit, ensure that the unit is properly connected to an appropriate power source and turn on the

unit using the on/off switch on the rear panel.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 4 of 8

DC Powered Systems

The DC powered ATLAS 890 comes equipped with a DC Power supply to furnish the voltages necessary

for proper backplane operation. As shipped, the ATLAS 890 is set to factory default conditions. After

installing the Base Unit and any option modules, the ATLAS 890 is ready for power-up.

6. MOUNTING OPTIONS

The ATLAS 890 Base Unit may be installed for tabletop or 19-inch or 23-inch rackmount. The rackmount

brackets included with the Base Unit can be used in 19-inch or 23-inch applications. For a rackmount

installation, the ATLAS 890 Base Unit allows flush-face mount, face-forward mount, center mount, and

rear mount.

• This unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364.8 of the NEC NFPA

70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., central office, behind a

locked door, service personnel only area).

• Power to the ATLAS 890 AC system must be from a grounded 90-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz

source.

• The power receptacle uses double-pole, neutral fusing.

• Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45 oC.

• This unit shall be installed in accordance with Article 400 and 364.8 of the NEC NFPA

70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., central office, behind a

locked door, service personnel only area).

• Power to the ATLAS 890 DC system must be from a reliably grounded -48 VDC source

which is electrically isolated from the AC source.

• The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated min-

imum 60 VDC, maximum 10A.

• Maximum recommended ambient operating temperature is 45 oC.

Be careful not to upset the stability of the equipment mounting rack when installing this

product.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 5 of 8

7. INSTALLING NETWORK AND OPTION MODULES

Figure 1 shows the option slot numbering designation as viewed from the rear of the ATLAS 890. The

functionally identical option slots only accept ATLAS 800 Series option modules and the controller slots

only accept ATLAS 890 controller modules.

Figure 1. ATLAS 890 Slot Designation (Rear Panel)

Instructions for Installing the ATLAS 890 Controller and Option Modules

Option modules are intended to be serviced by qualified service personnel only.

Instructions for Installing the ATLAS 890 Option Modules

Step Action

1Remove the cover plate from the appropriate option slot of the ATLAS 890 rear panel.

2Slide the Option Module into the option slot until the module is firmly seated against the front of the

chassis.

3Secure the thumbscrews at both edges of the module. Tighten with a screwdriver.

4Connect the cables to the associated device(s).

5Complete installation of remaining modules and Base Unit as specified in the appropriate sections of this

Network Turnup Procedure.

Controllers

Modules Modules or

Power Supply

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 6 of 8

Quad T1/PRI Option Module (P/N 1200185L3)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad T1/PRI Option Module includes the following items:

• Quad T1/PRI Option Module

• Quad T1/PRI Option Module Quick Start Guide

• Four cables (RJ-48C to RJ-48C), ADTRAN P/N: 3125M008

• Two crossover cable (RJ-48C to RJ-48C), ADTRAN P/N: 3125M010

• Two DB-15 to RJ-48 Adapters, ADTRAN P/N: 3196027

Quad E1/PRA Option Module (P/N 1200264L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad E1/PRA Option Module includes the following items:

• Quad E1/PRA Option Module

• Quad E1/PRA Option Module Quick Start Guide

• One DB-62 to Quad DB-15 female cable, ADTRAN P/N: 3125I061

Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module (P/N 1200311L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module includes the following items:

• Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module

• Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module Quick Start Guide

• Two DB-37 to V.35 converter cables, ADTRAN P/N 3125I029

The Quad E1/PRA Option Module may also be purchased with BNC Network Connection

Interfaces (P/N 4200264L1).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 7 of 8

Quad USSI Option Module System (P/N 4200261LX)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Quad USSI Option Module System includes the following items:

• Quad USSI Option Module System

• Quad USSI Option Module System Quick Start Guide

And one of the following:

• EIA-530/530A to DB-78 Cable (System P/N 4200261L2, Cable P/N 3125I058)

• RS-449/V.36 (System P/N 4200261L1, Cable P/N 3125I057)

• RS-232 (System P/N 4200261L4, Cable P/N 3125I063)

• CCIT X.21 V.11 (System P/N 4200261L3, Cable P/N 3125I056)

Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module (P/N 1200186L2)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module includes the following items:

• Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module

• Octal Basic Rate ISDN Option Module Quick Start Guide

• Eight RJ-45-to-RJ-11 cables, ADTRAN P/N: 3125M007

T3 Option Module (P/N 1200223L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the T3 Option Module includes the following items:

• T3 Option Module

• T3 Option Module Quick Start Guide

• Two 6 ft. coaxial BNC cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125I054)

T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface (P/N 1200225L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface includes the following

items:

• T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface

• T3 Option Module with Drop and Insert Interface Quick Start Guide

• Four 6 ft. coaxial BNC cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125I054)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 3, Network Turnup Procedure

Page 8 of 8

8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules (P/N 1200221LX)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the 8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules includes the

following items:

• 8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules

• 8,16,24,32 Channel Voice Compression Resource Modules Quick Start Guide

Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module (P/N 1200262L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module includes the following items:

• Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module

• Nx 56/64 IMUX Resource Module Quick Start Guide

HDLC Resource Module (P/N 1200222L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the HDLC Resource Module includes the following items:

• HDLC Resource Module

• HDLC Resource Module Quick Start Guide

Modem-16 Resource Module (P/N 1200181L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Modem-16 Resource Module includes the following items:

• Modem-16 Resource Module

• Modem-16 Resource Module Quick Start Guide

Async-232 Option Module (P/N 1200182L1)

Shipping Contents

The ADTRAN shipment of the Async-232 Option Module includes the following items:

• Async-232 Option Module

• Async-232 Option Module Quick Start Guide

• Two DB-78 to Octal RS-232 cables (ADTRAN P/N 3125I030)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 1 of 234

USER INTERFACE GUIDE

This section of ADTRAN’s ATLAS 890 System Manual is designed for use by network administrators and

others who will configure and provision the system. It contains information about navigating the VT-100

user interface and using the four-character display.

CONTENTS

Navigating the Terminal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Terminal Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Window Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Additional Terminal Menu Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Navigating Using the Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Moving through the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Session Management Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Configuration Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Terminal Menu and System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Selecting the Appropriate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

System Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

System Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Modules Menu (Quad T1/PRI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Modules Menu (Quad E1/PRA Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Modules Menu (Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Modules Menu (Quad USSI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Modules Menu (IMUX 56/64 Resource Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Modules Menu (Octal BRI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Modules Menu (Voice Compression Resource Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Modules Menu (Async-232 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Modules Menu (Modem-16 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Modules Menu (HDLC Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Modules Menu (T3 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Modules Menu (T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Packet Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Dedicated maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Dedicated Maps - (Quad T1/PRI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Dedicated Maps - (Quad E1/PRA Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Dedicated Maps - (Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 2 of 234

Dedicated Maps - (Quad USSI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Dedicated Maps - (Octal BRI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Dedicated Maps - (T3 and T3 with Drop and Insert Option Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Dedicated Maps - (Pkt Endpt Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Dedicated Maps - (Packet Voice Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Circuit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Dial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Dial Plan - (Quad T1/PRI, T3, and T3 Drop and Insert Option Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Dial Plan - (Quad E1/PRA Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Dial Plan - (Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Dial Plan - (Quad USSI Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Dial Plan - (Octal BRI/U Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Dial Plan - (Async-232 Option Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Dial Plan - (Pkt Endpt Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Dial Plan - (Circuit Backup Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Dial Plan - (Packet Voice Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

FIGURES

Figure 1. Top-Level Terminal Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 2. Alternate Menu View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Figure 3. System Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Figure 4. System Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Figure 5. System Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Figure 6. System Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 7. View Selftest Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 8. ATLAS 890 System Controller Self-Test Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 9. Modules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 10. Loopback Test Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Figure 11. E1/PRA Network Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Figure 12. Network Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Figure 13. Packet Manager Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Figure 14. Router Menu (IP Selected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Figure 15. Dedicated Maps Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Figure 16. Circuit Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Figure 17. Dial Plan Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

TABLES

Table 1. Password Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Table 2. IP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Table 3. ICMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Table 4. TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Table 5. UDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Table 6. IP Fast Cache Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 3 of 234

1. NAVIGATING THE TERMINAL MENU

Terminal Menu Window

The ATLAS 890 uses a multi-level menu structure that contains both menu items and data fields. All menu

items and data fields display in the terminal menu window (see Figure 1), through which you have com-

plete control of the ATLAS 890.

Figure 1. Top-Level Terminal Menu Window

Menu Path

The first line of the terminal menu window (the menu path) shows the session’s current position (path) in

the menu structure. For example, Figure 1 shows the top-level menu with the cursor on the SYSTEM INFO

submenu; therefore, the menu path reads ATLAS 890/System Info.

Window Panes

When you first start a terminal menu session, the terminal menu window is divided into left and right

panes. The left pane shows the list of available submenus, while the right pane shows the contents of the

currently selected submenu.

You can view the terminal windows in two ways: with fields and submenus displaying horizontally across

the right pane, or with fields and submenus displaying vertically down the right pane. Viewing submenus

vertically rather than horizontally allows you to see information at a glance rather than scrolling horizon-

tally across the window. To change the view, move your cursor to an index number and press <Enter>.

Left Pane

Menu Path

Right Pane

Tool Tip System Time

Navigation Help

Extended Help

Slot Status

SCU

^A=more

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 4 of 234

Figure 2 shows this alternate view. Fields and submenu names may vary slightly in this view.

Figure 2. Alternate Menu View

Window Pane Navigation

Use the following chart to assist you in moving between and within the two window panes.

Right Window Pane Notation

The right window pane shows the contents of the currently selected menu. These contents can

include both submenu items and data fields. Some submenus contain additional submenus and

To do this... Press this key...

Move from left pane to right pane Tab

Enter

Right arrow

Move from right pane to left pane Tab

Escape

Left arrow

Backspace

Move within each pane Up arrow

Down arrow

Left arrow

Right arrow

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 5 of 234

some data fields contain additional data fields. The following chart explains the notation used to

identify these additional items.

Additional Terminal Menu Window Features

• SCU - displays status information about the system controllers, such as ONLIN (online), STBY (stand-

by), and NRDY (not ready).

• Tool Tip - provides a brief description of the currently selected (highlighted) command

• Slot Status - displays status information, such as OK, WARN, or ALRM about slots 1-16

• Extended Help - displays information about selected commands (CTRL+A)

• Navigation Help - lists characters used for navigating the terminal menu and session management

(CTRL+Z)

• System Time - displays current time

Navigating Using the Keyboard Keys

You can use various keystrokes to move through the terminal menu, to manage a terminal menu session,

and to configure the system. Press <CTRL+Z> to activate a pop-up screen listing the navigation key-

strokes.

Moving through the Menus

This notation... Means that...

[+] More items are available when selected

[DATA] More items are available when selected

<+> An action is to be taken, such as activating a test

Highlighted menu item You can enter data in this field

Underlined field The field contains read-only information

To do this... Press this key...

Return to the home screen H

Jump between two menu items

Press <J> while the cursor is located on a menu item, and you jump back to the

main screen.

Go to another menu item, press <J>, and you jump back to the screen that was

displayed the first time you pressed <J>.

Press <J> anytime you want to jump between these items.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 6 of 234

Session Management Keystrokes

Select items Arrows

Edit a selected menu item Enter

Cancel an edit Escape

Close pop-up help screen Escape

Move between the left and right panes Tab

Arrows

Move to the top of a screen A

Move to the bottom of a screen Z

Ascend one menu level Backspace

To do this... Press this key...

Log out of a session CTRL+L

Invalidate the password entry and return to the login screen CTRL+S

Refresh the screen

To save time, only the portion of the screen that has changed is refreshed. This

option should only be necessary if the display picks up incorrect characters

caused by disconnecting and reconnecting the terminal session.

CTRL+R

View Extended Data

Display data fields too large for display window. CTRL+V

To do this... Press this key...

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 7 of 234

Configuration Keystrokes

Getting Help

The bottom line of the terminal menu window contains context-sensitive help information. When the cur-

sor is positioned over a set of configuration items, a help message displays (when available) providing a

description of the item. When more detailed help is available for a particular item, ^A displays at the bot-

tom of the window. At this point, if you press <CTRL+A>, a pop-up help screen displays with information

about the item.

Press <CTRL+Z> to activate a help screen that displays the available keystrokes you can use to navigate

the terminal menu.

To do this... Press this key...

Restore factory default settings.

This setting restores the factory defaults based on the location of the cursor. If the

cursor is on a module line (in the MODULES menu), then only the selected module

is updated to factory defaults.

Copy selected items to the clipboard.

The amount of information you can copy depends on the cursor location when you

press <C>:

If the cursor is over an editable field, only that item is copied.

If the cursor is over the index number of a list, then all of the items in the row of

the list are copied. For example, if the cursor is over the SLOT # field in the

MODULES screen, all of the information associated with the slot is copied.

Paste the item stored in the clipboard, if the information is compatible.

You must confirm all pastes - except those to a single editable field. P

Increment the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information

into those fields. >

Decrement the value of certain types of fields by one when you paste information

into those fields. <

Insert a new list item.

For example, add a new item to the DEDICATED MAP connection list by pressing

<I> while the cursor is over the index number.

Delete a list item.

For example, delete an item from the DEDICATED MAP connection list by pressing

<D> while the index number is active.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 8 of 234

2. TERMINAL MENU AND SYSTEM CONTROL

Selecting the Appropriate Menu

The terminal menu is the access point to all other operations. Each terminal menu item has several func-

tions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters. Use the chart

below to help select the appropriate terminal menu.

Security Levels

To edit terminal menu items, you must have a password and the appropriate security level. Table 1

describes the six security levels.

To do this... Go to this menu...

Review and monitor general system information for the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM INFO

Review and monitor system status for the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM STATUS

Set up the operational configuration for the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM CONFIG

Update settings, transfer files, perform system diagnostics, and reboot

the ATLAS 890 SYSTEM UTILITY

Review and configure settings for each installed module, including the

ATLAS 890 network modules MODULES

Define and configure all layer 2 connections including Frame Relay and

PPP endpoints PACKET MANAGER

Define, configure and monitor all ATLAS 890 Router functions ROUTER

Assign dedicated connections between any two ports in the ATLAS 890 DEDICATED MAPS

Dial Backup functions including monitoring the status of backup links,

manually forcing a backup switch, and restoring a primary connection CIRCUIT STATUS

Set global ATLAS 890 switch parameters or set individual parameters

for each port in the ATLAS 890 that handles a switched call DIAL PLAN

Table 1. Password Security Level

Security Level Description

5 Read-only permission for all menu items - minimum rights

4 Read permission for all menu items and permission to use test commands

3Access to all commands except passwords, flash download, authentication

methods, and interface configurations

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 9 of 234

3. MENU DESCRIPTIONS

The remainder of this section describes ATLAS 890 menu and submenu options.

> SYSTEM INFO

The SYSTEM INFO menu provides basic information about the unit as well as data fields for editing infor-

mation. Figure 3 displays the submenus and data fields that are available when you select this menu item.

Figure 3. System Information Menu

2Access to all commands except passwords, flash download, and authentication

methods

1 Access to all commands except passwords

0Permission to edit every menu item, including creating and editing passwords -

maximum rights

To help you follow the terminal menu hierarchy, the following notations are used:

> MENUS

» SUBMENUS

»» SUB-SUBMENUS

Table 1. Password Security Level (Continued)

Security Level Description

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 10 of 234

»S

YSTEM NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the ATLAS 890. This name can help you dis-

tinguish between different installations. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field,

including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar).

»S

YSTEM LOCATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the ATLAS 890. This field is to help you

keep track of the physical location of the unit. You can enter up to 40 alphanumeric characters in this

field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underbar).

»S

YSTEM CONTACT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a user-configurable text string for a contact name. You can use this field to enter the name,

phone number, or e-mail address of a person responsible for the ATLAS 890 system. You can enter up

to 40 alphanumeric characters in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an under-

bar).

»F

IRMWARE REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the current firmware revision level of the controller.

»S

YSTEM UPTIME

Read security: 5

Displays the length of time the ATLAS 890 system has been running. Each time you reset the system,

this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 min and 0 secs.

»S

TARTUP MODE

Read security: 5

Displays details about the last system startup. For example, rebooting the ATLAS 890 from the SYS-

TEM UTILITY menu will cause this field to read WARM REBOOT.

»C

URRENT TIME/DATE (24HR)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the current date and time, including seconds. To edit this field, place the cursor on the field

and press <Enter>. Then, enter the time in a 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00 pm), and the

date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 10-30-1998). Press <Enter> when you are finished to exit

the menu item.

»I

NSTALLED MEMORY

Read security: 5

Displays the type and amount of memory in use (including Flash memory and DRAM).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 11 of 234

»S

ERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number for the unit. The serial number of the ATLAS 890 will automatically dis-

play in this field.

»B

OOT ROM REV

Read security: 5

Displays the boot ROM revision.

> SYSTEM STATUS

The SYSTEM STATUS menu provides the user with status information about the ATLAS 890 operational

parameters including logged system events and timing. Figure 4 displays the submenus and data fields that

are available when you select this menu item.

Figure 4. System Status Menu

»E

VENT LOG

Read security: 5

Displays the last 349 warning or failure messages sent including the day, date, and priority of the mes-

sage. The most recent messages display at the top of the list. The following read-only fields are avail-

able to review:

»» TIME Displays the date (mm/dd) and the time (hh:mm:ss) that the event

occurred.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 12 of 234

»C

LEAR SYSTEM EVENT LOG

Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Clears the event log. When you select this command, the following prompt displays:

Select Y to clear the log or N to exit the command.

»E

THERNET PORT

Read security: 5

Displays status information about the Ethernet port. An asterisk (*) indicates activity for the item. The

following read-only fields are available to review:

»» CAT Displays the severity of the event. The possible categories are

Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Normal, and Info. You can specify

which types of errors you want the system to log with the System

Event Logging option. See Section 7, System Event Logging for

details.

»» SRC Displays the source of the event.

»» SLOT Displays the slot number in which the event occurred. If this field

displays SCUA or SCUB (for the active system controller), the event

that occurred was an ATLAS 890 system event.

»» PORT Displays the port in which the event occurred.

»» EVENT DESCRIPTION Displays a description of the event.

If you clear the event log, you cannot retrieve the data.

»» I/F STATUS Indicates the current status of the Ethernet port.

»» TX FRAMES Indicates the number of frames transmitted from the Ethernet port

since system startup.

»» RX FRAMES Indicates the number of frames received on the Ethernet port since

system startup.

»» ETHERNET RATE Indicates whether the Ethernet network is 10 or 100BaseT.

Confirm (y/n)

This will clear the entire event log.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 13 of 234

»A

DMIN PORT

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Displays the status of the RJ-45 Admin port.

»C

RAFT PORT

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Displays the status of the RJ-45 Craft port.

»S

YSTEM ALARMS

Read security: 5

Contains alarm information for the ATLAS 890 system including power, temperature, fan and external

input alarms.The following status symbols are used:

»» POWER ALARMS

Read security: 5

Indicates that one or both of the power supplies are not functional. These power supplies are

continuously monitored to determine failures. If one of these supplies fails, a message will be

placed in the EVENT LOG (see Section 7, System Event Logging for more details).

»» SIGNAL LEADS Displays the state of the Admin port signals (RTS, CTS, DCD, and

DTR).

»» TX BYTES Displays the number of bytes transmitted from the Admin port.

»» RX BYTES Displays the number of bytes received by the Admin port.

»» OVERRUN ERRS Displays the number of overrun errors received by the Admin port.

»» FRAMING ERRS Displays the number of framing errors received by the Admin port.

»» CLEAR COUNTERS Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Clears the Admin port statistics. Press Y to activate this command.

»» TX BYTES Displays the number of bytes transmitted from the Craft port.

»» RX BYTES Displays the number of bytes received by the Craft port.

»» OVERRUN ERRS Displays the number of overrun errors received by the Craft port.

»» FRAMING ERRS Displays the number of framing errors received by the Craft port.

»» CLEAR COUNTERS Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Clears the Craft port statistics. Press Y to activate this command.

[–] Normal condition

[*] Failure condition

[!] No Information Available

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 14 of 234

»» TEMPERATURE ALARMS

Read security: 5

Indicates that the internal temperature of the power supply has exceeded normal operating lim-

its. When the operating temperature is exceeded by any power supply in slots 14-17, a warning

will be placed in the EVENT LOG (see Section 7, System Event Logging for more details), but

no other action will be taken.

»» FAN ALARMS

Indicates that installed fans are operating normally.

»» EXTERNAL INPUT ALARMS

Indicates that the external input has been activated.

»S

YSTEM TIMING SOURCE

Read security: 5

Indicates which timing source (primary or backup) is currently being used by ATLAS 890 and whether

the system is locked onto this source. If the display does not indicate locked, the ATLAS 890 does not

have a valid source of timing and cannot reliably transfer data. Review the current setting for system

timing source in the SYSTEM CONFIG menu. See Primary Timing Source and Backup Timing Source

on page 17 for details.

»R

ESOURCE USAGE

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Provides resource usage tracking for dynamic resources throughout the system. This includes current,

average, and minimum availability for both analog and digital resources.

»» DATA TABLES

Read security: 5

Displays resource usage for dynamic resources throughout the system in a table format.

[–] Indicates input is not active

[*] Indicates input is active

RESOURCE TYPE Displays types of dynamically allocated resources being tracked

throughout the system. Examples are ANALOG (analog modem

resource), DIGITAL (digital call resource), and PKT VOICE (packet

voice compression resource).

CURRENT Shows the number of resources available (not in use) and the total

number of resources. If a resource is taken offline, it is not included

in the total.

AVERAGE Shows the average number of resources available since the

statistics were last reset.

MIN Shows the fewest number of resources available since the last reset.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 15 of 234

»» CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the statistics displayed under data tables.

»T

RUNK USAGE

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Indicates trunk use: (NET TERM PRI, NET TERM RBS; USER TERM PRI, USER TERM RBS).

»» DATA TABLES

Read security: 5

Display for collected resource usage data.

0 (ZERO) AVAIL Provides a count of the number of times the quantity of available

resources reached 0.

HR DATA Displays the AVERAGE, MINIMUM, and 0 AVAILABLE data broken

down in hour increments for a 24-hour period.

RESET Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Activates the reset of all accumulated availability statistics for the

selected resource.

DISPLAY FORMAT Read security: 5

Sets the display format for all RESOURCE USAGE statistics to

either raw data or percentages.

RESET MODE Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets the reset mode for the RESOURCE USAGE statistics to one of

the following:

DAILY - performs reset daily at 12:00 AM

WEEKLY - performs reset on Saturday night, 12:00 AM

MANUAL - disables automatic reset of the resource usage statistics

TRUNK TYPE Displays types of trunks in the system.

CURRENT Shows the number of resources available (not in use) and the total

number of resources. If a resource is taken offline, it is not included

in the total.

AVERAGE Shows the average number of resources available since the

statistics were last reset.

MIN Shows the fewest number of resources available since the last reset.

0 (ZERO) AVAIL Provides a count of the number of times the quantity of available

resources reached 0.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 16 of 234

»» CONFIG

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Configures the statistics displayed under data tables.

»R

EDUNDANCY

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

»» SCU A

Read security: 5

Displays the current status of the controller module installed in the controller A slot.

»» SCU B

Read security: 5

Displays the current status of the controller module installed in the controller B slot.

»» HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY

Read security: 5

Displays the current hardware of the controller modules installed in the controller A and con-

troller B slots. Provides status for any compatibility issues that exist.

»» FIRMWARE COMPATIBILITY

Read security: 5

Indicates whether the firmware revision of controller A and controller B have any incompati-

bility problems that would affect controller switchover.

»» ACTIVE/STANDBY CONFIGURATION

Read security: 5

Compares the configuration of controller A and controller B and displays any discrepancies in

the comparison and indicates when the controllers are synchronized.

SLT/PRT Displays the usage data broken down by slots and ports.

RESET Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Activates the reset of all accumulated availability statistics.

DISPLAY FORMAT Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Sets the display format for all RESOURCE USAGE statistics to

either raw data or percentages.

RESET MODE Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets the reset mode for the RESOURCE USAGE statistics to one of

the following:

DAILY - performs reset daily at 12:00 AM

WEEKLY - performs reset on Saturday night, 12:00 AM

MANUAL - disables automatic reset of the resource usage

statistics

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 17 of 234

»» STANDBY STARTUP MODE

Read security: 5

Displays the manner in which the standby controller booted.

»» INTERCONTROLLER COMMUNICATIONS

Read security: 5

Displays the status of the Intercontroller Communications Channel (ICC).

> SYSTEM CONFIG

The SYSTEM CONFIG menu allows you to set up the ATLAS 890 operational configuration. Figure 5

shows the items included in this menu.

Figure 5. System Configuration Menu

»P

RIMARY TIMING SOURCE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Selects the primary timing source. You can select either INTERNAL or any port from one of the

installed network or option modules.

»B

ACKUP TIMING SOURCE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Selects the secondary timing source. You can select either INTERNAL or any port from one of the

installed network or option modules. ATLAS 890 uses the backup timing source if the primary timing

source goes into alarm. The BACKUP TIMING SOURCE should be different from the PRIMARY TIMING

SOURCE for the most reliable operation.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 18 of 234

» ADLP ADDRESS

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Shows the system ADTRAN Data Link Layer Protocol (ADLP) address for connecting remote devices

to ADTRAN management software. The allowable range is between 2 and 65520. Enter a value not

used by any other ADTRAN units controlled by the management software.

»S

ESSION TIMEOUT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the number of seconds the terminal session must remain idle before the session times out. You

can enter zero to deactivate this option (the session will never time out).

»M

AX TELNET SESSIONS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the maximum number of Telnet sessions that can be active at the same time. Enter a number

between 0 and 12 in this field.

»E

THERNET PORT

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Provides a way to configure various settings for the Ethernet port. The following options are available

for review and editing:

If you enter zero in this field, you will not be able to use Telnet. Only enter zero if you want

to completely lock out Telnet access.

»» PORT NAME Defines the name of the Ethernet port. You can leave this field

blank.

»» IP ADDRESS Lists the address assigned to the base Ethernet port. This address is

composed of four decimal numbers, each in the range of 0 to 255,

separated by periods. This value is set to 0.0.0.0 by default. The IP

address is used for the 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface. Obtain the

correct IP address from your LAN administrator.

»» DEFAULT GATEWAY Defines or changes the default gateway. Enter the default gateway

address by entering a decimal number into the appropriate field and

then pressing <Enter> to move to the next field. You will need a

default gateway if the LAN contains multiple segments. This

address is composed of four decimal numbers, each in the range of

0 to 255, separated by periods. This value is set to 0.0.0.0 by

default. Contact your LAN administrator for the appropriate

address.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 19 of 234

»A

DMIN PORT

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Accepts input for configuring the Admin port.

»» SUBNET MASK Defines which part of a destination IP address contains the network

number. This address is composed of four decimal numbers, each

in the range of 0 to 255, separated by periods. This value is set to

0.0.0.0 by default. This part of the destination IP address is used

along with the ATLAS 890 IP address to determine which nodes

must be reached through the default IP gateway.

»» MAC ADDRESS Displays the system Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC)

address. This field is read-only.

»» ETHERNET SPEED Defines the rate at which the ethernet port operates. Choose from

10 MBPS or AUTO 10/100. When the unit is set for AUTO 10/100,

the ATLAS 890 auto detects the data rate of the LAN and sets itself

to that rate, either 10 or 100 Mbps.

»» PORT NAME Defines the name of the Admin port. You can leave this field

blank.

»» PORT TYPE Specifies whether you use DIRECT or DIAL mode. DIRECT mode is

used when connecting to a VT-100 terminal, and DIAL mode is

used for modem access.

»» PORT SPEED Specifies the baud rate of the port. Select either 2400, 9600, 19200,

or 38400. If you are using DIAL for PORT TYPE, ensure that the

PORT SPEED setting matches the modem baud rate.

»» MODEM INITIALIZATION

STRING

Specifies the initialization string for a modem. Refer to your

modem documentation for acceptable initialization strings. The

default value will set most modems to the appropriate

configuration for the ATLAS 890.

»» INITIALIZE MODEM Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Sends the modem initialization string to the modem. When you

select this command, the following message displays: Please verify

a modem is connected to the Admin port before continuing. Confirm

(y/n). Ensure that a modem is connected before selecting Y.

»» FLOW CONTROL This option sets the flow control for the Admin port. You may

configure the Admin port flow control for NONE or H/W

(hardware).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 20 of 234

»C

RAFT PORT

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

» SNMP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides a way to configure SNMP access for the ATLAS 890. The following options are available for

review and editing:

»» SNMP ACCESS

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Defines whether SNMP access to the ATLAS 890 is enabled or disabled. Select the appropri-

ate option.

»» SNMP COMMUNITIES

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Defines SNMP manager(s) characteristics as follows:

»» TRAP TRANSMISSION

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Enables and disables SNMP trap transmission.

»» AUTHEN TRAP TRANSMISSION

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Enables and disables the authentication failure trap.

»» PORT NAME Defines the name of the Craft port. You can leave this field blank.

»» PORT SPEED Specifies the baud rate of the port. Select either 2400, 9600, 19200,

or 38400. If you are using DIAL for PORT TYPE, ensure that the

PORT SPEED setting matches the modem baud rate.

IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address of the network manager.

PRIVILEGES Defines the GET (read-only) and GET/SET (read and write)

privileges.

GET NAME Defines the community name for GET access. This value must

match the GET name defined on the network management station.

PUBLIC is the default name.

SET NAME Defines the community name for SET access. This value must

match either the GET or SET name defined on the network

management station. PUBLIC is the default name.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 21 of 234

»» TRAPS DESTINATION

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Defines the destination for SNMP traps as follows:

»» DS1 CURRENT PERF THRESHOLDS

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Defines performance threshold values for DS1 Line and Path statistics recorded in a 15-minute

interval. If a statistic value exceeds its threshold value, then the corresponding Alert Trap will

be sent if the alert event is armed and Alert Traps are enabled. These thresholds apply to all

DS1 interfaces in the system.

IP ADDRESS Identifies the IP address for the network manager (NM) to sends

traps.

COMMUNITY Defines the community name for trap destinations. This name

must match the community name defined on the NM.

TRAP

FILTERING

Sets the minimum severity level required for a system event to

generate an SNMP trap. If a trap event occurs with a security

level equal to or more severe than the trap type’s current threshold

setting, the event is sent as an SNMP trap. (Refer to the ADTRAN

Technical Support web page (www.adtran.com) for a listing of all

MIBs containing traps and their security levels.) The following

threshold levels for the available selections: DISABLED,

CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR, WARNING, NORMAL, and INFO.

STATION

TYPE

To deliver the SNMP trap packet with the COMMUNITY NAME

unchanged, define the STATION TYPE as NORMAL. If you are

using T-Watch PRO, define the STATION TYPE as T-WATCH

MGMT and append the COMMUNITY NAME with

“.ADLP ADDRESS.” Within the SNMP trap packet, this field is

automatically updated before it is sent to the management station.

CURRENT ES

THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Errored Seconds (ES) parameter. The default value is

65 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

CURRENT

SES THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Severely Errored Seconds (SES) parameter. The

default value is 10 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

CURRENT

SEFS

THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) parameter.

The default value is 2 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 22 of 234

»» DS1 TOTAL CURRENT PERF THRESHOLDS

Write security: 3; Read Security: 5

Defines performance threshold values for DS1 Line and Path statistics. If a statistic value

exceeds its threshold value, then the corresponding Alert Trap will be sent if the alert event is

armed and Alert Traps are enabled. These thresholds apply to all DS1 interfaces in the system.

CURRENT

UAS THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Unavailable Seconds (UAS) parameter. The default

value is 10 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

CURRENT

CSS THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) parameter. The default

value is 1 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

CURRENT

PCV THRSH

(D4)

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Path Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line

Type is Super Frame (AT&T D4 format) DS1. The default value

is 72 framing errors for an approximate BER level of

10E-5.

CURRENT

PCV THRSH

(ESF)

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Path Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line

Type is Extended Super Frame DS1. The default value is 13,296

CRC errors for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

CURRENT

LES THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Line Errored Seconds (LES) parameter. The default

value is 65 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

CURRENT

LCV THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Current

15 minute Line Code Violations (LCV) parameter. The default

value is 13,340 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

ES THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Errored Seconds (ES) parameter. The default value is 648 for an

approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

SES THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Severely Errored Seconds (SES) parameter. The default value is

100 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

SEFS

THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) parameter. The

default value is 17 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 23 of 234

»» ASP ENDPOINT COMMUNITIES

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Configures the ADLP list used when accepting incoming traps from remote ADTRAN TSU

100 Series or ISU 512 units. For a trap to be recognized and sent to the network management

station, the remote unit must be listed in the ASP Endpoint Communities list. The following

parameters must be configured:

»» SNMP/ASP PROXY

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Enables or disables Get_Request capabilities for remote units. When enabled, this feature

allows SNMP requests to be sent from the Network Management Station through the ATLAS

890 to the selected remote unit. Remote units must be ADTRAN TSU 100 Series or ISU 512

products.

TOTAL

UAS THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Unavailable Seconds (UAS) parameter. The default value is 10

for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

CSS THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) parameter. The default value is 4

for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

PCV THRSH

(D4)

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total Path

Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line Type is Super

Frame (AT&T D4 format) DS1. The default value is 691 framing

errors for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

PCV THRSH

(ESF)

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total Path

Code Violations (PCV) parameter, when the Line Type is

Extended Super Frame DS1. The default value is 132,960 CRC

errors for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

LES THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Line Errored Seconds (LES) parameter. The default value is 648

for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

TOTAL

LCV THRSH

The DS1 performance monitor Threshold Value for the Total

Line Code Violations (LCV) parameter. The default value is

133,400 for an approximate BER level of 10E-5.

ADLP

ADDRESS

Enter the ADLP address (Unit ID) of the remote unit. Only traps

containing an ADLP address listed here will be accepted.

ADLP

PASSWORD

Enter the ADLP password (Unit Password) of the remote unit.

The password will be verified before traps will be accepted from

the remote unit.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 24 of 234

»» SNMP/ASP POLLING

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Enables or disables trap polling through the ATLAS 890 to remote ADTRAN TSU 100 Series

or ISU 512 units. When enabled, this feature allows the ATLAS 890 to forward any traps

received from remote units to the Network Management Station. The remote unit must be

listed in the ASP Endpoint Communities for the traps to be forwarded.

»E

VENT LOGGING

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets the system event severity level threshold for each of the ATLAS 890 system event types. When-

ever a system event occurs, that event is logged if the event’s severity level is equal to or more severe

than the event type’s current threshold setting. See Section 7, System Event Logging for detailed infor-

mation on the system events.

»S

YSLOG SETUP

Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Configures the ATLAS 890 Syslog client for use with a Syslog server (supplied with ADTRAN Utili-

ties or available on most UNIX platforms).

»» TRANSMISSION

Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Enables or disables the transmission of log events to the external Syslog server

»» HOST IP ADDRESS

Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Lists the IP address of the external server that is running the Syslog host daemon.

»» HOST FACILITY

Write security: 3; Read security: 3

Specifies the facility destination of log events. Facilities are located on the host and are man-

aged by the Syslog host daemon running on either a UNIX machine or a PC.

»R

EAL TIME CLOCK

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides access to the two options listed below. You can review and edit these options.

»» CURRENT

TIME/DATE

Displays the current date and time, including seconds. To edit this

field, enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00

pm), and enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example,

09-23-1998).

»» AUTO DAYLIGHT

SAVINGS

When enabled, automatically updates the time and date when

Daylight Savings Time starts and when Standard Time ends.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 25 of 234

»A

CCESS PASSWORDS

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Provides a way to edit passwords and to add new users and passwords. All menu items are protected by

passwords of varying security levels. By assigning different passwords to different security levels, the

ATLAS 890 system administrator can control which users can change various menu items. You can

assign multiple passwords at the same access level. This way, different users with the same access

privileges can have different passwords. Each of the six password security levels are described in

Table 1 on page 8.

»B

ONDING CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration submenus available for the IMUX Module. This configuration is shared among all

IMUX Modules.

»» LABEL Defines a username.

»» PASSWORD Allows you to change the password (the default password is

password). The current password displays as a series of asterisks

(********). The password can contain up to a combination of 12

case-sensitive alphanumeric characters, spaces, or special characters.

»» ACCESS RIGHTS Defines the password level for the corresponding label. You can select

from six different password levels (see Table 1 on page 8).

»» ACTIVE Displays the number of users for each label that are currently logged

into the system.

»» TXINIT TIMER Specifies the length of time the originating endpoint attempts to detect

the BONDING negotiation pattern from the answering endpoint

before deciding the BONDING call has failed.

»» TXFA TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to detect the

BONDING frame pattern when a call is connected before deciding the

BONDING call has failed. When interoperating with other

manufacturers' BONDING equipment, it may be necessary to change

this time so that it matches TXADD01.

»» TXADD01 TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints wait for additional calls to

be connected at the end of negotiation before deciding that the

BONDING call has failed. The factory default setting is sufficient for

most calls to connect, although when dialing overseas it may be

necessary to lengthen this timer to allow for slower call routing.

»» TXDEQ TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to equalize the

network delay between the bearer channels before deciding the

BONDING call has failed.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 26 of 234

»A

LARM RELAY RESET

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Clears the Alarm Relay located on the rear panel of the ATLAS 890. Activating the software Alarm

Relay Reset functions the same as manually pressing the ACO Switch located on the ATLAS 890 front

panel.

»A

LARM RELAY THRESHOLD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines which threshold sets the Alarm Relay. These thresholds include CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR,

WARNING, and NORMAL. If an alarm occurs that is greater than or equal to the threshold selected, the

Alarm Relay will set. For example, if the threshold is set for MAJOR, then ALL Major alarms and ALL

critical alarms will set the Alarm Relay. There is one exception -- setting the threshold to NORMAL will

not set the Alarm Relay for Normal events. No Normal events set the Alarm Relay.

»E

XTERNAL INPUT THRESHOLD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the alarm level and text for external switch contacts. If the external switch contact is closed,

the alarm is thrown and the event text is sent to the event log.

»» TANULL TIMER Specifies the length of time the answering endpoint attempts to detect

the BONDING negotiation pattern from the originating endpoint

before deciding the BONDING call has failed. It may be necessary to

shorten this timer if the DTE equipment using the BONDING module

also has timer constraints for completing non-BONDING parameter

negotiation.

»» TCID TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to negotiate an

agreeable value for bearer channels and channel capacities before

deciding the BONDING call has failed.

»» CALL STAGGER Specifies the amount of delay between placing calls for outgoing

BONDING sessions. The following call stagger values are available

NO STAGGER

There is no delay between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

500 MS

Wait approximately ½ second between the call dialing of a

BONDING session.

1 SEC.

Wait approximately 1 second between the call dialing of a BONDING

session.

2 SEC.

Wait approximately 2 seconds between the call dialing of a

BONDING session.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 27 of 234

»» NAME

Read security: 5

Displays the name External Input to identify the entry for the external input alarm.

»» DESCRIPTION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Contains the user-defined text that will be sent to the ATLAS 890 event log when the alarm is

triggered.

»» LEVEL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the event log category for the message associated with the alarm. For more details on

event log categories, refer to Section 7, System Event Logging.

> SYSTEM UTILITY

Use the SYSTEM UTILITY menu to view and set the system parameters shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6. System Utility Menu

»U

PDATE FIRMWARE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Updates firmware when ATLAS 890 enhancements are released. Two transfer methods are available

for use in updating any modules that contain Flash memory—including the ATLAS 890 system con-

troller. The first transfer method uses the ATLAS 890 serial Admin port of the system controller and

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 28 of 234

XMODEM protocol. The second transfer method uses the ATLAS 890 built-in Ethernet port of the

system controller and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). For more details on updating firmware,

please refer to DLP-009 and DLP-010.

»» MODULE SLOT

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Displays the slot you selected for firmware updating. When this option first appears, NONE

SELECTED displays. When you move the cursor to this field and press <Enter>, a dialog box

opens, allowing you to select SCU A, SCU B, SLOT 1 through SLOT 16, or ALL MODULES

OF A TYPE.

»» MODULE TYPE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Reflects the module type selected in MODULE SLOT. The selections only include upgradable

modules.

»» TRANSFER METHOD

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Lists the two transfer methods for updating firmware after selecting a module slot: XMODEM

and TFTP. XMODEM transfers files by connecting to a communications program that sup-

ports XMODEM uploads to the terminal interface. TFTP transfers files by specifying an

appropriate server address and filename. The standby controller may only be upgraded using

the ICC channel.

TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Configures the IP address of the TFTP Server on which the update file resides.

ATLAS 890 uses this field to locate the network server on which the update file

resides.

TFTP SERVER FILENAME

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Identifies the name of the update file to retrieve from the TFTP Server. Enter the full

path name and filename for the file.

»» RESTART SCHEDULE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Indicates when to restart the updated module to invoke the new code, after selecting a module

slot. The two options include RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE and RESTART AT

SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME.

RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Automatically restarts the module immediately after the update is complete.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 29 of 234

RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Lets you specify a date and time to automatically restart the updated module. When

you select this option, a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below

the current field.

RESTART DATE AND TIME

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Defines the date and time to restart the system after updating. Enter the time using

a 24-hour format (i.e., 23:25:30 for 11PM, 25 minutes, 30 seconds). Enter the date

in mm-dd-yyyy format (i.e.,11-08-2000).

»» CURRENT UPDATE STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates progress or problems encountered during the current update process. The field dis-

plays IDLE if no update is in progress or when the update is successfully completed. At the end

of a successful update, the contents of this field are copied into PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS.

If you are updating several modules at the same time (if MODULE SLOT is set to ALL MOD-

ULES OF A TYPE), this option displays [+], indicating this field contains submenu items. The

following submenus display:

During the TFTP upload process, various status messages are provided in the CURRENT

UPDATE STATUS field. For a detailed listing of these messages, please refer to DLP-010.

»» PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the status of the previous update, after selecting a module slot. If a firmware update

has not been attempted for a particular slot, this field reads HAS NOT BEEN ATTEMPTED. Fol-

lowing a successful update, the field reads MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE. If an update was

unsuccessful, the appropriate error message displays.

»» BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Begins updating the firmware for the selected modules. To start this action, enter Y to begin or

enter N to cancel. You can also cancel the operation after the update has begun. For

XMODEM updates, cancel the process via the terminal emulation software (consult your

documentation for the information on how to do this). For TFTP updates, you can cancel the

process by selecting CANCEL UPDATE from this field.

SLT Indicates the slot number.

TYPE Defines the type of module for each slot.

CURRENT STATUS Indicates the status of the current update.

PREVIOUS STATUS Indicates the status of the previous update.

PREVIOUS TIME Indicates the time of the previous update.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 30 of 234

»U

PDATE STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the status of the current firmware update. These fields are identical to those defined above in

CURRENT UPDATE STATUS.

»C

ONFIG TRANSFER

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Used only with TFTP transfers. Sends a file containing the ATLAS 890 configuration to a file on a

TFTP server using the TFTP protocol through the 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. CONFIG TRANSFER

also lets you save the ATLAS 890 configuration as a backup file, so you can use the same configura-

tion with multiple ATLAS 890 units. In addition, CONFIG TRANSFER can retrieve a configuration file

from a TFTP server.

To support these transfers, ADTRAN delivers a TFTP program with ATLAS 890 called TFTP Server.

You can configure any PC running Microsoft Windows with this software, and store a configuration

file.

Only one configuration transfer session (upload or download) can be active at a time. The TCP/IP

parameters are not saved or overwritten as part of an ATLAS 890 unit’s transferred configuration;

therefore, identical configurations can be sent to multiple units. For complete details on configuration

transfers to/from the ATLAS 890, please refer to DLP-010.

»» TRANSFER METHOD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the method used to transfer the configuration file to or from a server. Currently,

TFTP is required.

»» TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Get this address information from your System

Administrator.

»» TFTP SERVER FILENAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the name of the configuration file that you transfer to or retrieve from the TFTP

server. The default name is ATLAS890.cfg, but it is editable.

»» CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of the update.

»» PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the status of the previous update.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 31 of 234

»» LOAD AND USE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Retrieves the configuration file specified in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field from the

server. To start this command, enter Y. To cancel this command, enter N.

»» SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Saves the configuration file specified in TFTP SERVER FILENAME to the server identified in

TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS. To start this command, enter Y. To cancel this command,

enter N.

»S

YSTEM UTILIZATION

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Displays statistics related to the ATLAS 890 internal operating system. Please check with ADTRAN

Technical Support before attempting to use this menu.

»S

YSTEM SELFTEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Initiates a system self-test. The self-test consists of memory tests and data integrity tests for each

installed module.

»» SELFTEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Activates the self-test. To confirm self-test activation, press Y; to cancel the self-test press N.

»» SELECTED TESTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Allows the user to select a system-wide test or an individual card test. Choose from ALL

TESTS, SLOT:SLT0 SYS CTRL, or any other installed option/network module.

»» CURRENT TEST STATUS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays which part of self-test is currently being run. See VIEW SELFTEST LOG below for

details on individual tests.

If you execute this command, the ATLAS 890 retrieves the configuration file, reboots, then

restarts using the new configuration.

Self-tests disrupt data flow.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 32 of 234

»» CURRENT SLOT/PORT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays which slot and part is currently being tested.

»» VIEW SELFTEST LOG

Read security: 5

Displays time-stamped log of the tests conducted and the Pass/Fail results. Self-tests verify

data integrity and processor control to each port. Each port is looped back and a data pattern is

sent and tested.

The result of the self-test on each installed port is listed with Pass/Fail results. Figure 7 depicts

a typical test log. The fields included in the log are described below the figure.

Figure 7. View Selftest Log

The self-test log includes the following fields:

The tests associated with the system controller are shown in Figure 8 on page 33.

IDX Index number of the log.

TIME Time and date of the log entry.

SLATLAS 890 slot number.

PTATLAS 890 port number.

EVENT Event description.

RESULT Show PASS/FAIL results.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 33 of 234

Figure 8. ATLAS 890 System Controller Self-Test Log

»» CLEAR SELFTEST LOG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Clears the self-test log.

»P

ING

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows you to send pings (ICMP echo requests) to devices accessible via the network.

»» IP ADDRESS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Specifies the IP address to ping.

»» COUNT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Specifies the number of pings to send. The default value is 4, and the maximum value is 99.

»» SIZE (BYTES)

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Specifies the size in bytes of the data portion of the ping request. The default value is 64 bytes,

This event... Logs this result...

Flash Flash memory checksum verified

BootRom Boot ROM checksum verified

DSP RAM Memory associated with the Digital Signal Processor

RTC RAM Memory associated with the real time clock

NV Batt Tests the battery for non-volatile memory

TDM RAM Memory associated with mapping TDM bandwidth

DRAM Dynamic RAM used for program execution

Redundancy The gate array that controls redundancy operation

ICC The InterController Communications Channel

HDLC The High-Level Data Link Controllers

Only one ping session can be active at a time.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 34 of 234

and the maximum size is 1024 bytes.

»» TIMEOUT (MS)

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Specifies the time in milliseconds to wait for the ping reply before timing out. The default

timeout is 3 seconds, and the maximum timeout value is 10 seconds.

»» ROUND TRIP MIN

Read security: 5

Displays the minimum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current set of pings.

»» ROUND TRIP AVG

Read security: 5

Displays the average round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current set of pings.

»» ROUND TRIP MAX

Read security: 5

Displays the maximum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the current set of pings.

»» TX STATS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of ping requests transmitted (n TXED), the number of ping replies

received (n RXED), and the number of ping requests that were lost (n LOST).

»» RESET STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Resets all ping statistics to zero. If the ping client is active, this menu will stop it.

»» START/STOP

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

If the ping client is currently idle, this menu sends pings to the specified address. If the ping

client is active, the menu either starts or stops sending pings.

» ATEL CLIENT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows a user to remotely configure ADTRAN TSUs using ADLP over the inband management chan-

nel on a V.35 port. This feature only allows for remote sessions through the ATLAS 890 to the TSUs,

not vice versa.

»» ATEL ADDRESS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Defines the ADLP address (Unit ID) assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to.

»» CONNECT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Activator used to start an ATEL client session to the remote unit configured in the ATEL

ADDRESS field.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 35 of 234

»T

ELNET CLIENT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Allows a user to open a Telnet session to any device listed in the ATLAS 890 route table.

»» ADDRESS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Defines the IP address assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to.

»» ESCAPE CHAR

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Defines the Telnet client escape character. Typing the combination characters will close the

active telnet session to the remote unit specified in the ADDRESS field.

»» PORT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Defines the IP port used in the remote login session. Default (for Telnet) is 23.

»» CONNECT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Activator used to start a Telnet session to the remote unit configured in the ADDRESS field.

»C

LIENT STATUS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays status from current Telnet client sessions.

Option Keystroke

^ ] <Ctrl> + ]

^ \ <Ctrl> + \

^ [ <Ctrl> + [

^ ^ <Ctrl> + <Shift> + 6

^ _ <Ctrl> + <Shift> + -

USER NAME Displays the username (from access passwords list) that has an

active Telnet client session.

SESSION ID Displays the remote units IP address followed by the IP port of an

active Telnet client session (in the format IP.IP.IP.IP:Port).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 36 of 234

»C

ONTROL SWITCH SCHEDULE

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Specifies when a controller switch from active to standby will occur.

»F

ORCE CONTROLLER SWITCH

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Causes the switch from active to standby to occur immediately.

»R

EBOOT SYSTEM

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Reboots the ATLAS 890 system. When you select this command, the following message displays:

** WARNING ** This will reboot the entire system and service will be interrupted!

Press Y to reboot the system or N to cancel the command.

»F

ACTORY DEFAULT SYSTEM

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

Resets the entire system to the factory default settings. To reset the system, press Y. To cancel this

command, press N. When you select this command, the following message displays:

** WARNING ** This will delete all configuration settings. ADTRAN recommends a backup copy of the

configuration before defaulting the system.

»A

LARM RELAY TEST

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

»» TOGGLE TEST MODE

Selects whether the alarm relay test mode is entered. The test mode is only active for a limited

amount of time. The “.” key increases the amount of test time and the “,” key decreases the

amount of test time while the cursor is on TOGGLE TEST MODE. The displayed time is in sec-

onds.

CONTROLLER SWITCH IMMEDIATE A forced controller switch will occur immediately.

CONTROLLER SWITCH AT TIME Controller switch will occur at the specified date and

time. When this option is selected, a new field called

CTRL SWITCH DATE AND TIME will be displayed below

the current field.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 37 of 234

> MODULES

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The MODULES menu provides status information and menu options that allow you to configure and control

the installed option modules, as well as the network ports (see Figure 9).

Figure 9. Modules Menu

»S

Read security: 5

The ATLAS 890 has four types of slots: system controller slots, option module slots, option module or

power supply slots, and power supply only slots. The two controller slots are designated SCUA and

SCUB for system controller units A and B. The 13 option module slots are designated 1 through 13,

and the three hybrid option module or power supply slots are designated 14 through 16. Slot 17 is

used for power supplies only.

If you install a module in a slot, then want to install a different type of module in the slot,

you must set this field to EMPTY before selecting another module type.

If a module is installed, the module type automatically shows the name of the installed

module, and it cannot be set to any other option.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 38 of 234

»T

YPE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the type of module actually installed in the slot or the type of module you plan to install in the

slot. The ATLAS 890 controller automatically detects the type of module installed in each slot, and the

TYPE field automatically defaults to the installed module type. You can also use this field to preconfig-

ure a unit before actually installing modules by specifying the module that you want to install in each

slot.

To use this option, navigate to the field you want to edit and press <Enter>. For empty slots, a list of all

the available module types displays. Select the one you want and it displays in the TYPE field. If this

field is already configured with a module, you can only set this field to EMPTY. To change from one

module type to another, you must set the field to EMPTY first.

»M

ENU

Read security: 5

Displays additional status and configuration menus for the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module.

To access the submenus for this item, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MENU column for the module

you want to edit, and press <Enter>. For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular

module, refer to the modules menus discussion for the appropriate network, option, or resource mod-

ule.

»A

LARM

Read security: 5

Displays whether there is an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module. Press

<Enter> to access the ALARM menu. For detailed information on each submenu item for a particular

module, refer to the following sections for the appropriate network, option, or resource module alarm

menu discussions.

»T

EST

Read security: 5

Displays whether the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module is executing a test. Press <Enter> to

access the TEST menu. This option will allow you to setup and initiate tests. You may also access this

menu through the MENU submenu on this screen. For detailed information on each submenu item for a

particular module, refer to the following sections for the appropriate network, option, or resource mod-

ule test menu discussions.

Inserting modules into inappropriate slots will result in damage of the ATLAS 890 system.

• System Controller modules are for use in the controller slots SCUA and SCUB only.

• Option Modules are for use in the option module slots 1-16 only.

• Power supplies are for use in the power supply slots 14-17 only.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 39 of 234

»S

TATE

Read security: 5

Displays whether the ATLAS 890 controller or selected module is online or offline. Even though a

module is physically installed, it must be marked ONLINE for it to be considered an available resource.

This parameter allows an installed module to be marked OFFLINE, which may be useful in system trou-

bleshooting. If you choose OFFLINE, the module will not be in alarm condition, but will display

OFFLINE. While in OFFLINE, the STATUS LED will flash green. A module will automatically change

to the ONLINE state when installed.

»S

TATUS

Read security: 5

Displays status information on the installed modules as follows:

»R

Read security: 5

Displays the hardware revision of the ATLAS 890 and other installed modules.

> MODULES MENU (QUAD T1/PRI OPTION MODULE)

This section provides detailed information on the MODULES menu and submenus for the Quad T1/PRI

Option Module. The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad T1/PRI

Option Module when it is installed in the system (listed as T1/PRI). To see the menus for the Quad

T1/PRI Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and

press <Enter> to access the module choices. Refer to the Quad T1/PRI Option Module Quick Start Guide

(P/N 61200185L3-13A) for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus.

ONLINE The module is enabled and is responding to the system controller’s status

polls. This is the normal response of the system.

NO RESPONSE The module is enabled but is not responding to the system controller’s

status polls. This response indicates a problem in the system or that the

module is not properly installed.

EMPTY The system controller has not detected the presence of a module in the

system, nor has a module been manually enabled for this option slot.

OFFLINE The module is installed but has been taken offline by a user. The module

is still responding to controller polls.

OFFLINE/NO

RESPONSE

The module is installed but has been taken offline by a user. The module

is not responding to controller polls.

NOT SUPPORTED The module is not supported by the current system configuration.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 40 of 234

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Displays general information about the Quad T1/PRI Option Module as follows:

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the Quad T1/PRI Option Module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the module’s serial number.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the module.

»» PLL STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates whether the module phase lock loop is locked to its specific source.

»A

LARM STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the current T1 alarm status.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 unit. Press <Enter> to access this menu item.

LOS

Indicates a loss of signal detected on port interface.

RED

Indicates inability to frame data received on the port. Alternately referred to as Out of

Frame (OOF).

YELLOW

Receiving remote alarm (RAI) on port.

BLUE

Receiving unframed all ones from the port Alarm Indicator Signal (AIS).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 41 of 234

DS0 ALARM

Displays per-DS0 alarm status; that is, at least one DS0 channel is in alarm if an aster-

isk (*) appears. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that

has been configured for the DS0.

RX LEVEL

(Receive Level) Indicates the strength of the signal (in dB) received on the port.

» DS0 STATUS

Read security: 5

The DS0 status indicates usage on a DS0 basis. These options are read-only:

» DS0 ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays per-DS0 alarm status. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that

has been configured for the DS0.

-Unallocated

*Inactive

+Signaling mismatch

AActive B Channel

DActive D Channel

MMaintenance

NDedicated (nailed)

OOff hook - originate (RBS)

RRinging (RBS); Restart (ISDN)

WWaiting dial tone

-No Alarm DS0

DD Channel Alarm (ISDN)

FFrame Alarm (packet)

TTBOP Alarm (packet)

PPPP Alarm (packet)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 42 of 234

»S

IG STATUS

Read security: 5

Read-only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DS0s. The A/B bits for Rx (receive) and Tx (transmit)

DS0s are shown. Dashes display for those DS0s where robbed bit signaling (RBS) is not being trans-

ferred by the ATLAS 890.

»P

ERFORMANCE CURRENT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key perfor-

mance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 for the T1/PRI port. Excepting

CLR, these fields are all read-only. The monitored parameters include the following:

»P

ERFORMANCE 15MIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to Performance Current above

for a detailed description of these fields.

PRT Displays the port number

CLR Clears performance information for the selected port

ESErrored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR

one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips

BES Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but

less than 320 error events

SES Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error

events OR one or more Out Of Frame events

SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four

consecutive errored framing patterns.

LOFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing

pattern could not be obtained.

CSS Controlled Slip Second

UAS Unavailable Second

LCV Line Code Violation

PCV Path Code Violation

LES Line Errored Second

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 43 of 234

»P

ERFORMANCE 24HR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to Performance Current for a

detailed description.

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate

ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each port on

the ATLAS 890.

»» FRAME

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is connected, avail-

able from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or ESF.

»» CODE

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected (this information is

available from the network supplier). Choose either AMI or B8ZS.

»» TX YEL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

»» TX PRM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the sending of performance report messaging (PRM) data on the facility data link

(FDL). The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT PRM is turned off (possible

only with ESF format). Choose either ON or OFF.

»» LBO

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Selects the Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface. When connecting a ATLAS 890

port to a DSX-1 interface, this parameter is typically set to match the distance (in feet)

between the ATLAS 890 and the device with which it is connecting. When you select this

item, a list of choices displays. Select the appropriate option.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 44 of 234

»» LB ACCEPT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets unit to accept or reject the in-band loop up and loop down codes as defined in ANSI

T1.403. This is a line loopback. Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE.

»» PULSE DENSITY

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Choose either ON or OFF. When ON, Pulse Density Enforcer causes the ATLAS 890 to moni-

tor for ones (1s) density violations and insert a one (1) when needed to maintain ones at

12.5%. This data insertion will cause data errors.

»» ADLP

Write security: ADTRAN Use Only; Read security: 5

The ADTRAN Data Link Protocol (ADLP) provides a communications link between ADT-

RAN equipment over point-to-point or multidrop connections that can be used for configura-

tion and monitoring remote ADTRAN devices. Choose enable to activate the ADLP over the

FDL for the DS1 interface.

»T

EST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» LOC LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Causes loopback on near-end (local) port (see Figure 10). The following options are available:

Figure 10. Loopback Test Diagram

LINE Metallic loopback

PAYLD Payload loopback - framing and clocking are regenerated

Quad T1/PRI

NI CSU

DS1

Payload Loopback

Line Loopback

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 45 of 234

»» REMOTE LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Sends loopback code to Remote CSU. The following options are available:

»» PATTERN

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

»» QRSS/RLB RESULTS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns.

When displaying test pattern status, the display string is composed of pattern sync status and

errored seconds.

»» CLR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

»» INJ

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

AT&T INBAND LINE Works in ESF and D4 mode

ANSI FDL LINE Requires ESF mode

ANSI FDL PYLD Requires ESF mode

INBAND NIU Works in ESF and D4 mode

ALL ONES Framed ones

ALL ZEROS Framed zeros

QRSS Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros

NONE No sync.

LOS Sync has been lost.

SYNC Pattern is synchronized.

ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 46 of 234

> MODULES MENU (QUAD E1/PRA OPTION MODULE)

This section provides detailed information on the MODULES menu and submenus for the Quad E1/PRA

Option Module. The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad

E1/PRA Option Module when it is installed in the system (listed as E1/PRA). To see the menus for the

Quad E1/PRA Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu

and press <Enter> to access the module choices.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Displays general information about the Quad E1/PRA Option Module as follows:

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the Quad E1/PRA Option Module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the module’s serial number.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»» E1 FRAMER REV

Read security: 5

Displays the E1 framer hardware revision.

»A

LARM STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays any active alarms as follows:

PRT

Displays the port number. The Quad E1/PRA Option Module is a single-port device.

ALARMS

Displays the alarm type. Each alarm type is described below.

LOS (Loss of Signal) No signal detected on port interface.

LOF (Loss of Framing) The receiver is unable to synchronize

to the FAS framing pattern of the received signal.

LOMF (Loss of Multi-frame) The receiver is unable to

synchronize to the TS15 multi-frame pattern of the

received signal.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 47 of 234

»TS0 A

LARMS

Read security: 5

Displays per TS0 alarm status. These alarms usually indicate the failure to receive the protocol that has

been configured for the TS0.

»TS0 S

TATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates usage on a TS0 basis for each port as follows:

CRC4 (Loss of CRC-4 Framing) The receiver is unable to

synchronize to the CRC-4 frame pattern of the received

signal.

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) An upstream failure has been

detected and all ones are being received.

REM (Remote Frame Alarm) Loss of frame alarm being

received from far end.

REMMF (Remote Multi-Frame Alarm) Loss of multi-frame alarm

being received from far end.

-No alarm DS0

DD channel alarm (ISDN)

FFrame alarm (packet)

TTBOP alarm (packet)

PPPP alarm (packet)

•Idle

–Inactive

AActive call on this TS0

DActive D channel TS0

FFraming TS0

MMaintenance TS0

NDedicated TS0

OOff-hook detected

RRinging detected

SSignaling

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 48 of 234

»S

IG STATUS (PORT 1 THROUGH 4)

Read security: 5

Displays the state of the A/B/C/D signaling bits for the Quad E1/PRA Option Module. Dashes indicate

TS0s where signaling is not being transferred by the ATLAS 890.

»P

ERFORMANCE: CURR

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

The performance fields – either current, 15 minute total, or 24 hour total – provide status on key per-

formance measures as specified in G.821 and RFC 1406 for the E1/PRA port as follows:

»P

ERFORMANCE: 15 MIN

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

In the PERFORMANCE 15 MIN menu, the performance data for the previous 15 minute window is

stored. Refer to Performance: Curr above for a detailed description.

PRT Displays the port number

CLR Clears performance information for the selected port

ESErrored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events

OR one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more

Controlled Slips

BES Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one,

but less than 320 error events

SES Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more

error events OR one or more Out Of Frame events

UAS Unavailable Second

CSS Controlled Slip Second

SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four

consecutive errored framing patterns

DM Degraded Minutes is the number of minutes with a bit error rate

of 10-6 or greater

LCV Line Code Violation

PCV Path Code Violation

LES Line Errored Second

LOFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid

framing pattern could not be obtained

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 49 of 234

»P

ERFORMANCE: 24 HR.

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to Performance: Curr on page 48

for a detailed description.

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply regardless of whether the port is connected to a Pri-

mary Rate Access or channelized E1 circuit.

»» PRT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enter any text up to 16 characters to uniquely identify each port on the Quad E1/PRA Option

Module.

»» FAS2

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

It enabled, the network interface receiver requires the NFAS word (TS0 0 in odd frames) and

the FAS word (TS0 0 in even frames) for frame sync. When disabled, only the FAS word is

needed for frame sync.

»» TS16 MF

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

If enabled, the receiver requires MFAS word in TS16 to achieve sync (CAS signaling). The

transmitter outputs MFAS word in TS16 (CCS signaling).

»» CRC-4

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Transmits the CRC-4 checksum bits in the outgoing E1 data stream, when enabled. Also,

checks the received signal for errors.

»» AUTO ALARM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Transmits a remote alarm when framing is lost (when Red Alarm Generation is on), and trans-

mits an AIS alarm when all ones are received (when RCM AIS Generation is on).

»» CODE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Allows selection of line coding. HDB3 is normally the only coding method used on public net-

works. AMI may be selected for testing purposes.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 50 of 234

»» TS0 SPARE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

TS0 bits Sa4 through Sa8 in frames not containing the Frame Alignment Signal may be used

in specific applications, but should be set to 1s when crossing an international border. Enter

decimal number whose 5 LSB are to be used for all Sa4.Sa8 bits. Refer to CCITT G.704 for

more information.

»» TS16 SPARE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

TS16 in CAS frame 0 contains 3 spare bits: 0000XYXX where ‘X’ marks a spare bit and ‘Y’

marks an alarm indications to the remote end. Enter a decimal number whose masked 4 LSB

are inserted into TS0 in CAS frame 0. Refer to CCITT G.704 for more information.

»» INTL BIT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Bit 0 in all non-CRC4 frames are reserved for international use. They may be used nationally

if the path does not cross an international border. If not specifically used, the bits should be set

to ‘1’ on paths crossing a border. Enter the international bit value of 0 or 1. Refer to CCITT

G.704 for more information.

»T

EST

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results. The test menu contains the fol-

lowing menu options.

»» PRT

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» LOC LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Initiates a local loopback on the near-end port (see Figure 11). The following options are avail-

able:

Figure 11. E1/PRA Network Loopback Tests

E1/PRA

NI CSU

Port Loopback

Line Loopback

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 51 of 234

»» PATTERN

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

»» QRSS RESULTS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern results that indicate sync and errors of received data pattern.

»» CLR

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Clears test results contained in the QRSS RESULTS field.

»» INJ

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Injects errors into the transmitted test pattern. Return receipt of the errors is displayed in the

QRSS RESULTS field.

> MODULES MENU (QUAD Nx 56/64 OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Mod-

ule when it is installed in the system (listed as V35NX). To see the menus for the Quad Nx 56/64 Option

Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to

access the module choices. Refer to the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree

containing a complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

ALL ONES Framed Ones

ALL ZEROS Framed Zeros

QRSS Pseudorandom pattern with suppression of excess zeros

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 52 of 234

»A

LARM STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 unit.

SLIP

A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network-side clock (as set by

DS0 assignment).

PLL

The Nx port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the network interface.

ZERO

The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network inter-

face.

NO EXT CLK

The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock. This alarm displays only if the

Nx port is configured to get its transmit clock from the DTE.

PKT EP ALM

A packet endpoint has detected missing or incorrect framing.

»D

TE STATUS

Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a

hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.

PRT Operating port number

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

RTS Request to send from DTE

CTS Clear to send to DTE

DTR Data terminal ready from DTE

DSR Data set ready to DTE

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 53 of 234

»D

ATA RATE

Read security: 5

Displays the data rate at which each Nx port is currently operating. A port’s data rate is determined by

the number of DS0s assigned to it and the rate per DS0 associated with the active maps.

»I

NBAND STATS

Read security: 5

Provides information on the following inband channel statistics.

» PLL/FIFO

Read security: 5

Displays the Phase Lock Loop (PLL) and FIFO status.

PORT

Indicates the operating port.

PLL/FIFO

Displays the state of the PLL and FIFO systems.

DCD Data carrier detect to DTE

RI Ring indicate to DTE

TD Transmit data from the DTE

RD Receive data toward the DTE

EC External clock present

PORT Operating port number

RX FRAMES The number of frames received on the operating port since system

startup

TX FRAMES The number of frames transmitted from the operating port since

system startup

RX BYTES The number of bytes received from the operating port since system

startup

TX BYTES The number of bytes transmitted to the operating port since system

startup

RESET STATS Clears inband statistic results

LOCK PLL is locked (This is required to transfer data.)

RXE Receive data FIFO empty

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 54 of 234

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual V.35 ports.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each port on

the Quad V.35 Option Module.

»» CLK +/-

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 890 to accept the transmit (TX) data from the DTE.

This is usually set to NORMAL. If the interface cable is long, causing a phase shift in the data,

the clock can be set to INVERTED. This switches the phase of the clock, which compensates for

a long cable.

»» DATA

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the inverting of the DTE data. This inversion can be useful when operating with a

high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol (often used as a means to ensure 1s density).

Select either NORMAL or INVERTED. Data inversion configuration must match at both ends of

the circuit.

»» CTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. If set to NORMAL, CTS will fol-

low the value of Request To Send (RTS). If set to FORCED ON, CTS will always be asserted.

»» DCD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal, also called RLSD on V.35

interfaces. If set to NORMAL, DCD will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of

passing data (consult the ATLAS 890 User Manual for exact conditions.) If set to FORCED

ON, DCD will always be asserted. If set to REMOTE RTS, the value of DCD will track the

value of the remote unit’s RTS signal. Note that this feature requires the Inband control chan-

nel to be ENABLED.

RXF Receive data FIFO full

TXE Transmit data FIFO empty

TXF Transmit data FIFO full

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 55 of 234

»» DSR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal. If set to NORMAL, DSR will

generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data. If set to FORCED ON, DSR

will always be asserted. If set to REMOTE DTR, the value of DSR will track the value of the

remote unit’s DTR signal. This remote feature requires the Inband control channel to be

Enabled.

»» DTR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines whether the ATLAS 890 treats a connection as permanent (IGNORE) or connects

only when Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is active (CONNECT ON DTR). Select either IGNORE

or CONNECT ON DTR.

»» 0 INH

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

When the port detects an uninterrupted string of 0s being transmitted for more than one sec-

ond, setting this parameter to ON will cause the ATLAS 890 to send 1s toward the network.

»» INBAND

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Creates an inband management channel by robbing 8 kbps bandwidth from the port’s allocated

bandwidth. This channel can be used for management for ADTRAN products that are not co-

located with the ATLAS. Consult the manual for ADTRAN T1 equipment for details on using

this feature.

»» SEND LEADS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sends the state of the DTE leads to the remote unit whenever any of the leads change state. If

any leads on the remote unit are set to track a remote signal, this option must be enabled. The

DTE lead states are conveyed using the Inband control channel, which must be enabled.

»D

IAL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Dials an Nx port that is configured to ignore DTR.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

SIGNAL RTS V.54

LOOPBACK 511 TEST

ON SELF TEST

ACTIVE NETWORK

TEST

ACTIVE

NO DS0

MAPPED NETWORK

ALARM

CTS Follows Off Off Off Off Off Off

DCD — — — Off Off Off Off

DSR — Off Off Off Off Off —

— = Do not care

Force On = On under all conditions

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 56 of 234

»» MODE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the dialing mode. The following options are available:

»» DIAL

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

»» SRC ID

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates the SOURCE ID of the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the Nx INTER-

FACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN.

»» NUMBER

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the Nx INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

section of the DIAL PLAN.

»T

EST

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» LOOPBACK

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

»» LOOPBACK STATUS

Read security: 5

This read-only option indicates a port’s current loopback status by displaying any of the fol-

lowing status messages:

PERSISTENT Redial whenever the call is cleared or if the call fails

ONE TIME Attempt the call only once

NO LOOPBACK No active loopback

LOCAL

LOOPBACK Activates both a local loopback (back toward the DTE) and a

port loopback (toward the network)

REMOTE

LOOPBACK V.54 loopback code to be sent to the far end, and if the device

at the far end supports V.54, the device activates a loopback

on detection of the V.54 code

NO LOOPBACK ACTIVE

LOOPING UP REMOTE UNIT

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 57 of 234

»» 511

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector.

»» 511 RESULT

Read security: 5

Displays the results of the 511 test. This option is read-only. Clear these results by pressing

<Enter> when CLR is selected.

»» CLR

Write security: 4; Read security: 4

Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

»» INJ

Write security: 4; Read security: 4

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

REMOTE UNIT LOOPED BACK

LOOPING DOWN REMOTE UNIT

REMOTE LOOP-UP FAILED

PORT LOOPED FROM REMOTE SOURCE

PORT LOOPBACK ACTIVE

NONE Pattern is not synchronized

LOS At one point the patter was synchronized, but is currently not

synchronized

SYNC Pattern is synchronized

ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 58 of 234

> MODULES MENU (QUAD USSI OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Quad USSI Option Module

when it is installed in the system (listed as USSI). To see the menus for the Quad USSI Option Module via

the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to access the

module choices. Refer to the Quad USSI Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a

complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»A

LARM STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays an alarm condition on the ATLAS 890 unit.

SLIP

A rate mismatch exists between the DTE clock and the network-side clock (as set by

DS0 assignment).

PLL

The USSI port is not able to lock onto the clock provided by the network interface.

ZERO

The DTE is sending an excessive number of consecutive zeroes to the network inter-

face.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 59 of 234

NO EXT CLK

The DTE is not providing an external transmit clock. This alarm displays only if the

USSI port is configured to get its transmit clock from the DTE.

PKT EP ALM

A packet endpoint has detected missing or incorrect framing.

»D

TE STATUS

Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a

hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.

»D

ATA RATE

Read security: 5

Displays the data rate at which each USSI port is currently operating. A port’s data rate is determined

by the number of DS0s assigned to it and the rate per DS0 associated with the active maps.

»I

NBAND STATS

Read security: 5

Provides information on the following inband channel statistics.

PRT Operating port number

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

RTS Request to send from DTE

CTS Clear to send to DTE

DTR Data terminal ready from DTE

DSR Data set ready to DTE

DCD Data carrier detect to DTE

RI Ring indicate to DTE

TD Transmit data from the DTE

RD Receive data toward the DTE

EC External clock present

PORT Operating port number

RX FRAMES The number of frames received on the operating port since system

startup

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 60 of 234

» PLL/FIFO

Read security: 5

Displays the Phase Lock Loop (PLL) and FIFO status.

PORT

Indicates the operating port.

PLL/FIFO

Displays the state of the PLL and FIFO systems.

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual USSI ports.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each port on

the Quad USSI Option Module.

»» CLK +/-

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the clock used by the ATLAS 890 to accept the transmit (TX) data from the DTE.

This is usually set to NORMAL. If the interface cable is long, causing a phase shift in the data,

TX FRAMES The number of frames transmitted from the operating port since

system startup

RX BYTES The number of bytes received from the operating port since system

startup

TX BYTES The number of bytes transmitted to the operating port since system

startup

RESET STATS Clears inband statistic results

LOCK PLL is locked (This is required to transfer data.)

RXE Receive data FIFO empty

RXF Receive data FIFO full

TXE Transmit data FIFO empty

TXF Transmit data FIFO full

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 61 of 234

the clock can be set to INVERTED. This switches the phase of the clock, which compensates for

a long cable.

»» DATA

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the inverting of the DTE data. This inversion can be useful when operating with a

high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol (often used as a means to ensure 1s density).

Select either NORMAL or INVERTED. Data inversion configuration must match on both ends of

the circuit.

»» CTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines the behavior of the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. If set to NORMAL, CTS will fol-

low the value of Request To Send (RTS). If set to FORCED ON, CTS will always be asserted.

»» DCD

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines the behavior of the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal, also called RLSD on some

interfaces. If set to NORMAL, DCD will generally be asserted when the interface is capable of

passing data (consult the ATLAS 890 User Manual for exact conditions.) If set to FORCED

ON, DCD will always be asserted. If set to REMOTE RTS, the value of DCD will track the

value of the remote unit’s RTS signal. Note that this feature requires the Inband control chan-

nel to be ENABLED.

»» DSR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines the behavior of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal. If set to NORMAL, DSR will

generally be asserted when the interface is capable of passing data. If set to FORCED ON, DSR

will always be asserted. If set to REMOTE DTR, the value of DSR will track the value of the

remote unit’s DTR signal. This remote feature requires the Inband control channel to be

Enabled.

»» DTR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Determines whether the ATLAS 890 treats a connection as permanent (IGNORE) or connects

only when Data Terminal Ready (DTR) is active (CONNECT ON DTR). Select either IGNORE

or CONNECT ON DTR.

»» 0 INH

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

When the port detects an uninterrupted string of 0s being transmitted for more than one sec-

ond, setting this parameter to ON will cause the ATLAS 890 to send 1s toward the network.

»» INBAND

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Creates an inband management channel by robbing 8 kbps bandwidth from the port’s allocated

bandwidth. This channel can be used for management for ADTRAN products that are not

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 62 of 234

co-located with the ATLAS. Consult the manual for ADTRAN T1 equipment for details on

using this feature.

»» SEND LEADS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sends the state of the DTE leads to the remote unit whenever any of the leads change state. If

any leads on the remote unit are set to track a remote signal, this option must be enabled. The

DTE lead states are conveyed using the Inband control channel, which must be enabled.

»D

IAL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Dials an USSI port that is configured to ignore DTR.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» MODE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the dialing mode. The following options are available:

»» DIAL

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

»» SRC ID

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates the SOURCE ID of the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the USSI INTER-

FACE CONFIGURATION section of the DIAL PLAN.

»» NUMBER

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates the number to be dialed. Configure this field in the USSI INTERFACE CONFIGURA-

TION section of the DIAL PLAN.

SIGNAL RTS V.54

LOOPBACK 511 TEST

ON SELF TEST

ACTIVE NETWORK

TEST

ACTIVE

NO DS0

MAPPED NETWORK

ALARM

CTS Follows Off Off Off Off Off Off

DCD — — — Off Off Off Off

DSR — Off Off Off Off Off —

— = Do not care

Force On = On under all conditions

PERSISTENT Redial whenever the call is cleared or if the call fails

ONE TIME Attempt the call only once

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 63 of 234

»T

EST

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» LOOPBACK

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

»» LOOPBACK STATUS

Read security: 5

This read-only option indicates a port’s current loopback status by displaying any of the fol-

lowing status messages:

»» 511

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Controls the activation of the 511 test pattern generator and detector.

»» 511 RESULT

Read security: 5

Displays the results of the 511 test. This option is read-only. Clear these results by pressing

<Enter> when CLR is selected.

NO LOOPBACK No active loopback

LOCAL

LOOPBACK Activates both a local loopback (back toward the DTE) and a

port loopback (toward the network)

REMOTE

LOOPBACK V.54 loopback code to be sent to the far end, and if the device

at the far end supports V.54, the device activates a loopback

on detection of the V.54 code

NO LOOPBACK ACTIVE

LOOPING UP REMOTE UNIT

REMOTE UNIT LOOPED BACK

LOOPING DOWN REMOTE UNIT

REMOTE LOOP-UP FAILED

PORT LOOPED FROM REMOTE SOURCE

PORT LOOPBACK ACTIVE

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 64 of 234

»» CLR

Write security: 4; Read security: 4

Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

»» INJ

Write security: 4; Read security: 4

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

»DTE I

NTERFACE MODE

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Configures the Quad USSI Module for the appropriate interface type. Select the parameters matching

the interface cable being used.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» DTE INTERFACE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the Quad USSI Module interface type. The following options are available:

»» CURRENT DTE TYPE

Read security: 5

Displays the current configuration of the Quad USSI Module DTE Interface.

NONE Pattern is not synchronized

LOS At one point the pattern was synchronized, but is currently

not synchronized

SYNC Pattern is synchronized

ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error

AUTO The ATLAS 890 will automatically detect the interface type.

The cable must be connected before the interface can be

determined.

EIA-530A Configures the interface for EIA-530A use.

EIA-530\

RS-449\

V.36

Configures the interface for EIA-530, RS-449, or V.36 use.

X.21/V.11 Configures the interface for X.21 or V.11 use.

RS-232 Configures the interface for RS-232 use.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 65 of 234

> MODULES MENU (IMUX 56/64 RESOURCE MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the IMUX 56/64 Resource Mod-

ule when it is installed in the system (listed as IMUX). To see the menus for the IMUX 56/64 Resource

Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to

access the module choices. Refer to the IMUX 56/64 Resource Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree

containing a complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»» FIRMWARE REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the current firmware revision of the IMUX 56/64 Resource Module.

»S

TATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of a particular BONDING session.

»» STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the current status of the BONDING session.

IDLE Indicates the number of Idle BONDING resources for a particular

BONDING engine.

RESERVED BONDING resources reserved for a BONDING session that is in the

process of coming up.

NEGOTIATING A single channel is connected and negotiating the BONDING call

for a particular BONDING session.

ADD CHANNELS The initial BONDING negotiation was successful, and the ATLAS

890 is in the process of adding channels to the BONDING session.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 66 of 234

»» NUMBCHANNELS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of bearer channels used in this BONDING session. When the number is

displayed in the format X/Y, Y is the number of BONDING resources reserved for this ses-

sion, and X is the number of calls belonging to this session that are up. If just a number is dis-

played, then all calls are up, and the number displayed is the number of BONDING resources

in use for this session.

»» DATA RATE

Read security: 5

Displays the data rate for this BONDING session. The number in the parenthesis is the data

rate of the individual bearer channels.

»» BONDED EP

Read security: 5

Displays the slot and port of the terminating endpoint that is using this BONDING session.

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the IMUX 56/64 Resource Module. In most

applications the default values will be correct.

BONDING The remaining channels were brought up successfully, and the

BONDING session is now ready to pass data.

TERMINATED The BONDING session has been terminated for some reason and is

in the process of freeing BONDING resources.

»» TXINIT TIMER Specifies the length of time the originating endpoint attempts to detect

the BONDING negotiation pattern from the answering endpoint

before deciding the BONDING call has failed.

»» TXFA TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to detect the

BONDING frame pattern when a call is connected before deciding the

BONDING call has failed. When interoperating with other

manufacturers' BONDING equipment, it may be necessary to change

this time so that it matches TXADD01.

»» TXADD01 TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints wait for additional calls to

be connected at the end of negotiation before deciding that the

BONDING call has failed. The factory default setting is sufficient for

most calls to connect, although when dialing overseas it may be

necessary to lengthen this timer to allow for slower call routing.

»» TXDEQ TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to equalize the

network delay between the bearer channels before deciding the

BONDING call has failed.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 67 of 234

»» TANULL TIMER Specifies the length of time the answering endpoint attempts to detect

the BONDING negotiation pattern from the originating endpoint

before deciding the BONDING call has failed. It may be necessary to

shorten this timer if the DTE equipment using the BONDING module

also has timer constraints for completing non-BONDING parameter

negotiation.

»» TCID TIMER Specifies the length of time both endpoints attempt to negotiate an

agreeable value for bearer channels and channel capacities before

deciding the BONDING call has failed.

»» CALL STAGGER Specifies the amount of delay between placing calls for outgoing

BONDING sessions. The following call stagger values are available:

NO STAGGER

There is no delay between the call dialing of a BONDING session.

500 MS

Wait approximately ½ second between the call dialing of a

BONDING session.

1 SEC.

Wait approximately 1 second between the call dialing of a BONDING

session.

2 SEC.

Wait approximately 2 seconds between the call dialing of a

BONDING session.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 68 of 234

> MODULES MENU (OCTAL BRI OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Octal BRI Option Module

when it is installed in the system (listed as U-BRI). To see the menus for the Octal BRI Option Module via

the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to access the

module choices. Refer to the Octal BRI Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a

complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»A

LARMS

Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for the selected Octal BRI Option Module.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays the current alarm status of each U-BRI interface.

»» CHANNEL

Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status of each 2B+D channel. A hyphen (–) indicates no active channel

alarm and D indicates an active D channel alarm.

LAYER 1 A layer one alarm is indicated by an asterisk (*) when the U-BRI physical

layer is not active. An L1 alarm is present when problems are detected with

the endpoint or a cabling problem.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 69 of 234

»C

HANNEL USAGE

Read security: 5

Displays the status of each of the U-BRI interfaces.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» CHA

Read security: 5

(Channel) Displays the status of individual channels. The following symbols may display:

»P

ERFORMANCE CURRENT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance field provides status on key performance measures for each of the four U-BRI ports.

These fields are all read-only. The monitored parameters include the following:

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual U-BRI interfaces.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each port on

the Octal BRI Option Module.

-Unallocated channel

.Inactive channel

AActive B channel

DActive D channel

PRT Displays the port number

RESET Resets the NEBE and FEBE statistics

NEBE Near-end block errors

FEBE Far-end block errors

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 70 of 234

»T

EST

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» LOCAL LOOPBACK

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Activates a local loopback toward the U interface. The following options are available:

»» REMOTE LOOPBACK

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Activates a loopback towards the controller. The following options are available:

> MODULES MENU (VOICE COMPRESSION RESOURCE MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Voice Compression (VCOM)

Resource Module when it is installed in the system (listed as VCOM-X where X is 8 for 1200221L1,

16 for 1200221L2, 24 for 1200221L3, and 32 for 1200221L4). To see the menus for the VCOM Resource

Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to

access the module choices. Refer to the VCOM Resource Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree con-

taining a complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

NONE No active loopback

LOOPBACK B1 Loops the first B channel of the interface

LOOPBACK B2 Loops the second B channel of the interface

LOOPBACK B1 + B2 Loops both B channels of the interface

LOOPBACK 2B+D Loops the entire physical interface

NONE No active loopback

LOOPBACK B1 Loops the first B channel of the interface

LOOPBACK B2 Loops the second B channel of the interface

LOOPBACK 2B+D Loops the entire physical interface

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 71 of 234

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»» FIRMWARE REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the current firmware revision of the selected module.

»S

TATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the status of each of the voice compression resources.

»» DEVICE

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed. On the ATLAS 890, packet

voice devices are numbered 1-32.

»» STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the condition of the individual packet voice device. This field may display the fol-

lowing:

N/A

This device is not populated on the selected VCOM Resource Module.

AVAILABLE

This resource is available for voice compression and functioning properly. If a

VCOM-8 Option Module is installed, 8 voice compression resources will be AVAIL-

ABLE and the rest will display N/A. The same principle applies to the VCOM-16, 24,

and 32 Option Modules.

PENDING

This resource is currently changing state.

BUSY

This resource is currently in use.

TESTING

This resource is currently being tested and is not available for use.

FAILED

This resource has failed testing and is not available for use.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 72 of 234

RELOADED

This resource was reinitialized after excessive errors.

»» ALGORITHM

Read security: 5

Denotes the voice compression algorithm being used by the packet voice device. Any packet

voice device can use any available compression algorithm. When ATLAS 890 chooses a

packet voice device for a particular call, the voice compression algorithm is set to match the

dial plan endpoint configuration. Refer to the Frame Relay menu section of the ATLAS 890

User Manual for more information.

N/A

This device has not been assigned a voice compression algorithm.

G.723.1

CCITT G.723.1 compression; 6.3 kbps bandwidth.

NETCODER

Proprietary NETCODER compression; 6.4 kbps bandwidth.

»» SILENCE

Read security: 5

Voice endpoints continue to originate frame relay traffic during periods of relative silence.

The ATLAS 890 expects to receive such silence frames; therefore, silence compression is

DISABLED by default. Some voice endpoints can be configured so that no silence frames are

transmitted during periods of relative silence. For compatibility with these devices, the

ATLAS 890 can be configured to expect that silence suppression is ENABLED; thus, no frame

relay traffic is generated during periods of silence. Both voice endpoints must agree on the

silence suppression setting.

»» CONNECTION

Read security: 5

Helps identify a suspect packet voice device if a particular call reports poor quality. The dis-

played packet identifier and the dial plan endpoint identify the call using this packet voice

device.

Some voice compression standards may be used only under specific licensing arrange-

ments due to existing patents. The ATLAS 890 provides complete management of these

licensed resources; therefore, users are not required to take additional steps to ensure

conformance with licensing provisions. For example, the ATLAS 890 manages its

resources so users never exceed the maximum licensed number of simultaneous connec-

tions. Refer to the Frame Relay section of the ATLAS 890 User Manual for details.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 73 of 234

»» FRAME TYPE

Read security: 5

Displays the kind of frame the ATLAS 890 receives from the frame relay endpoint connected

to the VCOM channel, allowing users to monitor the kind of data being carried on the network

and processed by the ATLAS 890. (The ATLAS 890 interprets the most-recently received

frame from the endpoint.)

During a voice connection, the frame type displays as VOICE. For a FAX connection, a variety

of frame types display. Initially, VOICE displays indicating that although the call has com-

pleted, the answering FAX machine has not yet announced its 2100 HZ tone. After completing

the 2100 Hz, both FAX endpoints repeat a V.21 cycle for each page of the FAX document.

Each packet the ATLAS 890 receives from its connected frame relay endpoint is classified

into one of the following groups:

BLANK

No frame has yet been received from the endpoint, or a FAX connection is between

protocol states.

DTMF

Dual-tone, multi-frequency (DTMF) digit received.

VOICE

Receiving voice frames. A connection to a FAX endpoint shows a VOICE status until

the FAX protocol is established.

2100 HZ TONE

FAX single-frequency tone detected indicating the beginning of a FAX session.

V.21

FAX single-frequency tone detected indicating the beginning of a FAX page.

V.27TER (2400 BPS)

FAX data reception of 2400 bps using protocol V.27ter.

V.27TER (4800 BPS)

FAX data reception of 4800 bps using protocol V.27ter.

V.29 (7200 BPS)

FAX data reception of 7200 bps using protocol V.29.

V.29 (9600 BPS)

FAX data reception of 9600 bps using protocol V.29.

V.33 (12000 BPS)

FAX data reception of 12000 bps using protocol V.33.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 74 of 234

V.33 (14400 BPS)

FAX data reception of 14400 bps using protocol V.33.

»C

ONFIG

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Provides diagnostic tools for suspected problems; under normal operation, users do not configure the

packet voice devices.

»» CONFIGURE VCOM DEVICES

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Contains configuration parameters for individual VCOM Devices.

DEVICE

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed. On the ATLAS 890,

packet voice devices are numbered 1-24.

STATE

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Controls the configuration state of the individual packet voice device. The ATLAS

890 determines the initial configuration state of each device. ATLAS uses this config-

uration information to determine which packet voice devices are functional and may

be used, which are defective and should not be used, or which are not present on the

module and should not be used. Users who suspect an individual packet voice device

of improper operation can manually disable that device to prevent ATLAS from

attempting to use it. The possible states are defined below.

DEFERRED Devices which fail built-in testing are automatically marked

as DEFERRED, indicating that the ATLAS 890 declines to use

the device.

AVAILABLE The device is properly functioning and can be used when

required. The ATLAS 890 automatically marks devices that

pass built-in testing as AVAILABLE.

DISABLED Marking a device as DISABLED prevents the ATLAS 890

from attempting to use it. You can mark a device currently in

use as disabled without disturbing the connection, but the

device will not be eligible for use in future calls until you re-

mark it as AVAILABLE. This is helpful if you suspect that a

particular device is malfunctioning and do not want any calls

routed to it.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 75 of 234

»» GAIN SETTINGS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Contains the configuration for output and input gain for the VCOM Resource Module.

OUTPUT GAIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Output gain is applied in the receive direction. Choices range from +12dB (loudest) to

-12dB (softest) in 3db increments. This setting takes affect immediately.

INPUT GAIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Input gain is applied in the transmit direction. Choices range from -12dB (softest) to

+12dB (loudest) in 3db increments. This setting does not affect currently active calls.

»» CURRENT FAX STATUS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Enables or disables fax over packet capability using the voice compression module.

»S

TATISTICS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» DEVICE

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the packet voice device listed. On the ATLAS 890, packet

voice devices are numbered 1-24.

»» USAGE TIME

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Measures the total elapsed time that a packet voice device has the status BUSY. The time is

expressed with millisecond precision. Available packet voice devices are assigned new con-

nections using a round-robin technique where all other available packet voice devices must be

used before a given device is assigned a new connection. This scheme tends to use all packet

voice devices evenly. If a given device shows significantly less elapsed usage time than other

packet voice devices on the same ATLAS 890, that device may be faulty.

»» ATLAS FRMS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

(ATLAS Frames) Counts every frame that the ATLAS 890 sends to or receives from the

packet voice device. This count indicates activity but does not indicate the actual amount of

frame relay data exchanged. The total number of frames handled by the packet voice device is

given by the following equation:

See the ATLAS DROP definition below for a description of the term:

FramesATLASTotal FramesATLAS FramesATLASDropped

FramesATLASDropped

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 76 of 234

»» ATLAS DROP

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Counter-measures each frame that is dropped or discarded during communication between the

the ATLAS 890 and the packet voice device; i.e., ATLAS Frames Dropped. The exchange

protocol is designed so that no frames should be discarded during this operation. A consistent

pattern of dropped frames by a given packet voice device may indicate a faulty packet voice

device or an overloaded ATLAS 890 system.

»» VCOM FRMS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Counts every frame successfully sent to or received from the ATLAS 890 system controller.

This is an indication of activity but does not indicate the actual amount of packet data

exchanged. The following equation gives the total number of frames handled for this packet

voice device by the ATLAS 890:

See the VCOM DROP definition below for a description of the term:

»» VCOM DROP

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Counter that measures each frame dropped or discarded by ATLAS 890 during communica-

tion with the ATLAS 890 system controller about a packet voice device. The exchange proto-

col is designed so that no frames should be discarded during this operation. A consistent

pattern of dropped frames by a given packet voice device may indicate a faulty packet voice

device or an overloaded ATLAS 890 system.

The discarded frame indicated by this value does not reflect network-level performance

management, but indicates an anomalous condition within the ATLAS 890 unit. Persis-

tently dropped frames may indicate a problem with the ATLAS 890 unit or the Voice

Compression Resource Module.

The discarded frame indicated by this value does not reflect network-level performance

management but indicates an anomalous condition within the ATLAS 890 unit. Persis-

tently dropped frames may indicate a problem with the ATLAS 890 unit or the VCOM

module.

FramesVCOMTotal FramesVCOM FramesVCOMDropped

FramesVCOMDropped

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 77 of 234

»» CLEAR

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Resets the elapsed usage time and frame counters for this packet voice device. Ordinarily,

users won’t reset these performance measurements. However, this feature can be useful when

testing that a suspected problem has been resolved and when zeroing the various counters

would make observing future events easier.

»» RELOADS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Number of times since module reboot that this device has been reloaded due to a failure.

> MODULES MENU (ASYNC-232 OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Async-232 Option Module

when it is installed in the system (listed as ASYNC232). To see the menus for the Async-232 Option

Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to

access the module choices. Refer to the Async-232 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree con-

taining a complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»» FIRMWARE REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the revision of the coprocessor firmware on the installed module.

Resetting these performance counters has no effect on the performance values accessible

via the SNMP network management interface.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 78 of 234

»» PROCESSOR ID

Read security: 5

Displays the processor ID of the installed module.

»S

IGNAL STATS

Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a

hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.

»I/O S

TATUS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the input/output statistics for the Async-232 ports.

»» PORT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» TX BYTES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of bytes transmitted by the DTE.

»» RX BYTES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of bytes sent to the DTE.

»» OVERRUNS

Read security: 5

Displays the received overrun errors from the DTE. A receiver overrun occurs when the DTE

performs data transmission too fast for the Async-232 port to keep up, therefore causing data

to be lost. An overrun may indicate the need to turn on hardware flow control.

PORT Operating port number

The following signals are monitored (these options are read-only):

DTR Data terminal ready from DTE

DSR Data set ready to DTE

RTS Request to send from DTE

DCD Data carrier detect to DTE

RI Ring indicate to DTE

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 79 of 234

»» PRTYERRS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of bytes received from the DTE that contained parity errors.

»» FRMERRS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of bytes received from the DTE that contained framing errors.

»» RST STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Clears the current stored I/O statistics for each port.

»S

ESSION STATUS

Read security: 5

Shows the status of key DTE interface signals. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of a signal and a

hyphen (-) indicates no signal present.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» MODE

Read security: 5

Indicates the session mode for the port. The following modes are available:

UNASSIGNED Port not assigned to a phone number in the Dial Plan.

IDLE Port assigned but no call is active.

LOOPBACK Loopback is turned on in the test menu.

MODEM RING Incoming analog modem call is ringing on port. Async-232 port will

toggle RI.

MODEM ANSWER The DTE has answered an incoming analog modem call.

MODEM DIAL The DTE is using the Async-232 port to make an outgoing analog

modem call.

MODEM

CONNECTED An analog modem call has been established.

ISDN PPP RING Incoming ISDN PPP call is ringing on the port. Async-232 port will

toggle RI.

ISDN PPP ANSWER The DTE has answered an incoming ISDN PPP call.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 80 of 234

»» CALL DIR

Read security: 5

Displays the current call direction as INCOMING or OUTGOING. If there is no active call, IDLE

will display.

»» RSC

Read security: 5

This field indicates the slot and device number allocated for a call to or from this port. If no

call is active, it will indicate NONE. The allocated resource will be either an analog modem, or

an ISDN digital call resource.

»» LAST DISCONNECT

Read security: 5

This field indicates the reason for the last call disconnect or dialout failure for this port. If no

call has been attempted for the given port, this field will indicate NONE. This information is

also available in the system log if Async-232 module events are enabled.

»» HANGUP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Activator used to hangup the current active call on the port.

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to the individual Async-232 ports.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each port on

the Async-232 Option Module.

»» BIT RATE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the fixed DTE port bit rate. Changing this field hangs up an active call and requires

confirmation. Options include the following: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K,

57.6K, and 115.2K.

ISDN PPP DIAL The DTE is using the Async-232 port to make an outgoing ISDN

PPP call.

ISDN PPP

CONNECTED An ISDN PPP call has been established.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 81 of 234

»» FLOW CTR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the flow control for the Async-232 port. Options are:

»» FMT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Configures the asynchronous character format options for the Async-232 port. The following

fields are applicable:

»» CALL DIR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the Async-232 port to answer incoming calls and/or originate outgoing calls. The

following options are available: IN ONLY, OUT ONLY, and IN & OUT.

»» IN CTRL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the method by which incoming calls are indicated to and controlled by the DTE.

Options include the following:

HARDWARE Hardware flow control monitors RTS from the DTE and controls

CTS to indicate flow control status. Hardware flow control should

be used in all cases except when it is not supported by the attached

DTE equipment.

SOFTWARE Software flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data

stream to control flow.

NONE No flow control selected for this port.

DATA BITS Number of data bits per character

PARITY Parity method used for transmit and receive characters

STOP BITS Number of stop bits per character

AT CMDS AT commands and responses indicate and control calls. AT

commands also support port and allocated modem or ISDN

resource configuration.

DTR-DCD An activated data carrier detect (DCD) signal indicates that an

incoming call is answered from the Async-232 Module port. Upon

call hang-up, the DCD becomes inactive. The data terminal ready

(DTR) signal must be active from the DTE for an incoming call to

be answered. If the port is part of a group assigned in the Dial Plan,

then the first idle port with DTR active will answer the call. If the

DTE drives DTR inactive, the Async-232 Module port hangs up an

active call.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 82 of 234

»» DIALOUT

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Includes all options that affect dialing outgoing calls. The record field indicates the values of

the key dialout subfields.

DIALOUT METHOD

Write security: 3, Read security: 5

Selects the method by which outgoing calls may be initiated by the DTE.

DTR DIAL

When DTR is enabled by the DTE and a number has been entered in the DTR

DIAL NUMBER field, an outgoing call attempt is made. The call is hung up when

DTR is dropped. If the call does not connect, the call will continue to be retried as

long as DTR remains active.

AT DIAL

When enabled, AT commands may be used to dial outgoing calls. Port an allo-

cated modem or ISDN resource configuration is also supported via AT com-

mands. The DTR signal must be active from the DTE to dial out. The call is hung

up when DTR is dropped or when the escape-to-command mode sequent (+++)

and ATH are issued. When the call is connected, the Async-232 port enables

DCD.

DTR DIAL NUMBER

This field is only active when outgoing calls are enabled and DIALOUT METHOD is set

to DTR DIAL. If a phone number is entered here, it will be dialed when DTR goes

active.

CALLOUT PROTOCOL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field determines what type or resource will be allocated and the data protocol that

will be used for an outgoing call attempt for the port. The following selections are

available:

ANALOG MODEM

An outgoing call attempts to allocate a modem resource and make an analog

call. Asynchronous data is passed unmodified between the Async-232 Mod-

ule port and the allocated modem. The analog modem resource is freed when

the call is hungup.

AT/MDM Indicates that AT dialing of a modem is selected.

DTR/MDM Indicates that DTR dialing of a modem is selected.

AT/ISDN Indicates that AT dialing of an ISDN resource is selected.

DTR/ISDN Indicates that DTR dialing of an ISDN resource is selected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 83 of 234

ISDN PPP

An outgoing call attempts to allocate an ISDN resource and make a digital

call. Both ends of the call must be using PPP as the protocol to communicate

across the link. The Async-232 Module port performs PPP Async-to-Sync

conversion between the asynchronous DCE port and the synchronous ISDN

link. This conversion is the standard method of transporting PPP frames avail-

able in ISDN Terminal Adapters from ADTRAN and other manufacturers.

The PPP Async-to-Sync protocol complies with the Internet Engineering

Task Force (IETF) RFC 1662. For the ISDN call to be routed outside ATLAS

890, a PRI or BRI interface must be connected to the system and be correctly

configured.

OUT ISDN CALL TYPE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

When CALLOUT PROTOCOL has been set to ISDN PPP, this field determines what

type of ISDN call will be made when a call is attempted. The value must match the

network services provisioned for the PRI or BRI interface that the call will be carried

on. This field is not present and ignored when the CALLOUT PROTOCOL is ANALOG

MODEM.

DATA 64K

Directs the call control software to request an unrestricted 64 kbps circuit. The

default call type for ISDN service is Data 64 kbps.

DATA 56K

Directs the call control software to request a 64 kbps data circuit that is rate-

adapted to 56 kbps. It is intended for use in circumstances where interoperability

with Switched 56 service is desired.

AUDIO

Directs the call control software to request a 3.1 kHz audio circuit as the bearer

capability for outgoing calls. The Audio option is used with an ISDN line config-

ured for voice service. Selecting an Audio call type guarantees a digital end-to-

end ISDN connection.

SPEECH

Speech direct the call control software to request a µ-Law speech circuit as the

bearer capability for outgoing calls. The Speech option is used with an ISDN line

configured for voice service. A Speech call type does not guarantee and end-to-

end digital connection with some local and long distance providers.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 84 of 234

»» MODEM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures an allocated modem for incoming and outgoing analog modem calls. Selected

options are issued to the modem when it is allocated to answer an incoming call or initiate an

outgoing call. Some options imply a negotiation with the remote modem. These modem

options may also be specified through the AT command interface if enabled.

HIGHEST BIT RATE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the highest bit rate the allocated modem will attempt to connect with to the

remote modem. Modulation scheme is automatically selected based on the connection

speed.

LOWEST BIT RATE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the lowest bit rate the allocated modem will attempt to connect with to the

remote modem. If the lowest bit rate or higher cannot be negotiated with the remote

modem, the call is disconnected. Modulation scheme is automatically selected based

on the connection speed.

ERROR CORRECTION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the error correction for the allocated modem. The following options are

available:

DISABLED

No error correction is requested. If the remote modem refuses to support the

option, the call is disconnected. Although no error correction is used, this mode

still allows speed matching, data buffering, and flow control.

AUTO-RELIABLE LINK MODE

Modem will attempt to negotiate LAPM, MNO, or no error correction with the

remote modem. This is the default setting.

FORCE LAPM MODE

Modem will attempt to negotiated LAPM error correction with the remote

modem. If it cannot, the call is disconnected.

FORCE MNP MODE

Modem will attempt to negotiate MNO error correction with the remote modem.

If it cannot, the call is disconnected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 85 of 234

AT STORED PROFILE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These fields allow an alternate way of changing certain AT command profile settings.

Normally, these fields would be changed via their AT command equivalent in an ini-

tialization string sent by the DTE (or set by a DTE and then saved to NVRAM using

AT&W.) Changing the values here is the equivalent of setting modem DIP switches to

assign default values. Any AT commands issued after the menu option is changed (or

the unit is rebooted) override the menu default. Issued AT commands are stored

between reboots if the profile is saved via AT&W as above. The values in this menu

will reflect the stored profile.

ECHO (ATEN)

The ECHO ATEN field ENABLES (default) or DISABLES the echo attenuation.

RESPONSE MSG FORMAT (ATVN)

The RESPONSE MSG the formate of the response message.

RESPONSE MSG ENABLE (ATQN)

The RESPONSE MSG ENABLE field allows you to turn the response messaging

ON (default) or OFF.

EXTENDED RESULT CODER (ATXN)

The EXTENDED RESULT CODER field allows you to configure the Async-232

Option Module to CONNECT W/ BITRATE (default) or perform a SIMPLE CON-

NECT.

ATS0 (> 0 TO AUTOANSWER)

The ATS0 (> 0 TO AUTOANSWER) field allows you to define the value for the

auto answer ATS0 command. The default value is 1. A value of 1 enables auto

answer. A value of 0 disables auto answer.

ATS2 (ESCAPE CODE CHARACTER)

The ATS2 (ESCAPE CODE CHARACTER) field allows you to enter the character

to be used for an escape sequence. The default value is 43.

ATS12 (ESCAPE GUARD TIME)

The ATS12 (ESCAPE GUARD TIME) field allows you to set the escape time in 0.2

second increments to escape to command mode.. The default value is 50 which

equals one second.

DATA COMPRESSION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Error correction must be enabled to use data compression; data compression is auto-

matically disabled if error correction is disabled. The following data compression

options are available:

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 86 of 234

DISABLED

Both MNP5 and V.42bis data compression methods are disabled.

MNP5

MNP5 data compression is enabled.

V.42BIS

V.42bis data compression is enabled.

V.42BIS AND MNP5

Both MNP5 and V.42 bis data compression are enabled. This is the default set-

ting.

»T

EST

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» PORT

Read security: 5

Displays the port number.

»» DTE LOCAL LOOPBACK

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Loopback can be ENABLED or DISABLED for a port with this field. When ENABLED, all data

received from the DTE by the Async-232 Module port is transmitted back to the DTE. Loop-

back state is not saved in the module configuration; and, if the card is hot swapped or the

ATLAS 890 system is restarted, loopback is disabled on all ports. It is not necessary to have a

Dial Plan entry for a port to enable loopback.

> MODULES MENU (MODEM-16 OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the Modem-16 Option Module

when it is installed in the system (listed as M56K-16). To see the menus for the Modem-16 Option Module

via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to access the

module choices. Refer to the Modem-16 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a

complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 87 of 234

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»» FIRMWARE REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the revision of the coprocessor firmware on the installed module.

»» PROCESSOR ID

Read security: 5

Displays the processor ID of the installed module.

»S

TATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the status submenus for both analog and digital resources available on the Modem-16 Option

Module.

»» ANALOG RSRC SESSION STATUS

Read security: 5

This submenu displays the session status information for the analog resources available on the

Modem-16 Option Module.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays new

activity as it occurs. The possible status display values are listed below.

Display Value Meaning

N/ACard is not able to determine the status of the analog call

resource.

AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call.

IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call.

TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable

for use.

DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog

call resource. This may be done automatically by the system if a

given analog resource does not initialize properly.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 88 of 234

MODULATION

Read security: 5

Displays the modulation scheme being used by the analog resource for a currently

active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display n/a.

RX RATE

Read security: 5

Displays the receive bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call. If the

analog resource is not in use, this field will display n/a.

TX RATE

Read security: 5

Displays the transmit bit rate of the analog resource for a currently active call. If the

analog resource is not in use, this field will display n/a.

ERROR CORR

Read security: 5

Displays the error correction mode being used by the analog resource for a currently

active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display n/a.

DATA COMPR

Read security: 5

Displays the data compression mode being used by the analog resource for a currently

active call. If the analog resource is not in use, this field will display n/a.

LAST DISC

Read security: 5

Displays the reason for the previous disconnect which occurred on this analog

resource. If no disconnect has occurred on this analog resource, this field will display

n/a.

LINE PARAMS

Read security: 5

Displays technical details about the analog resource for the currently active call. This

information may be used when troubleshooting modem connection problems with the

Modem-16 Option Module.

RESOURCE STATUS

This field indicates the current status of the analog resource. The following states

are valid.

System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the

SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS. This menu provides detailed resource availability

information for each resource type, including hourly average available, minimum avail-

able, and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 89 of 234

SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO (dB)

Signal to noise ratio (in decibels) on the modem’s receive signal.

RX MEAN SQUARE ERROR

Mean square error of the received signal.

ROUND TRIP DELAY (ms)

Delay between the near and far end modem devices.

RX LEVEL (-dBm)

Displays the level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal received by the resource.

TX LEVEL (-dBm)

Displays the level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal transmitted by the

resource.

NEAR END ECHO (-dBm)

Displays the echo level of the signal ( in -dBm) of the signal received by the

resource.

FAR END ECHO (-dBm)

Displays the echo level of the signal (in -dBm) of the signal transmitted by the

resource.

RETRAINS REQUESTED BY REMOTE

Number of Retrain Requests sent to the resource.

RETRAINS GRANTED TO REMOTE

Number of Retrain Requests granted by the resource.

RETRAINS GRANTED TO LOCAL

Number of Retrains granted to the resource.

RENEGOTIATIONS REQUESTED BY REMOTE

Number of Renegotiation Requests sent to the resource.

n/a Module is not able to determine the status of the analog

resource

AVAILABLE This resource is available for use as an analog call resource

IN USE This resource is currently being used in an analog call

TESTING This resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable for use

DISABLED This resource has been disable for use as an analog call

resource

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 90 of 234

RENEGOTIATIONS GRANTED TO REMOTE

Number of Renegotiation Requests granted by the modem card.

RENEGOTIATIONS GRANTED TO LOCAL

Number of Renegotiation Requests granted to the modem card.

»» ANALOG RSRC CONNECTIONS STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

This menu option displays the connection statistics for the analog resources available on the

Modem-16 Option Module.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

ATTEMPTS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of connections attempted for this analog resource since the last

reset.

COMPLETED

Read security: 5

Displays the number of successful connections for this analog resource.

FAILURES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this analog resource. It is defined

as the number of connection attempts minus the number of successful connections.

RESET STATS

Read security: 5

Resets the connection statistics for the given analog resource. This option resets the

connection attempts, connection completions, and the connections failures fields for

the analog resource.

RATE STATS

Read security: 5

Displays connection rate statistics for selected data rates for the given analog resource.

The number of connections at a rate or range of rates is displayed.

»» ANALOG RSRC I/O STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the input and output statistics for the analog resources available on the module. All

statistics are for the current active call and are reset once the call becomes disconnected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 91 of 234

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

TX-BYTES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the analog resource to the remote

client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is discon-

nected.

RX-BYTES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data bytes received by the analog resource from the client

modem curing the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

TX-FRAMES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the analog resource to the remote

client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is discon-

nected.

RX-FRAMES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data frames received by the analog resource from the remote

client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is discon-

nected.

RX-OVRNS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the analog resource dur-

ing the current call. A receiver overrun occurs when the client modem transmits data

too fast for the analog resource to keep up. This causes data to be lost. This parameter

is reset once the call is disconnected.

RX-PRTY

Read security: 5

Displays the number of bytes received by the analog resource from the remote client

modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

RX-FRME

Read security: 5

Displays the number of framing errors detected by the analog resource during the cur-

rent call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 92 of 234

RX-CRC BAD

Read security: 5

Displays the number of received PPP frames by the analog resource from the remote

client modem during the current call. This is used only when the analog resource is

performing Sync-to-Async PPP conversion. This parameter is reset once the call is

disconnected.

RESET STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource. This option resets

the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource.

»» DIGITAL RSRC SESSION STATUS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the session status information for the digital resources available on the Modem-16

Option Module.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of the particular digital call resource. The status display

values are listed below.

Display Value Meaning

N/A Card is not able to determine the status of the digital call

resource.

AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as a digital call.

IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in a digital call.

TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable

for use.

DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as a digital call

resource.

System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the

SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS. This menu provides detailed resource availability

information for each resource type, including hourly average available, minimum avail-

able, and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 93 of 234

BIT RATE

Read security: 5

Displays the bit rate of the digital resource for a currently active call. If the digital

resource is not in use, this field displays N/A.

»» DIGITAL RSRC CONNECTION STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the connection statistics for the digital resources available on the Modem-16 Option

Module.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

ATTEMPTS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of connections attempted for this digital resource since the last

reset.

COMPLETED

Read security: 5

Displays the number of successful connections for this digital resource.

FAILURES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of unsuccessful connections for this digital resource. It is defined

as the number of connection attempts minus the number of successful connections.

56K CONNECTS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of successful connections at 56 kbps for this digital resource.

64K CONNECTS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of successful connections at 64 kbps for this digital resource.

RESET STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Resets the connection statistics for the given digital resource. This option resets the

connection attempts, connection completions, and the connections failures fields for

the analog resource.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 94 of 234

»» DIGITAL RSRC I/O STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the input and output statistics for the digital resource available on the Modem-16

Option Module. All statistics are for the current active call and are reset once the call becomes

disconnected.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

TX-FRAMES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data frames transmitted by the digital resource to the remote

client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is discon-

nected.

RX-FRAMES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data frames received by the digital resource from the remote

client modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is discon-

nected.

TX-BYTES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data bytes transmitted by the digital resource to the remote cli-

ent modem during the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is discon-

nected.

RX-BYTES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of data bytes received by the digital resource from the client

modem curing the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

RX-OVRNS

Read security: 5

Displays the number of receiver overruns which occurred on the digital resource dur-

ing the current call. A receiver overrun occurs when the client modem transmits data

too fast for the digital resource to keep up. This causes data to be lost. This parameter

is reset once the call is disconnected.

RX-CRC BAD

Read security: 5

Displays the number of frames of data received by the digital resource with an invalid

CRC. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 95 of 234

RX-ABORTED

Read security: 5

Displays the number of aborted receive frames detected by the digital resource during

the current call. This parameter is reset once the call is disconnected.

RESET STATS

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Resets the input and output statistics for the given analog resource. This option resets

the transmit and receive statistics for the analog resource.

»C

ONFIGURATION

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration submenus available for both analog and digital resources available on the

option module.

»» ANALOG RSRC

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration parameters for the analog resources available on the option module.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the analog call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of the particular analog call resource and displays new

activity as it occurs. The possible status display values are listed below.

Display Value Meaning

N/ACard is not able to determine the status of the analog call

resource.

AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as an analog call.

IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in an analog call.

TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable

for use.

DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as an analog

call resource. This may be done automatically by the system if a

given analog resource does not initialize properly.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 96 of 234

OPERATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the mode of operation for the particular analog call resource. The following

selections are permissible:

HARDWARE RESET

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Reset a specific analog resource on the modem module. Any calls currently active will

be dropped.

»» DIGITAL RSRC

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration parameters for the digital resources available on the option module.

RSRC

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the digital call resource. On the Modem-16 Option

Module, analog resources are numbered 1-16 and digital ISDN resources are num-

bered 17-32.

STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current status of the particular digital call resource. The status display

System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the

SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS. This menu provides detailed resource availability

information for each resource type, including hourly average available, minimum avail-

able, and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type.

Operation Mode Meaning

ENABLED Indicates the selected analog resource is available for use as

an analog call resource in the system.

DISABLED Indicates this resource is not available for use as an analog

call resource in the system. If a call is active on this

resource when changing the operation to DISABLED, it will

be immediately terminated.

AUTO DISABLED Indicates this resource will not be available for use as an

analog call resource once the current call has been

completed.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 97 of 234

values are listed below.

OPERATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the mode of operation for the particular digital call resource. The following

selections are permissible:

Display Value Meaning

N/A Card is not able to determine the status of the digital call

resource.

AVAILABLE Indicates this resource is available for use as a digital call.

IN USE Indicates this resource is currently being used in a digital call.

TESTING Indicates this resource is in a test mode and may be unavailable

for use.

DISABLED Indicates this resource has been disabled for use as a digital call

resource.

System resource usage for analog and digital call resources can be viewed under the

SYSTEM STATUS menu of the ATLAS. This menu provides detailed resource availability

information for each resource type, including hourly average available, minimum avail-

able, and number of times there were no available resources of a particular type.

Operation Mode Meaning

ENABLED Indicates the selected digital resource is available for use as

an analog call resource in the system.

DISABLED Indicates this resource is not available for use as a digital

call resource in the system. If a call is active on this

resource when changing the operation to DISABLED, it will

be immediately terminated.

AUTO DISABLED Indicates this resource will not be available for use as a

digital call resource once the current call has been

completed.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 98 of 234

> MODULES MENU (HDLC OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the HDLC Option Module when

it is installed in the system (listed as HDLC-128). To see the menus for the HDLC Option Module via the

terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to access the module

choices. Refer to the HDLC Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete list-

ing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»S

TATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the submenus for available resources on the HDLC Option Module.

»» DS0S AVAILABLE

Read security: 5

Displays the total number of DS0s currently available for allocation on the HDLC Option

Module. The maximum value is 128.

»» CHANNELS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Displays status information about the resources that have been allocated on the HDLC Option

Module.

CHANNEL ID

Read security: 5

Indicates the resource number of the allocated resource listed. If a number does not

appear in the list, that resource is not currently allocated.

DS0S

Read security: 5

Displays the number of DS0s that are being used by the resource. This value multi-

plied by the DS0 Rate yields the bandwidth that has been assigned to the resource.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 99 of 234

56/64K

Read security: 5

Displays the per DS0 rate that is being used by the resource. This value multiplied by

the number of DS0s yields the bandwidth that has been assigned to this resource.

TX FRAMES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of frames that have been transmitted by this resource.

RX FRAMES

Read security: 5

Displays the number of frames that have been received by this resource.

ERRORS

Read security: 5

Displays the total number of errors received by the resource. Press <Enter> on this

field to view the number of Total Errors, CRC Errors, Aborted Frames, and Invalid

Frames.

CLRCNTR

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Resets all counters for the resource channel.

> MODULES MENU (T3 OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the T3 Option Module when it is

installed in the system (listed as DS3). To see the menus for the T3 Option Module via the terminal menu,

use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu and press <Enter> to access the module choices. Refer

to the T3 Option Module Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 100 of 234

»» DS1 FRAMER REV

Read security: 5

Displays the revision of the DS1 framer on the installed module.

»» M13 REV

Read security: 5

Displays the revision of the M13 mux on the installed module.

» DS3 ALARM STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current alarm status of the T3 interface.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of an alarm

and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms are monitored:

LOS

Loss of Signal. There is no T3 signal detected on the port interface.

RED

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T3 cannot be frame-synchronized. A Red

Alarm is indicated when the T3 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

BLUE

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the T3

payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

YELLOW

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end equip-

ment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

»» FE ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays received alarms from the far-end equipment.

»» C-BIT

Read security: 5

Indicates whether C-Bit framing is being used on the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*) indicates the

presence of C-Bit framing and a dash (-) indicates no C-Bit framing present.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 101 of 234

» DS3 PERF CURRENT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields – either current, 15 minute total, or 24 hour total – provide status on key per-

formance measures as specified in ANSI T1.231-1993 for DS3 interfaces.

» DS3 PERF 15 MIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

In the DS3 PERF 15 MIN menu, the performance data for the previous 15 minute window is stored.

Refer to DS3 Perf Current above for a detailed description.

» DS3 PERF 24 HR.

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS3 Perf Current above for a

detailed description.

PRT Displays the port number.

CLR Clears performance information for the selected port.

ES_L (Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing excessive

zeros, LOS, or BPVs, not due to line code substitutions.

SES_L (Severely Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing

excessive zeros, LOS, or BPVs, not due to line code

substitutions above a predetermined threshold.

LOSS_L (Loss of Signal Second - Line) Count of seconds of LOS

condition.

CV_P (Code Violation - Path) For the M13 applications, an

accumulation of P-bit parity errors. For the C-bit parity

application, an accumulation of CP-bit parity errors.

ES_P (Errored Second - Path) An accumulation of seconds during

which any one of the following conditions exist: parity errors,

severely errored frame, or AIS signal received.

SAS_P (SEF/AIS Second) An accumulation of seconds during which

severely errored frame or AIS signal is received.

SES_P (Severely Errored Seconds - Path) An accumulation of seconds

during which parity errors, severely errored frames, or AIS

signal is received.

UAS_P (Unavailable Seconds - Path) An accumulation of one-second

intervals during which the DS3 path is unavailable; i.e., 10

contiguous SES_Ps.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 102 of 234

» DS3 CONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Includes all of the configurable parameters pertaining to the T3 interface.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enter any text up to 16 characters to uniquely identify the T3 port on the T3 Option Module.

»» FRAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the framing format for the T3 circuit. Selections are M13 or C-BIT.

»» TX CLOCK

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the source of the T3 transmit clock. The following options are available:

»» LBO

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the line build out for the T3 transmitter. The following options are available:

» DS3 TEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Executes loops and indicates test status.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the T3 port under test.

RECOVERED The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the receive T3.

INTERNAL The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the internal ±20 PPM

crystal source.

Every T3 connection should have one RECOVERED and one INTERNAL transmit clock.

Failure to configure this will result in T3 clock slips.

SHORT 0 to 100 feet of cable

LONG 100 to 450 feet of cable

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 103 of 234

»» LOOPBACK

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field indicates the present loopback selected. The following options will display:

»» REMOTE LB

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field indicates if loopbacks initiated from remote sources are in effect and may be used to

execute remote loopbacks on the far-end T3 equipment. The following options are available:

»» REMOTE STATUS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field indicates the progress of remote loopbacks. The following options will display:

LINE LOOPBACK ACTIVE

Remote line loopback is active.

NO LOOPS ACTIVE

Remote line loopbacks are inactive.

» DS1 ALARM STATUS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates T1 alarm status.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the number of the T1 circuit (1-28).

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for each of the 28 T1 circuits. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence

NONE No loopback in effect

LINE T3 line loopback active

NONE No remote loopbacks are activated

DS3 LINE T3 line loopback active

DS1 #1 ...

DS1 #28 Remote individual T1 line loopback is activated

DS1 ALL Remote T1 line loopbacks for all 28 T1s is activated

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 104 of 234

of an alarm and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms are monitored:

RED

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T1 cannot be frame-synchronized. A Red

Alarm is indicated when the T1 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

YELLOW

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end equip-

ment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

BLUE

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the T1

payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

D-CHAN ALR

D Channel alarm is only meaningful if T1 is defined as a PRI. (PRI configuration of a

T1 circuit in a T3 bundle requires using one of the HDLC resources provided on the

system controller module or an HDLC Option Module.)

» DS1 DS0 STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates usage on a DS0 basis for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These options are read-only:

-Unallocated

*Inactive

+Signaling mismatch

AActive B Channel

DActive D Channel

MMaintenance

NDedicated (nailed)

OOff hook - originate (RBS)

RRinging (RBS); Restart (ISDN)

WWaiting dial tone

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 105 of 234

» DS1 DS0 ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays per-DS0 alarm status for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These alarms usually indicate the failure

to receive the protocol that has been configured for the DS0.

» DS1 SIG STATUS

Read security: 5

Read-only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DS0s for each T1 in the T3 circuit. The A/B bits for

Rx (receive) and Tx (transmit) DS0s are shown when the T1s are configured for D4 framing. When the

T1s are configured for ESF framing, ABCD bits are shown for each DS0. Dashes display for those

DS0s where robbed bit signaling (RBS) is not being transferred by the ATLAS 890.

» DS1 PERF CURRENT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key perfor-

mance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 for each T1 in the T3 circuit.

Excepting CLR, these fields are all read-only. The monitored parameters include the following:

-No Alarm DS0

DD Channel Alarm (ISDN)

FFrame Alarm (packet)

TTBOP Alarm (packet)

PPPP Alarm (packet)

PRT Displays the T1 number (1-28).

CLR Clears performance information for the selected T1.

ESErrored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR

one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips.

BES Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but

less than 320 error events.

SES Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error

events OR one or more Out Of Frame events.

SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four

consecutive errored framing patterns.

LOFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing

pattern could not be obtained.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 106 of 234

» DS1 PERF 15MIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to DS1 Perf Current on page

105 for a detailed description of these fields.

» DS1 PERF 24HR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS1 Perf Current on page 105

for a detailed description.

» DS1 CONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate

ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the T1 number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each T1 in the

T3 circuit.

»» FRAME

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is connected, avail-

able from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or ESF.

»» CODE

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected (this information is

available from the network supplier). Choose either AMI or B8ZS.

»» TX YEL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

CSS Controlled Slip Second

UAS Unavailable Second

PCV Path Code Violation

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 107 of 234

»» TX PRM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the sending of performance report messaging (PRM) data on the facility data link

(FDL). The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT PRM is turned off (possible

only with ESF format). Choose either ON or OFF.

»» LB ACCEPT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets unit to accept or reject the in-band loop up and loop down codes as defined in ANSI

T1.403. This is a line loopback. Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE.

» DS1 TEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the T1 number.

»» LOC LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Causes loopback on near-end (local) port (see Figure 12 on page 108). The following options

are available:

»» REMOTE LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Sends loopback code to Remote CSU. The following options are available:

»» PATTERN

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

LINE Loopback without regenerating framing

PAYLD Payload loopback - framing and clocking are regenerated

AT&T INBAND LINE Works in ESF and D4 mode

ANSI FDL LINE Requires ESF mode

ANSI FDL PYLD Requires ESF mode

INBAND NIU Works in ESF and D4 mode

ALL ONES Framed ones

ALL ZEROS Framed zeros

QRSS Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 108 of 234

»» QRSS/RLB RESULTS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns.

When displaying test pattern status, the display string is composed of pattern sync status and

errored seconds.

»» CLR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

»» INJ

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

Figure 12. Network Loopback Tests

NONE No sync

LOS Sync has been lost

SYNC Pattern is synchronized

ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error

T3 Module

T1 Framer #28

T1 Framer #1

T1 Payload Loopback

T3 Line

M13

Mux

Front

End

T3 Line Loopback

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 109 of 234

> MODULES MENU (T3 WITH DROP AND INSERT OPTION MODULE)

The ATLAS 890 system controller automatically detects the presence of the T3 with Drop and Insert

Option Module when it is installed in the system (listed as DS3 D&I). To see the menus for the T3 with

Drop and Insert Option Module via the terminal menu, use the arrow keys to scroll to the MODULES menu

and press <Enter> to access the module choices. Refer to the T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module

Quick Start Guide for a menu tree containing a complete listing of menus.

»I

NFO

Read security: 5

Provides information about the module part number, serial number and assembly revision.

»» PART NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the part number of the module.

»» SERIAL NUMBER

Read security: 5

Displays the serial number of the module.

»» BOARD REVISION

Read security: 5

Displays the board revision of the installed module.

»» DS1S DROPPED

Read security: 5

Displays the number of T1 circuits configured for use in the ATLAS 890 system and not

passed through to the drop and insert interface.

»» DS1 FRAMER REV

Read security: 5

Displays the revision of the DS1 framer on the installed module.

»» M13 REV

Read security: 5

Displays the revision of the M13 mux on the installed module.

»M

UX CONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Allows users to define which T1s should be dropped for use in the ATLAS 890 system or passed on to

the drop and insert interface. T1s are dropped in pairs.

»» DS1 DISPOSITION

Read security: 5

This field has 28 letters, each corresponding (from left to right) to T1s 1-28 delivered on the

T3 primary interface. The following letters will display:

DDropped (available for use in the ATLAS 890 system)

PPass through to the drop and insert (secondary) T3 interface

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 110 of 234

»» DS1S DROPPED

Read security: 5

This field shows the number of T1s from the T3 circuit (in the primary interface) that are

available for use in the ATLAS 890 system.

»» DS1S PASSED THRU

Read security: 5

This field shows the number of T1s from the T3 circuit (in the primary interface) that are being

passed out the drop and insert (secondary) interface to other equipment.

»» T1 PAIR 1-2 THROUGH T1 PAIR 27-28

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These fields indicate which pairs of T1s of the T3 circuit connected to the primary interface

are selected to be dropped or passed through to the secondary interface.

» DS3 ALARM STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates the current alarm status of the primary and secondary T3 interfaces.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence of an alarm

and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms are monitored:

LOS

Loss of Signal. There is no T3 signal detected on the port interface.

RED

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T3 cannot be frame-synchronized. A Red

Alarm is indicated when the T3 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

BLUE

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the T3

payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

YELLOW

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end equip-

ment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

»» FE ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays received alarms from the far-end equipment.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 111 of 234

»» C-BIT

Read security: 5

Indicates whether C-Bit framing is being used on the T3 circuit. An asterisk (*) indicates the

presence of C-Bit framing and a dash (-) indicates no C-Bit framing present.

» DS3 PERF CURRENT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields – either current, 15 minute total, or 24 hour total – provide status on key per-

formance measures as specified in ANSI T1.231-1993 for DS3 interfaces.

» DS3 PERF 15 MIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

In the DS3 PERF 15 MIN menu, the performance data for the previous 15 minute window is stored.

Refer to DS3 Perf Current above for a detailed description.

PRT Displays the port number.

CLR Clears performance information for the selected port.

ES_L (Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing excessive

zeros, LOS, or BPVs, not due to line code substitutions.

SES_L (Severely Errored Seconds - Line) Count of seconds containing

excessive zeros, LOS, or BPVs, not due to line code

substitutions above a predetermined threshold.

LOSS_L (Loss of Signal Second - Line) Count of seconds of LOS

condition.

CV_P (Code Violation - Path) For the M13 applications, an

accumulation of P-bit parity errors. For the C-bit parity

application, an accumulation of CP-bit parity errors.

ES_P (Errored Second - Path) An accumulation of seconds during

which any one of the following conditions exist: parity errors,

severely errored frame, or AIS signal received.

SAS_P (SEF/AIS Second) An accumulation of seconds during which

severely errored frame or AIS signal is received.

SES_P (Severely Errored Seconds - Path) An accumulation of seconds

during which parity errors, severely errored frames, or AIS

signal is received.

UAS_P (Unavailable Seconds - Path) An accumulation of one-second

intervals during which the DS3 path is unavailable; i.e., 10

contiguous SES_Ps.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 112 of 234

» DS3 PERF 24 HR.

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS3 Perf Current on page 111

for a detailed description.

» DS3 CONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Includes all of the configurable parameters pertaining to the primary and secondary T3 interfaces.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the port number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enter any text up to 16 characters to uniquely identify the T3 port on the T3 Option Module.

»» FRAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Configures the framing format for the T3 circuit. Selections are M13 or C-BIT.

»» TX CLOCK

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the source of the T3 transmit clock. The following options are available:

»» LBO

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the line build out for the T3 transmitter. The following options are available:

RECOVERED The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the receive T3.

INTERNAL The ATLAS 890 will derive transmit T3 timing from the internal ±20 PPM

crystal source.

Every T3 connection should have one RECOVERED and one INTERNAL transmit clock.

Failure to configure this will result in T3 clock slips.

SHORT 0 to 100 feet of cable

LONG 100 to 450 feet of cable

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 113 of 234

» DS3 TEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Executes loops and indicates test status.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the T3 port under test.

»» LOOPBACK

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field indicates the present loopback selected. The following options will display:

»» REMOTE LB

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field indicates if loopbacks initiated from remote sources are in effect and may be used to

execute remote loopbacks on the far-end T3 equipment. The following options are available:

»» REMOTE STATUS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This field indicates the progress of remote loopbacks. The following options will display:

LINE LOOPBACK ACTIVE

Remote line loopback is active.

NO LOOPS ACTIVE

Remote line loopbacks are inactive.

» DS1 ALARM STATUS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Indicates T1 alarm status.

NONE No loopback in effect

LINE T3 line loopback active

NONE No remote loopbacks are activated

DS3 LINE T3 line loopback active

DS1 #1 ...

DS1 #28 Remote individual T1 line loopback is activated

DS1 ALL Remote T1 line loopbacks for all 28 T1s is activated

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 114 of 234

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Indicates the number of the T1 circuit (1-28).

»» ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays the alarm status for each of the 28 T1 circuits. An asterisk (*) indicates the presence

of an alarm and a dash (-) indicates no alarm. The following alarms are monitored:

RED

Loss of Frame or Red Alarm. Received T1 cannot be frame-synchronized. A Red

Alarm is indicated when the T1 has been out of frame for 2.5 seconds.

YELLOW

Remote Alarm Indication or Yellow Alarm. Receiving RAI signal from far-end equip-

ment indicating that the far-end equipment is in red alarm.

BLUE

Alarm Indication Signal or Blue Alarm. Receiving alarm indication signal in the T1

payload from far end equipment indicating a problem upstream.

D-CHAN ALR

D Channel alarm is only meaningful if T1 is defined as a PRI. (PRI configuration of a

T1 circuit in a T3 bundle requires using one of the HDLC resources provided on the

system controller module or an HDLC Option Module.)

» DS1 DS0 STATUS

Read security: 5

Indicates usage on a DS0 basis for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These options are read-only:

-Unallocated

*Inactive

+Signaling mismatch

AActive B Channel

DActive D Channel

MMaintenance

NDedicated (nailed)

OOff hook - originate (RBS)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 115 of 234

» DS1 DS0 ALARMS

Read security: 5

Displays per-DS0 alarm status for each T1 in the T3 circuit. These alarms usually indicate the failure

to receive the protocol that has been configured for the DS0.

» DS1 SIG STATUS

Read security: 5

Read-only field that indicates signaling of all 24 DS0s for each T1 in the T3 circuit. The A/B bits for

Rx (receive) and Tx (transmit) DS0s are shown when the T1s are configured for D4 framing. When the

T1s are configured for ESF framing, ABCD bits are shown for each DS0. Dashes display for those

DS0s where robbed bit signaling (RBS) is not being transferred by the ATLAS 890.

» DS1 PERF CURRENT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The performance fields (either current, 15-minute total, or 24-hour total) provide status on key perfor-

mance measures as specified in ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR54016 for each T1 in the T3 circuit.

Excepting CLR, these fields are all read-only. The monitored parameters include the following:

RRinging (RBS); Restart (ISDN)

WWaiting dial tone

-No Alarm DS0

DD Channel Alarm (ISDN)

FFrame Alarm (packet)

TTBOP Alarm (packet)

PPPP Alarm (packet)

PRT Displays the T1 number (1-28).

CLR Clears performance information for the selected T1.

ESErrored Second (ES) is a second with one or more error events OR

one or more Out Of Frame events OR one or more Controlled Slips.

BES Bursty Errored Second (BES) is a second with more than one, but

less than 320 error events.

SES Severely Errored Second (SES) is a second with 320 or more error

events OR one or more Out Of Frame events.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 116 of 234

» DS1 PERF 15MIN

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 15-minute window. Refer to DS1 Perf Current on page

115 for a detailed description of these fields.

» DS1 PERF 24HR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Stores the performance data for the previous 24-hour window. Refer to DS1 Perf Current on page 115

for a detailed description.

» DS1 CONFIGURATION

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

All of the following configurable parameters apply to whether the port is connected to a Primary Rate

ISDN circuit or a channelized T1 circuit.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the T1 number.

»» PORT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Accepts any alpha-numeric name up to 16 characters long, to uniquely identify each T1 in the

T3 circuit.

»» FRAME

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

This field must be set to match the frame format of the circuit to which it is connected, avail-

able from the network supplier. Choose either D4 or ESF.

»» CODE

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Set this field to match the line code of the circuit to which it is connected (this information is

available from the network supplier). Choose either AMI or B8ZS.

SEFS Severely Errored Frame Second is a second that contains four

consecutive errored framing patterns.

LOFC Loss of Frame Count is a count of seconds in which a valid framing

pattern could not be obtained.

CSS Controlled Slip Second

UAS Unavailable Second

PCV Path Code Violation

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 117 of 234

»» TX YEL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the transmitting of yellow alarms. Choose either ON or OFF.

»» TX PRM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Controls the sending of performance report messaging (PRM) data on the facility data link

(FDL). The PRM data continues to be collected even if XMIT PRM is turned off (possible

only with ESF format). Choose either ON or OFF.

»» LB ACCEPT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets unit to accept or reject the in-band loop up and loop down codes as defined in ANSI

T1.403. This is a line loopback. Choose either ACCEPT or IGNORE.

» DS1 TEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

These options initiate different types of tests and display test results.

»» PRT

Read security: 5

Displays the T1 number.

»» LOC LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Causes loopback on near-end (local) port (see Figure 12 on page 108). The following options

are available:

»» REMOTE LB

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Sends loopback code to Remote CSU. The following options are available:

LINE Loopback without regenerating framing

PAYLD Payload loopback - framing and clocking are regenerated

AT&T INBAND LINE Works in ESF and D4 mode

ANSI FDL LINE Requires ESF mode

ANSI FDL PYLD Requires ESF mode

INBAND NIU Works in ESF and D4 mode

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 118 of 234

»» PATTERN

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Test pattern to be transmitted out the port. The following options are available:

»» QRSS/RLB RESULTS

Write security: 4; Read security: 5

Displays current status of T1 tests including information regarding loopbacks and test patterns.

When displaying test pattern status, the display string is composed of pattern sync status and

errored seconds.

»» CLR

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Clears error counters on test pattern results menu.

»» INJ

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Injects errors into transmitted test pattern.

ALL ONES Framed ones

ALL ZEROS Framed zeros

QRSS Pseudo-random pattern with suppression of excess zeros

NONE No sync

LOS Sync has been lost

SYNC Pattern is synchronized

ES Number of seconds with at least one bit error

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 119 of 234

> PACKET MANAGER

The PACKET MANAGER submenus define and configure all layer 2 connections, including frame relay

endpoints (see Figure 13). These submenus include PACKET ENDPNTS, PACKET CNCTS, CNCTS SORT

and FRAME RELAY IQ.

Figure 13. Packet Manager Menu

»P

ACKET ENDPNTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines, monitors, and tests a packet endpoint. Submenus include STATUS, PERFORMANCE, CONFIG,

TEST, ENDPNT COUNT, and ENDPNTS SORT.

»» STATUS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the status of each packet endpoint including the packet endpoint name, the protocol

type, the signaling role, the signaling type, the signaling activity, and the connections. The

configuration choices are:

ENDPNT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the packet endpoint name as defined in the PACKET ENDPNTS/CONFIG

menu (see also Config/ENDPNT NAME on page 125).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 120 of 234

PROTOCOL

Read security: 5

Displays the layer 2 protocol for this packet endpoint. FR indicates this packet end-

point is configured for frame relay. TBOP indicates this packet endpoint is configured

for Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol (TBOP). PPP indicates this packet endpoint is

configured for the Point-to-Point Protocol.

SIG ROLE

Read security: 5

Displays the frame relay signaling role for this packet endpoint. The following options

indicate the signaling role for this packet endpoint. These settings are not applicable

for PPP.

USER

Indicates the user side of the User to Network Interface (UNI).

NETWORK

Indicates the network side of the UNI.

BOTH

Indicates the packet endpoint is operating in Network to Network Interface (NNI)

mode.

SIG TYPE

Read security: 5

Displays the frame relay signaling type used on this packet endpoint. These settings

are not applicable for PPP.

ANNEX A

Signaling using ITU-T Q.933-A.

ANNEX D

Signaling using ANSI T1.617-D.

LMI

Signaling using Group of Four.

SIG STATE - FRAME RELAY

Read security: 5

Indicates the frame relay signaling state on this packet endpoint. The possible states

are defined below.

Indicates that there is active frame relay signaling on this endpoint. The packet

endpoint must be defined by the frame relay configuration settings to show active

frame relay signaling.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 121 of 234

DOWN

The packet endpoint stays in this state only when the physical line is down.

SIG STATE - PPP

Read security: 5

Indicates the status of the PPP negotiation.The possible states are defined below.

INITIAL

This is the first state of LCP negotiation. If the packet endpoint is connected to a

physical port in the DEDICATED MAP, this state will usually transition to the

STARTING state to begin the PPP negotiation.

STARTING

The packet endpoint stays in this state only when the physical line is down.

REQ - SENT

The packet endpoint has sent an LCP configuration request to the peer and is wait-

ing for an “acknowledge.”

ACK - RECVD

The packet endpoint has received an “acknowledge” from the peer for the sent

configuration request.

ACK - SENT

The packet endpoint has acknowledged the peer’s configuration request, but the

peer has not acknowledged us.

OPENED

LCP negotiation on the packet endpoint has finished; authentication, if enabled,

occurs now.

CLOSING

The packet endpoint has sent the peer a “terminate” request and is waiting for the

peer’s acknowledgement.

CLOSED

The packet endpoint has received the peer’s acknowledgement to the sent termi-

nate request; this is followed by the initial state.

STOPPING

The packet endpoint has received a terminate request from the peer.

STOPPED

The packet endpoint has acknowledged the peer’s terminate request.

NOT CONNECTED

The packet endpoint is not connected to the router in the PACKET CNCTS menu.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 122 of 234

CURRENT PORT

Read security: 5

Displays the connections for the packet endpoint. The letter U in this field indicates

that this packet endpoint is used in the PACKET CNCTS map. The remainder of the

field indicates the physical port this packet endpoint is connected to in the

DEDICATED MAP. If the port is a channelized interface such as a T1, the DS0 assign-

ment is also provided.

»» PERFORMANCE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays performance information for each packet endpoint including the endpoint name, the

protocol used, link stats, and sublink stats.

ENDPNT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the packet endpoint name as defined in the PACKET ENDPNTS/CONFIG

menu (see also Config, ENDPNT NAME on page 125).

PROT

Read security: 5

Displays the layer 2 protocol for this packet endpoint. FR indicates this packet end-

point is configured for frame relay. TBOP indicates this packet endpoint is configured

for Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol (TBOP). PPP indicates this packet endpoint is

configured for the Point-to-Point Protocol.

LINK STATS - FRAME RELAY

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays layer 2 performance statistics. The statistics fields for frame relay reflect the

total count since last cleared. The available statistic information is discussed below.

TX PACKETS

Total number of frame relay packets transmitted through this packet endpoint,

including both user data (on all PVCs) and signaling.

RX PACKETS

Total number of frame relay packets received through this packet endpoint on all

PVCs.

STATE CHANGES

Total number of times that frame relay signaling has gone active or inactive.

SIGNALING ERRORS

Total number of signaling frames received with PVC signaling protocol viola-

tions.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 123 of 234

SIGNALING TIMEOUTS

Number of times signaling polls were not received in the time specified in T391

in the PACKET ENDPTS/CONFIG menu.

ASYNC STATUS TX

Full status not transmitted during the normal full status cycle. An asynchronous

status message is used to quickly activate a link.

ASYNC STATUS RX

Full status not received during the normal full status cycle. An asynchronous sta-

tus message is used to quickly activate a link.

FULL STATUS TX

Number of full status polls transmitted by this packet endpoint.

FULL STATUS RX

Number of full status polls received by this packet endpoint.

LINK INTEGRITY STATUS TX

Number of link integrity polls transmitted by this packet endpoint.

LINK INTEGRITY STATUS RX

Number of link integrity polls received by this packet endpoint.

CLEAR COUNTERS

Clears all values in this submenu.

LINK STATS - TBOP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays layer 2 performance statistics. The statistics fields for TBOP reflect the total

count since last cleared. The available statistic information is discussed below.

TX PACKETS

Total number of HDLC packets transmitted through this packet endpoint.

RX PACKETS

Total number of HDLC packets received through this packet endpoint.

CLEAR COUNTERS

Clears all values in this submenu.

LINK STATS - PPP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays layer 2 performance statistics. The statistics fields for PPP reflect the total

count since last cleared. The available statistic information is discussed below.

LCP STATE

Displays the current state of the LCP negotiations.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 124 of 234

IPCP

Displays the UP if PPP IP control has successfully negotiated.

TX PACKETS

Number of packets transmitted over this link.

RX PACKETS

Number of packets received over this link.

CLEAR COUNTERS

Resets the Tx and Rx packet counts.

SUBLINK STATS - FRAME RELAY

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays frame relay performance statistics for supported packet endpoint sublinks.

These statistic fields reflect the total count since cleared. These settings are not appli-

cable for PPP or TBOP.

NAME

User-defined name of a sublink (PVC).

DLCI

Local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier.

STATE

Indicates if this particular sublink (PVC) has been defined as active by a full status

poll, and also indicates if the PVC is in backup mode.

ACTIVE

PVC is active.

INACTIVE

PVC is inactive.

ACTIVE/BU

PVC is active, but in backup mode.

INACTIVE/BU

PVC is inactive and in backup mode.

TX PCKTS

Total number of frame relay user data packets transmitted over this PVC.

RX PCKTS

Total number of frame relay user data packets received over this PVC.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 125 of 234

STATISTICS

Provides additional information, as follows, on the individual sublink:

RESET COUNTERS

Resets all sublink counters.

FECN COUNT

Total number of FECN bits received on this PVC.

BECN COUNT

Total number of BECN bits received on this PVC.

DE DISCARD COUNT

Total number of Discard Eligible bits that have been received on this PVC.

»» CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Creates and configures packet endpoints.

ENDPNT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

User-definable name (such as the name of the frame relay provider or the circuit ID).

PROT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the protocol operating on this port. FRAME RELAY configures this packet end-

point for frame relay signaling. TBOP configures this endpoint as transparent bit ori-

ented protocol. PPP configures this packet endpoint as point-to-point protocol.

CONFIG - FRAME RELAY

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Contains the configuration parameters for this packet endpoint.

SIGNALING ROLE

Displays the frame relay signaling role for this packet endpoint. The following

options indicate the signaling role of this packet endpoint.

OFF

The remote device does not support frame relay signaling.

AUTO

Detects the role of the device on the other end of the circuit and automatically

sets this packet endpoint to the appropriate value.

BOTH

Operates in NNI mode.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 126 of 234

NETWORK

Acts as the network side of the UNI interface.

USER

Acts as the user side of the UNI interface.

SIGNALING TYPE

Displays the frame relay signaling type for this packet endpoint. The following

options indicate the signaling type for this packet endpoint.

AUTO

Detects the signaling type of the device on the other end of the circuit and

automatically sets this packet endpoint to the same signaling type.

ANNEX A

Transmits and responds to ITU-T Q.933-A standards.

ANNEX D

Transmits and responds to ANSI T1.617-D standards.

LMI

Transmits and responds to Group of Four specifications.

USER POLL TIMER (T391)

Sets the polling interval to the network in seconds.

USER POLLS PER STATUS (N391)

Controls how many link integrity polls occur between full status polls.

USER BAD EVENT THRESHOLD (N392)

Sets the number of bad polling events that will cause the link to be declared down

in N393 polls.

USER EVENT WINDOW SIZE (N393)

Defines the number of poll events in each monitored window.

NET POLL RESPONSE TIMEOUT (T392)

Determines how long this packet endpoint will wait without receiving a poll

For most applications, the USER POLL TIMER, USER POLLS PER STATUS, USER BAD

EVENT THRESHOLD, and USER EVENT WINDOW SIZE configuration parameters should

be left in the default state. Use caution when changing these parameters.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 127 of 234

before declaring the poll bad.

NET POLLS PER STATUS (N391)

Sets the number of link integrity polls before a full status is transmitted.

NET BAD EVENTS THRESHOLD (N392)

Sets the number of bad polling events that will cause the link to be declared down

in N393 polls.

NET EVENT WINDOW SIZE (N393)

Defines the number of poll events in each monitored window.

CONFIG - PPP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the configuration for this packet endpoint.

AUTHENTICATION

Contains the Authentication parameters for this endpoint.

RX METHOD

These are methods the ATLAS 890 uses to authenticate the peer. NONE is

selected when you do not want to authenticate the peer. PAP, CHAP, or EAP

is selected when you will allow the peer to be authenticated with one of the

listed authentication protocols. In this case, the most secure method will be

used first (EAP, then CHAP, then PAP). CHAP or EAP is selected when

you will authenticate the peer only using one of the encrypted authentication

protocols. EAP is selected when you will authenticate the peer only using the

EAP authentication protocol.

RX AUTHENTICATION

This selects the different types of authentication to use to authenticate the

peer. LOCAL is used when you want to use the local username and password

for this port to authenticate the peer.

Ensure that this timer is greater than the T391 on the user side of the UNI; otherwise,

erratic behavior will result.

If the number of bad polls reaches N392 in any N393 period, the link will be declared

down. When N393 good polls are received, the link will be declared active again.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 128 of 234

RX USERNAME

The username the ATLAS 890 will use to authenticate the peer.

RX PASSWORD

The password the ATLAS 890 will use to authenticate the peer.

TX METHOD

This field displays a list of the methods that we will allow the peer to authen-

ticate us with. This is of use when a peer wants to do PAP just to get your

password. NONE is selected when you do not want to be authenticated by the

peer. PAP, CHAP, or EAP is selected when you will let the peer use one or

all of the authentication protocols. CHAP or EAP is selected when you will

let the peer use only one of the encrypted authentication protocols. EAP is

selected when you will let the peer use only the EAP authentication protocol.

TX USERNAME

The username that the peer will use to authenticate the ATLAS 890.

TX PASSWORD

The password that the peer will use to authenticate the ATLAS 890.

DEBUG LOG

The following events can be viewed in the event log when PPP events have been

turned to INFO.

LCP DEBUGGING

This turns on LCP negotiation debugging.

IPCP DEBUGGING

This turns on IPCP negotiation debugging.

AUTHENTICATION DEBUGGING

This turns on authentication debugging.

UNKNOWN PROTOCOL DEBUGGING

This turns on debugging for unknown protocols.

MAX CONFIG

This value is the number of unanswered configuration requests that should be

transmitted before giving up on negotiation. The default value is 10.

MAX TIMER

This value is the number of seconds to wait between unanswered configuration

requests. The default value is 2 seconds.

MAX FAILURE

Due to the nature of PPP, configuration options may not be agreed upon between

two PPP peers. This value is the number of configuration-NAKs that should occur

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 129 of 234

before an option is configuration-rejected. This allows a connection to succeed

that might otherwise fail. The default value is 5.

KEEPALIVE

Configures the ATLAS 890 to send keepalive frames on PPP connections that are

not currently in use for data.

RESET SESSION

Resets PPP negotiation with the peer.

SUBLINKS - FRAME RELAY

Contains the configuration parameters for individual sublinks, or PVCs. The follow-

ing parameters are available.

NAME

User-definable name for the DLCI.

DLCI

Local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier.

QOS

Quality of service. These values can be used to assign a guaranteed amount of

bandwidth available for this connection. The sum of all QOS values for the sub-

link should not exceed the Committed Information Rate (CIR).

BURST

Sets the burst rate used by this virtual circuit for data traffic. A value of zero

means that the burst rate is not limited. The value is in kilobits/second. If voice

traffic is flowing on ANY sublink on the port carrying THIS sublink, you should

enter a value for this setting. Otherwise, leave this field set to default (zero). If the

service provider has supplied a 'Be' value, enter that value in this field. The burst

rate defines the amount that this virtual circuit is allowed to exceed the CIR. If the

service provider has not supplied an excess burst rate, enter the wire speed in this

field.

CONFIG

Allows configuration of parameters for each DLCI.

FRAGMENTATION THRESHOLD

Max packet size allowed on this PVC. A zero value disables fragmentation.

Fragmentation is used to improve the quality of voice transmission. A good

value is R/300, where R is the smallest of the ATLAS 890 link rates or the far

end link rate in bits per second. For example, if a DLCI comes from an FSU

5622 running on a 56K DDS line and is delivered to the ATLAS 890 on a full

T1, the lower rate is 56000 and the value is 186 or 187. Entered values

between 1 and 127 are adjusted upward.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 130 of 234

DLCI STATE

Controls how the state of this DLCI is reported to any packet connections

within ATLAS 890 attempting to send or receive data on this DLCI.

AUTO

Passes the state as reported by the frame relay switch. Set DLCI STATE to

AUTO for normal operation.

FORCE ACTIVE

This DLCI disregards the status as reported from the switch and reports

ACTIVE to all packet endpoints within ATLAS 890.

FORCE INACTIVE

Reports status as DOWN to all packet endpoints within ATLAS 890.

DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Controls operation of PVC testing options. To allow the far end to measure

delay, select ECHO FAR-END LOOPBACKS. To continuously measure in-band

delay, select IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT. To turn off continuous diag-

nostic functions, select PASS-THROUGH DIAGNOSTIC PACKETS.

ECHO FAR-END LOOPBACKS

Generates and transmits a response on this DLCI to the remote equipment

if an ADTRAN proprietary diagnostic message is received on this DLCI.

IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT

Generates a diagnostic packet to measure delay through the frame relay

network. This process requires that the equipment at the remote site be

ADTRAN IQ compatible.

PASS-THROUGH DIAGNOSTIC PACKETS

Used when ATLAS 890 is acting as a frame relay switch. Transmits a

diagnostic packet out the packet endpoint connected to this DLCI, if a

diagnostic packet is received on this packet endpoint.

PRIMARY | BACKUP SELECTION

Allows you to define a sublink as a primary or a backup sublink. PRIMARY

defines a normal sublink and includes the menus ENABLE BACKUP SUP-

PORT, BACKUP PACKET ENDPT, and BACKUP SUBLINK. BACKUP defines a

backup sublink and includes the menus PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT and PRI-

MARY SUBLINK.

ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT

Visible only if the sublink type is PRIMARY. YES displays the backup

menus. NO hides the backup menus.

BACKUP PACKET ENDPT

Visible only if ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT is set to YES. Selects

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 131 of 234

BACKUP PACKET ENDPT that contains the BACKUP SUBLINK to be tied

to this sublink.

BACKUP SUBLINK

Visible only if ENABLE BACKUP SUPPORT is set to YES. Selects the

BACKUP SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink.

PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT

Visible only if BACKUP is selected. Selects the PRIMARY PACKET ENDPT

that contains the PRIMARY SUBLINK to be tied to this sublink.

PRIMARY SUBLINK

Visible only if BACKUP is selected. Selects the PRIMARY SUBLINK to be

tied to this sublink.

BACKUP MODE

Provides switching options.

AUTO

Provides normal operation.

FORCED

Forces a switch to backup.

DISABLED

Disables backup switching.

SWITCH ON SUBLINK INACTIVE

Provides switching options if the sublink goes down. Select YES to switch

to backup if the primary sublink goes down, otherwise select NO.

SWITCH ON LMI DOWN

Provides switching options for LMI signaling. Select YES to switch to

backup if LMI signaling is inactive on the primary link, otherwise select

NO.

SWITCH ON BACKUP ACTIVE

Provides switching options if the backup sublink goes active. Select YES

to switch to backup if the backup sublink goes active, otherwise select

NO.

The fields BACKUP MODE, SWITCH ON SUBLINK DOWN, SWITCH ON LMI INACTIVE,

SWITCH ON BACKUP ACTIVE, BACKUP DELAY IN SECONDS, and RESTORE DELAY IN

SECONDS display if PRIMARY (with BACKUP SUPPORT) or BACKUP is enabled.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 132 of 234

BACKUP DELAY IN SECONDS

The amount of time within which any of the enabled switch criteria must

be met before service is switched to the backup circuit.

RESTORE DELAY IN SECONDS

The amount of time within which the criteria for switching to backup are

reached before service is returned to the primary circuit.

USAGE

Read security: 5

This field displays a 7-character summary of the references to this link. Each position

is populated with a dash (-) or a character indicating the resource represented. The

characters are as follows:

»» TEST

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides menus for controlling options and setting for packet endpoints.

ENDPNT NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the name of the packet endpoint.

PROTOCOL

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the protocol running on the packet endpoint.

SUBLINK - FRAME RELAY

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays test menus for the packet endpoint sublinks. The menus vary depending on

the protocol. Testing is not supported on TBOP or PPP.

NAME

Displays the user-defined name for the DLCI.

1Packet connection in the first dedicated map

2Packet connection in the second dedicated map

3Packet connection in the third dedicated map

4Packet connection in the fourth dedicated map

5Packet connection in the fifth dedicated map

–Reserved and currently not is use

sUsed as a Packet Endpoint in the switched dial plan

uUsed by one or more packet switch connections or packet voice entries

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 133 of 234

DLCI

Displays the local address for each PVC as assigned by the carrier.

TEST

Displays the test mode for the PVC.

START

The fixed duration that TEST is not running and the DLCI is not configured

for continuous in-band delay measurement. To change this option, set DIAG-

NOSTIC MODE to IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT (also see In-Band Delay

Measurement on page 130).

CONTDLY

The fixed duration TEST is not running and the DLCI is configured for contin-

uous in-band delay measurement. The following RESULTS menu accumulates

these measurements.

STOP

The fixed duration TEST is running. The following DURATION field shows the

time remaining in the current test.

DURATION

Shows the duration in seconds for the fixed-duration test.

RESULTS [MN/AV/MX DLY]

Displays the minimum, average, and maximum delay for the delay-measurement

test. To display the additional test results, place the cursor over this field and press

<Enter> on the keyboard. The displayed times are in milliseconds.

ECHO PKT TX

Displays the total number of test packets that have been transmitted.

ECHO PKT RX

Displays the total number of test packets that have been received.

ECHO PKT DROPPED

Displays the total number of packets lost in the receiving direction (traveling

from the remote ADTRAN frame relay device to the ATLAS).

RMT PKT DROPPED

Displays the total number of packets lost in the transmit direction (traveling

from the ATLAS to the remote ADTRAN frame relay device).

MIN DELAY

Displays the minimum round trip delay for the current test period.

MAX DELAY

Displays the maximum round trip delay for the current test period.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 134 of 234

AVG DELAY

Displays the average round trip delay for the current test.

RESET COUNTERS

Resets the counters.

»» ENDPT COUNT

Read security: 5

Displays the total number of packet endpoints configured.

»» ENDPTS SORT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Provides sorting options for the packet endpoints. SORTING BY NAME sorts packet endpoints

alphabetically by name. If you do not want to sort packet endpoints, set this option to OFF.

»P

ACKET CNCTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

After packet endpoints are defined, they are connected in the packet connects (PACKET CNCTS) map.

PACKET CNCTS connects upper layer protocols from packet endpoint to packet endpoint. You can

think of it as a dedicated map for virtual ports rather than physical ports.

»» FROM: PEP

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Selects one packet endpoint for the packet connection. Packet endpoints created in the packet

endpoint configuration are visible on a pull-down menu which includes the ROUTER option.

This router is the internal ATLAS 890 router and can be used multiple times within the

PACKET CNCTS menu.

»» SUBLINK

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

If the packet endpoint selected in FROM: PEP supports sublinks, they are available in this

menu. In frame relay, this is the PVC from which you are selecting to groom data.

»» TO: PEP

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Selects the other packet endpoint for the packet connection. Refer to FROM: PEP for more

detail.

»» SUBLINK

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

If the TO: PEP packet endpoint supports sublinks, the available sublinks are shown within

this menu, which includes the ROUTER option.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 135 of 234

»» PROTOCOL

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Selects the protocols for this packet connection. Selecting the protocols on each individual

connection allows the mixing of data from multiple sources onto a single PVC. Available pro-

tocols include the following: ALL, IP, BRIDGE IP, PACKET VOICE, SNA, SNAP, and TRANS-

PARENT PROTOCOLS (TBOP and TASYNC).

»» CONFIG

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Determines data source and destination. The available options depend on the protocol

selected.

CONFLICT

Indicates DLCI mismatch.

FROM

Indicates data source.

Indicates data destination.

»C

NCTS SORT

Write Security: 3; Read Security: 5

Determines the order in which connections are displayed within PACKET CNCTS. Options include

FROM PKT ENDPT/SUBLINK, TO PKT ENDPT/SUBLINK, CONNECTION PROTOCOL, and OFF.

»F

RAME RELAY IQ

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 5

Gathers and stores statistical information in the submenus ENABLE IQ STATS, PORT ENABLES, CON-

FIG, and VIEW IQ STATISTICS.

»» ENABLE IQ STATS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 5

Globally enables and disables IQ statistics gathering. IQ statistics are only gathered when this

option is enabled. This field defaults to the original setting of [15 MIN, 7 DAYS, 96 INTS] when

re-enabled.

Keep in mind the following:

1. If ALL is selected, additional connections from that PVC are not allowed.

2. If ROUTER is selected as one packet endpoint, IP is automatically set as the

PROTOCOL.

3. If a TBOP packet endpoint is selected as one packet endpoint, TRANSPARENT is

automatically set as the PROTOCOL.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 136 of 234

»» PORT ENABLES

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 5

Enables and disables IQ statistics gathering for each port. Use the submenus NAME, ENABLE,

ALL SUBLINKS, and SUBLINKS to configure the individual ports.

NAME

Displays the port number and name.

ENABLE

Enables and disables IQ statistics gathering for the port identified in NAME.

ALL SUBLINKS

Provides an easy way to enable or disable IQ statistics gathering on all sublinks. When

this activator reads DISABLE, pressing <Enter> disables IQ statistics gathering on all

sublinks. When it reads ENABLE, pressing <Enter> enables IQ statistics gathering on

all sublinks.

SUBLINKS

Identifies the PVC to be polled. Indicates the number of sublinks that ATLAS 890 will

collect IQ data for within the given link.

NAME

Displays the user-designated name of the sublink (up to 15 characters).

DLCI

Displays the Data Link Connection Identifier (circuit number).

ENABLE

Indicates collection of IQ data for the target DLCI.

»» CONFIG

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 5

Sets the parameters for IQ statistics gathering.

CURRENT PIVS

Identifies resources used by IQ statistics storage. A PIV is a port or PVC per interval.

ATLAS can track up to 10,000 PIVs. Think of it as a resource meter. The PIV number

is derived from the MAX DAYS and MAX INTERVALS selected by the user. Changing

one affects the other.

INTERVAL PERIOD

Sets the period for IQ statistics gathering. Options are 5, 10, 15, 20, and 30 min-

utes.

MAX DAYS

Defines the number of history day intervals to keep. Maximum entry is dependent

on the MAX INTERVALS setting.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 137 of 234

MAX INTERVALS

Defines the number of history intervals to keep. Maximum entry is dependent on

the MAX DAYS setting.

»» VIEW IQ STATISTICS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 5

Displays statistical information gathered for intervals and days on a port and for intervals and

days on sublinks (PVCs or DLCIs).

INTERVAL AND DAY

Descriptions of the statistics available in the INTERVAL or DAY submenus follow:

RX FRAMES

The number of frames the port received for the interval or day.

RX BYTES

The number of bytes the port received for the interval or day.

MAX RX THRU

The maximum throughput the port received for the interval or day.

AVG RX THRU

The average throughput the port received for the interval or day.

MAX RX UTIL%

The maximum utilization the port received for the interval or day.

AVG RX UTIL%

The average utilization the port received for the interval or day.

TX FRAMES

The number of frames the port transmitted for the interval or day.

TX BYTES

The number of bytes the port transmitted for the interval or day.

MAX TX THRU

The maximum throughput the port transmitted for the interval or day.

AVG TX THRU

The average throughput the port transmitted for the interval or day.

MAX TX UTIL%

The maximum utilization the port transmitted for the interval or day.

AVG TX UTIL%

The average utilization the port transmitted for the interval or day.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 138 of 234

PORT UA TIME

Time, in seconds, the port is unavailable due to physical or frame relay outage.

SIG DOWN TIME

Time, in seconds, the signaling state has been down.

SIGNAL ERROR

The number of PVC signaling frames received with protocol violations.

SIGNAL T/O

The number of PVC signal time-outs. Either T391 seconds elapsed without

receiving a response to a poll or T392 seconds elapsed without receiving a poll.

SIG STATE CHG

The number of state changes for the PVC signaling protocol. This number

includes transitions from down state to up state and vice-versa.

RX FULL STAT

The number of PVC-signaling, full-status frames received.

TX FULL STAT

The number of PVC-signaling, full-status frames transmitted.

RX LI ONLY

The number of PVC-signaling, link integrity only frames received.

TX LI ONLY

The number of PVC-signaling, link integrity only frames transmitted.

ASYNC STATUS

The number of single PVC status frames received.

DISCARD FRAME

The number of frames discarded by the IQ unit.

ABORTS

The number of frames received without proper flag termination.

CRC ERROR

The number of frames received with CRC errors.

OCTET ALIGN

The number of frames received with a bit count not divisible by eight.

LENGTH ERROR

The number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes or greater than 4500

bytes.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 139 of 234

EA VIOLATION

The number of frames received with errors in the EA field of the frame relay

header.

INACTIVE DLCI

The number of frames received while the PVC is in the inactive state.

INVALID DLCI

The number of frames received with a DLCI value less than 16 or greater than

1007, not including PVC signaling frames.

SUBLINK

Provides statistics for a particular DLCI or PVC by interval or day.

INTERVAL AND DAY

Descriptions of the statistics available in the INTERVAL or DAY submenus follow:

RX FRAMES

The number of frames the PVC received for the interval or day.

RX BYTES

The number of bytes the PVC received for the interval or day.

MAX RX THRU

The maximum throughput the PVC received for the interval or day.

AVG RX THRU

The average throughput the PVC received for the interval or day.

MAX RX UTIL%

The maximum utilization the PVC received for the interval or day.

AVG RX UTIL%

The average utilization the PVC received for the interval or day.

TX FRAMES

The number of frames the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

TX BYTES

The number of bytes the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

MAX TX THRU

The maximum throughput the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

AVG TX THRU

The average throughput the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

MAX TX UTIL%

The maximum utilization the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 140 of 234

AVG TX UTIL%

The average utilization the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

PVC IA TIME

Time, in seconds, the PVC has been in the inactive state for the interval or day.

RX FECN

The number of FECNs the PVC has received for the interval or day.

TX FECN

The number of FECNs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day.

RX BECN

The number of BECNs the PVC has received for the interval or day.

TX BECN

The number of BECNs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day.

RX DE

The number of DEs the PVC has received for the interval or day.

TX DE

The number of DEs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day.

RX CR

The number of CRs the PVC has received for the interval or day.

TX CR

The number of CRs the PVC has transmitted for the interval or day.

LOST FRAMES

The number of lost frames on the PVC for the interval or day.

RMT LOST FRMS

The number of remote lost frames on the PVC for the interval. Applies only if IN-

BAND SEQUENCE NUMBER is ENABLED on the PVC.

RX BURST SEC

The number of bursty seconds the PVC received for the interval or day.

TX BURST SEC

The number of bursty seconds the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

MIN RX FRAME

The minimum frame size the PVC received for the interval or day.

MAX RX FRAME

The maximum frame size the PVC received for the interval or day.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 141 of 234

AVG RX FRAME

The average frame size the PVC received for the interval or day.

MIN TX FRAME

The minimum frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

MAX TX FRAME

The maximum frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

AVG TX FRAME

The average frame size the PVC transmitted for the interval or day.

MIN FRAME DLY

The minimum delay in milliseconds on the PVC IN-BAND DELAY MEASURE-

MENT is ENABLED (see In-Band Delay Measurement on page 130) for the PVC or

if PVC diagnostics are being performed.

MAX FRAME DLY

The maximum delay in milliseconds on the PVC for the interval or day. Applies

only if IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT is ENABLED (see In-Band Delay Mea-

surement on page 130) for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are being performed.

AVG FRAME DLY

The average delay in milliseconds on the PVC for the interval or day. Applies

only if IN-BAND DELAY MEASUREMENT is ENABLED (see In-Band Delay Mea-

surement on page 130) for the PVC or if PVC diagnostics are being performed.

PVC STATE CHANGE

The number of state changes for this PVC for the interval or day.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 142 of 234

> ROUTER

The ATLAS 890 router uses the integral 10BaseT Ethernet port to transmit local area network (LAN) traf-

fic over the wide area network (WAN) to a remote LAN. By integrating the router into the network access

device, you benefit from the cost savings of not requiring an external router. To view the menu options for

the Router, see Figure 14. All routing functions within the ATLAS are configured and monitored from the

ROUTER menu.

Figure 14. Router Menu (IP Selected)

»S

TATIC ROUTES

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

The STATIC ROUTES menu manages static IP routes. You can create, modify, and delete routes using

this menu.

»» IP ADDRESS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the IP address of the host or network device being routed to.

»» NETMASK

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Determines the number of bits used in the above-defined IP address for routing. If a host

address is desired for the IP address, this field must be set to 255.255.255.255.

»» GATEWAY

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the IP address of the router to receive the forwarded IP packet.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 143 of 234

»» INTERFACE

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the interface to which IP packets with this address will be routed. These are either

Ethernet or frame relay DLCIs.

»» HOPS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Maximum distance is

15 hops.

»» COST

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the total cost of getting to the network. For OSPF routing, this value represents the

cost associated with getting to the destination network. Normally, the cost is based on the

available bandwidth.

»» ENABLED

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Adds a static route to the router.

»» ADVERTISE

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

When set to YES, this static route is advertised over all interfaces on which a route advertise-

ment protocol (e.g. RIP) is enabled. When set to NO, this is a private route.

» ARP CACHE

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

The ARP CACHE menu displays the contents of the ATLAS Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

cache. All resolved cache entries time out after 20 minutes. Unresolved entries time out in 3 minutes.

»» IP ADDRESS

Read Security: 2

Displays the IP address used for resolving MAC address.

»» MAC ADDRESS

Read Security: 2

Resolves Ethernet address. If set to all zeros, there is no resolution for that address.

»» TIME

Read Security: 2

Displays the minutes since the entry was last referenced.

»» TYPE

Read Security: 2

Defines this entry as DYNAMIC or STATIC.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 144 of 234

»» INTERFACE

Read Security: 2

Displays the interface upon which this entry was found.

»» TX PENDING

Read Security: 2

Displays the number of transmit packets pending a reply.

»R

OUTES

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

The ROUTES menu displays the contents of the ATLAS routing table. All static and discovered routes

are displayed from this menu.

»» IP ADDRESS

Read Security: 2

Displays the IP address of the destination host or network.

»» NETMASK

Read Security: 2

Displays the subnet mask applied to the destination address.

»» GATEWAY

Read Security: 2

Displays the IP address of the next-hop router or host receiving the forwarded IP packet.

»» INTERFACE

Read Security: 2

Displays the next-hop router or host interface through which IP packets are routed, as defined

here:

LOCAL

Forwards the packet directly to the ATLAS router.

EN0 IP

Forwards the packet through the ATLAS Ethernet port.

ENDPOINT NAME

Forwards the packet using the DLCI number.

»» USED

Read Security: 2

Displays the number of times the router has referenced this route.

»» CLR

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Clears the USED menu and resets the value to zero.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 145 of 234

»» FLAGS

Read Security: 2

Indicates the properties of this routing table entry, composed of the following letters:

»» HOPS

Read Security: 2

Displays the number of router hops required to get to the network or host. Ranges from 0 to

16. If set to 16, the route is defined as infinite and cannot be used.

»» COST

Read security: 2

For OSPF routing, the cost value represents the current cost associated with getting data to the

destination network. Normally, the cost is based on the available bandwidth.

»» TTL

Read Security: 2

Displays the number of seconds until the address is removed from table. A value of 999 means

the route is static.

»I

NTERFACES

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

The INTERFACES menu configures and monitors all interfaces connected to the ATLAS router. These

include the Ethernet and frame relay DLCIs connected in the PACKET MANAGER/ PACKET CNCTS.

»» NETWORK NAME

Read Security: 2

Displays the name of the interface connected to the ATLAS router, as follows:

»» ADDRESS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the individual interface IP address. If this field is left as 0.0.0.0, it is treated as an

unnumbered interface.

H- route is a host route

G- route is a gateway route

DR - route learned dynamically from RIP

DO - intra-area route learned dynamically from OSPF

DOa- inter-area route learned dynamically from OSPF

DOe- external route learned dynamically from OSPF

I- route learned from an ICMP redirect

A- route learned from IARP

P- route is private and is not advertised with RIP

T- route is to a triggered port (updated only when table changes)

EN0 IP ATLAS Ethernet port

Endpoint Name DLCI Number

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 146 of 234

»» SUBNET MASK

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the subnet mask applied to the address defined for this link. If the interface IP address

is unnumbered, leave as 0.0.0.0.

»» IARP

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

The Inverse ARP (IARP) menu is only present when this interface is a frame-relay network

interface. ATLAS sends Inverse ARP packets to determine the IP address on the other end of

the virtual circuit. ATLAS always responds to Inverse ARP requests with its IP address for the

requested DLCI.

ENABLE

Causes ATLAS to dynamically send Inverse ARP packets to determine the IP address

on the other end of the virtual circuit. When an Inverse ARP packet is not responded

to, no route is placed in the IP route table. If the Inverse ARP packet is responded to, a

route is placed in the IP route table.

DISABLE

Instructs ATLAS not to generate Inverse ARP request packets. In this case, the FAR-

END ADDRESS parameter may be used to statically assign a route address (see the fol-

lowing, Far-End Address).

»» FAR-END ADDRESS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

This menu is only present for frame-relay network interfaces, and it is only selectable when

IARP is disabled. Use this menu to specify the IP address of the device on the other end of the

virtual circuit. If that IP address is non-zero, a static route to the far-end network will be added

using the interface Subnet-Mask. If 0.0.0.0 has been specified for the Subnet-Mask, a default

subnet mask is used, based on the class of the Far-End Address.

»» MTU

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines maximum number of bytes in a datagram transmitted over this interface (Maximum

Transmit Unit).

»» RIP

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Configures routing information protocol (RIP) on this interface.

MODE

Allows RIP to be enabled or disabled on a per-interface basis.

TX ONLY

RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted, but are not listened to on this vir-

tual circuit.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 147 of 234

RX ONLY

RIP advertisements are not transmitted on this virtual circuit, but they are listened

to.

TX AND RX

RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted and are listened to on this virtual

circuit.

PROTOCOL

Sets the version of RIP being used on this interface. The options are RIP V1 and RIP

V2. If RIP V2 is used, a new menu, AUTHENTICATION, opens.

METHOD

Defines the method used to send RIP route advertisements. The options are listed

below:

NONE

All routes in the router table are advertised through this interface with no modifi-

cation of the routing metric.

SPLIT HORIZON

Only advertises routes not learned through this interface.

POISON REVERSE

All routes are advertised, but the routes learned through this interface are “poi-

soned” with an infinite route metric.

UPDATES

Defines when RIP advertisements are transmitted.

PERIODIC

RIP advertisements are periodically transmitted.

TRIGGERED

RIP advertisements are transmitted only when new routes are learned, and learned

routes do not age.

If RIP/MODE is off, PROTOCOL, METHOD, and UPDATE will not be visible.

If RIP V2 is used, a user-defined secret may have to be created.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 148 of 234

AUTHENTICATION

Defines the secret used to advertise routes when using RIP V2.

REDISTRIBUTE DEFAULT GATEWAY

Enables or disables the transmission of the Default Gateway to be sent with RIP on a

per interface basis.

»» OSPF

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the parameters for this protocol.

MODE

Turns ON or OFF (default) OSPF.

AREA ID

Uniquely identifies an area with 32-bit integer. Area 0.0.0.0 (default) is used as the

OSPF backbone.

AUTHEN METHOD

Enables authentication for this interface at two levels, SIMPLE and MD5. Both meth-

ods use Hello packets to maintain adjacency. A Hello packet is multicast, usually

every ten seconds, to neighboring routers. Neighboring routers then return a Hello

packet to the sending router. If a router does not receive a Hello packet from an adja-

cent router, it knows there is a problem.

NONE Does not authenticate.

SIMPLE Transmits a clear text password in the OSPF Hello packets.

When set to SIMPLE, a new menu, PASSWORD, opens.

PASSWORD

Defines the password, a maximum of 8 characters, used in

transmitting OSPF Hello packets. The password also

authenticates Hello packets from other routers.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 149 of 234

HELLO TIME

The number of seconds of the intervals between Hello packets that the router sends on

the interface. This value, usually 10, must be the same for all routers attached to a

common network.

MD5 Selects MD5 as the hashing algorithm that exchanges keys

(passwords) between OSPF routers. Instead of exchanging

the key over the link, the router builds a message digest

based on the key, the key ID, and the packet.

KEY LIST

Defines and manages the keys (up to four) used in MD5.

Opens only when AUTHEN METHOD = MD5.

MODE

Defines how OSPF uses the key entry. INVALID means the

key is not used for authentication. VALID means the key can

be used for authenticating other routers but not for transmit-

ting Hello packets. TRANSMIT means the key is used for

transmitting Hello packets and authenticating other routers.

KEY

Transmits OSPF hello packets when Mode = Transmit.

Authenticates Hello packets from other routers when

Mode = Valid or Mode = Transmit. The Key is a maximum

16 character password.

KEY ID

Associates a particular key to an ID which may be necessary

to change keys in a multi-router system.

Only one entry can TRANSMIT at a time.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 150 of 234

DEAD TIME

The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before its

neighbors declare the router down. This value should be some multiple of the HELLO

TIME interval, and must be the same for all routers attached to a common network.

RETX INTERVAL

The number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacen-

cies belonging to this interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database

description and link-state request packets.

TRANSMIT DELAY

The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state update packet over

this interface.

COST

Calculates the cost of using an interface, by dividing 10e8 by the bandwidth which is

then advertised as the cost, or penalty, of using the interface. If set to 0, the cost is

automatically calculated using the interface bandwidth.

TYPE

Defines how OSPF should treat the interface. There are four OSPF types possible, but

not all of them are available for certain interface types. The OSPF types are as fol-

lows:

BROADCAST

Use for Ethernet or Bridged IP media.

NBMA

To use Non-Broadcast Multi-Access media, a neighbor list of each router must be

specified.

POINT-TO-POINT

Use when it is known that only one router is on the other end of the link.

POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT

Use for meshed Frame Relay PVCs. A neighbor list of each router must be speci-

fied.

PRIORITY

Sets the priority of this interface. Priorities range from 0-255. Used in multi-access

networks, this field is used in the designated router election algorithm. The value 0

signifies that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this particu-

lar network. In the event of a tie in this value, routers will use the lowest Router ID as

a tie breaker.

NEIGHBORS

Displays a list of up to ten neighbor’s IP addresses used to communicate when

TYPE = NBMA or TYPE = POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 151 of 234

»» PROXY ARP

Enables or disables Proxy ARP on this interface. Allows the network portion of a group of

addresses to be shared among several physical network segments. When ENABLED, and an

ARP (address resolution protocol) request is received on the Ethernet port, the address is

looked-up in the IP routing table. If the forwarding port is not on the Ethernet port and the

route is not the default route, the router answers the request with its own hardware address.

When DISABLED (default), the router only responds to ARP request received for its own

address.

The ARP protocol itself provides a way for devices to create a mapping between physical (i.e.,

Ethernet) addresses and logical IP addresses. PROXY ARP uses the mapping feature by

instructing a router to answer ARP requests as a “proxy” for the IP addresses behind one of its

ports. The device which sent the ARP request then correctly assumes that it can reach the

requested IP address by sending packets to the physical address that was returned. This tech-

nique effectively hides the fact that a network has been (further) subnetted.

»G

LOBAL

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

Provides a way to configure various settings for the Ethernet port. The following menus are available

for review and editing:

»» DEFAULT GATEWAY

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines or changes the default gateway. Enter the default gateway address by entering a deci-

mal number into the appropriate field and then pressing <Enter> to move to the next field. You

will need a default gateway if the LAN contains multiple segments. This address is composed

of four decimal numbers, each in the range of 0 to 255, separated by periods. This value is set

to 0.0.0.0 by default. Contact your LAN administrator for the appropriate address.

»» DEFAULT METRIC

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the default gateway metric. Enter the default gateway metric by pressing <Enter> and

entering a decimal number.

»» DEFAULT GATEWAY COST

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Defines the default gateway cost. Enter the default gateway metric by pressing <Enter> and

entering a decimal number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 152 of 234

»P

ING

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Allows you to send pings (ICMP requests) to devices accessible via the network.

»» IP ADDRESS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Specifies the IP address to ping.

»» COUNT

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Specifies the number of pings to send. The maximum value is 99.

»» SIZE

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Specifies the size in bytes of the data portion of the ping request. The default value is 64 bytes,

and the maximum size is 1024 bytes.

»» TIMEOUT

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Specifies the time in milliseconds to wait for the ping reply before timing out. The default tim-

eout is three seconds, and the maximum timeout value is ten seconds.

»» ROUND TRIP MIN

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Displays the minimum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the cur-rent set of pings.

»» ROUND TRIP AVG

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Displays the average round trip time of the ping request/reply of the cur-rent set of pings.

»» ROUND TRIP MAX

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Displays the maximum round trip time of the ping request/reply of the cur-rent set of pings.

»» TX STATS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Displays the number of ping requests transmitted (n txed), the number of ping replies received

(n rxed) and the number of ping requests that were lost (n lost).

Only one ping session can be active at a time.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 153 of 234

»» RESET STATS

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

Resets all ping statistics to zero. If the ping client is active, this menu will stop it.

»» START/STOP

Write Security: 2; Read Security: 2

If the ping client is currently idle, this menu sends pings to the specified address. If the ping

client is active, the menu stops sending pings.

»T

ELNET CLIENT

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

Allows a user to open a Telnet session to any device listed in the ATLAS 890 route table.

»» ADDRESS

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

Defines the IP address assigned to the remote unit you are trying to connect to.

»» ESCAPE CHAR

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

Defines the Telnet client escape character. Typing the combination characters will close the

active telnet session to the remote unit specified in the ADDRESS field.

»» PORT

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

Defines the port used in the remote login session. Default (for Telnet) is 23.

»» CONNECT

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

Activator used to start a Telnet session to the remote unit configured in the ADDRESS field.

»S

TATISTICS

Write security: 2; Read security: 2

This section describes the following STATISTICS submenus:

•IP (see Table 2 on page 154)

•ICMP (see Table 3 on page 156)

•TCP (see Table 4 on page 157)

Option Keystroke

^ ] <Ctrl> + ]

^ \ <Ctrl> + \

^ [ <Ctrl> + [

^ ^ <Ctrl> + <Shift> + 6

^ _ <Ctrl> + <Shift> + -

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 154 of 234

•UDP (see Table 5 on page 158)

•IP FAST CACHE (see Table 6 on page 159)

All of these statistics are taken from the MIB-II variables in RFC 1156. To clear the accumulated sta-

tistics, press the Enter key on CLEAR.

Table 2. IP Statistics

Name Description

FORWARDING The indication of whether this ATLAS 890 is acting as an IP gateway in

respect to the forwarding of datagrams received by, but not addressed to, this

ATLAS 890. IP gateways forward datagrams; hosts do not (except those

Source-Routed via the host).

DEFAULT TTL The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of

datagrams originated at this ATLAS 890, whenever a TTL value is not sup-

plied by the transport layer protocol.

INRECEIVES The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including

those received in error.

INHDRERRORS The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers,

including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors,

time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, etc.

INADDRERRORS The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP

header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this

ATLAS 890. This count includes invalid addresses (e.g., 0.0.0.0) and

addresses of unsupported Classes (e.g., Class E). For entities which are not IP

Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes data-

grams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.

FORWDATAGRAMS The number of input datagrams for which this ATLAS 890 was not their final

IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to for-

ward them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gate-

ways, this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed

via this ATLAS 890, and the Source-Route option processing was successful.

INUNKNOWNPROTOS The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but dis-

carded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

INDISCARDS The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered

to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (e.g. for lack

of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams dis-

carded while awaiting re-assembly.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 155 of 234

INDELIVERS The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-proto-

cols (including ICMP).

OUTREQUESTS The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does

not include any datagrams counted in FORWDATAGRAMS.

OUTDISCARDS The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to

prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded

(e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include data-

grams counted in FORWDATAGRAMS if any such packets met this (discre-

tionary) discard criterion.

OUTNOROUTES The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to

transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter includes any packets

counted in FORWDATAGRAMS which meet this “no-route” criterion. Note

also that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of

its default gateways are down.

REASMTIMEOUT The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while

they are awaiting reassembly at this ATLAS 890.

REASMREQDS The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this

ATLAS 890.

REASMOKSThe number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

REASMFAILS The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for what-

ever reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Note that this is not necessarily a count

of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably RFC 815s) can

lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are

received.

FRAGOKSThe number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this

ATLAS 890.

FRAGFAILS The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to

be fragmented at this ATLAS 890 but could not be, e.g., because their “Don't

Fragment” flag was set.

FRAGCREATES The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of

fragmentation at this ATLAS 890.

CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 2. IP Statistics (Continued)

Name Description

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 156 of 234

Table 3. ICMP Statistics

Name Description

INMSGS The total number of ICMP messages which the ATLAS 890 received. Note

that this counter includes all those counted by INERRORS.

INERRORS The number of ICMP messages which the ATLAS 890 received but deter-

mined as having errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, etc.)

INDESTUNREACHS The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

INTIMEEXCDS The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

INPARMPROBS The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

INSRCQUENCHS The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.

INREDIRECTS The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

INECHOS The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

INECHOREPS The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

INTIMESTAMPS The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.

INTIMESTAMPREPS The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.

INADDRMASKS The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.

INADDRMASKREPS The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.

OUTMSGS The total number of ICMP messages which this ATLAS 890 attempted to

send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by ICMPOUTERRORS.

OUTERRORS The number of ICMP messages which this ATLAS 890 did not send due to

problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value

should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the

inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations

there may be no types of error which contribute to this counter's value.

OUTDESTUNREACHS The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

OUTTIMEEXCDS The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

OUTPARMPROBS The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

OUTSRCQUENCHS The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.

OUTREDIRECTS The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 157 of 234

OUTECHOS The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

OUTECHOREPS The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

OUTTIMESTAMPS The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.

OUTTIMESTAMPREPS The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.

OUTADDRMASKS The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.

OUTADDRMASKREPS The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.

CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 4. TCP Statistics

Name Description

RTOALGORITHM The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting

unacknowledged octets.

RTOMIN The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmis-

sion timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of

this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission tim-

eout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type

has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.

RTOMAX The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmis-

sion timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of

this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission tim-

eout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type

has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.

MAXCONN The limit on the total number of TCP connections the ATLAS 890 can sup-

port. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic, this

object should contain the value -1.

ACTIVEOPENS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the

SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.

PASSIVEOPENS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the

SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.

Table 3. ICMP Statistics (Continued)

Name Description

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 158 of 234

ATTEMPTFAILS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the

CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state,

plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the

LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.

ESTABRESETS The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the

CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT

state.

CURRESTAB The number of TCP connections for which the current state is either ESTAB-

LISHED or CLOSE-WAIT.

INSEGS The total number of segments received, including those received in error. This

count includes segments received on currently established connections.

OUTSEGS The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but

excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.

RETRANSSEGS The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP seg-

ments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.

CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 5. UDP Statistics

Name Description

INDATAGRAMS The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.

NOPORTS The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no applica-

tion at the destination port.

INERRORS The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for rea-

sons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.

OUTDATAGRAMS The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this ATLAS 890.

CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics.

Table 4. TCP Statistics (Continued)

Name Description

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 159 of 234

»» CLEAR

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Clears current statistics in the IP, ICMP, TCP, UDP, and IP Fast Cache statistics tables.

» UDP RELAY

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Allows the router to act as a relay agent for UDP (User Datagram Protocol) broadcast packets. Nor-

mally, a router will not forward UDP broadcast packets. However, many network applications use

UDP broadcasts to configure addresses, host names, and other information. If hosts using these proto-

cols are not on the same network segment as the servers providing the information, the client programs

will not receive a response without enabling the UDP relay agent.

»» ENABLE

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Enables/disables the router to act as a relay agent.

»» RELAY TABLE

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Lists up to four relay destination servers (RELAY TABLE 0 - 3). Each server can be configured

using the following menus: ENABLE, IP, and UDP.

ENABLE

Enables/disables this field. Select either STANDARD or SPECIFIED. (DISABLE is not

used.)

STANDARD (default)

Relays any of the following standard UDP protocols: DHCP, TFTP, DNS, NTP (Net-

work Time Protocol, port 123), NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server, port 137), NBDG

(Net BIOS Datagram, port 138), and BootP.

SPECIFIED

Specifies the UDP port (1 to 65,535) in the UDP Port columns (maximum of three per

server).

Table 6. IP Fast Cache Statistics

Name Description

HITS Total number of times the ATLAS 890 went into the Fast Cache and success-

fully retrieved an IP address.

MISSES Total number of times the ATLAS 890 went into the Fast Cache and failed to

retrieve an IP address.

CLEAR Clears the accumulated statistics.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 160 of 234

»» IP

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Defines the IP address of the server that receives the relay packet.

»» UDP PORTS 1 - 3

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Specifies the UDP ports to relay. These fields are active only when ENABLE is set to SPECI-

FIED.

» OSPF GLOBAL

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Sets global OSPF parameters.

»» ROUTER ID

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Uniquely identifies the router in the Autonomous System with a 32-bit integer. (Although this

32-bit integer appears in the form of an IP address, it is not an IP address.) By convention and

to ensure uniqueness, this value should be one of the router's IP interface addresses. By

default, the Ethernet port’s IP address is used.

»» AREA

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

OSPF uses areas to divide large networks into different areas to allow a two-level hierarchical

routing scheme. This scheme helps reduce the size of the router’s routing table and the link-

state database table. The link-state database table lists each unique AREA ID that was defined

in the INTERFACES OSPF submenu (see Area ID on page 148). The interface AREA ID must

be defined before it can appear in the table; areas cannot be inserted into this table. If an area

entry is deleted here, the interface’s area ID is changed to 0.0.0.0, which is the backbone area.

AREA ID

Uniquely identifies the router in the Autonomous System with a 32-bit integer.

Although this 32-bit integer appears in the form of an IP address, it is not an IP

address. For example, an Area ID of 0.0.0.0 identifies the OSPF backbone.

RANGES

Describes those Address Range Summaries that are configured to propagate from an

area to reduce the amount of information about it which is known beyond its borders.

Up to 10 ranges per area may be defined.

STATUS

Displays subnets subsumed by ranges that either trigger the advertisement of the

indicated summary or result in the subnet not being advertised at all–outside the

area.

ADVERTISE Advertises the summary or result.

DON’T ADVERTISE Does not advertise the summary or result.

DISABLED Removes the range completely.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 161 of 234

NETWORK

Identifies the IP Address of the Net or Subnet indicated by the range.

SUBNET MASK

Identifies the Netmask that pertains to the Net or Subnet.

STUB

Defines stub areas to conserve router memory. Autonomous Systems’ external Link

State Advertisements (LSAs) are not flooded into a stub area. The only way out of a

stub area is through the Area Border Router (ABR). (See External LSA Overflow on

page 164 for a definition of LSA.)

ACTIVE

Defines the area as a stub, when set to ON.

NSSA

A Not-So-Stubby-Area uses link-state type 7 advertisements to convey external

route information obtained from any Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR)

in the stub. As an Area Border Router (ABR), the router translates type 7 to

type 5.

DEFAULT COST

As an ABR for a stub area, the router advertises the default route into the stub area

with this cost.

FILTER INTER-AREA SUMMARIES

When set to ON, only intra-area routes are learned inside the stub area. If the

router is the ABR, it advertises the default route into the stub area for all non-

intra-area routes. This is sometimes referred to as Totally Stubby Areas.

VIRTUAL LINK

All non-backbone areas must connect to the backbone area and all routing information

must flow through the backbone. Virtual links are used in OSPF to “tunnel” routing

information through non backbone areas to allow a simple hub-and-spoke organiza-

tion.

MODE

When set to ON, the router attempts to create a virtual link to the specified router

identified by its router ID.

Backbone areas (areas with ID 0.0.0.0) cannot be defined as a stub.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 162 of 234

ROUTER ID

Defines the router ID of the router that is to act as the other end of this virtual link.

AUTHEN METHOD

Enables authentication for this virtual link at two levels: SIMPLE and MD5:

HELLO TIME

The number of seconds of the intervals between the Hello packets that the router

sends over the virtual link. This value must be the same for all routers attached to

a common network.

DEAD TIME

The number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before the

router declares the virtual link down. This value should be some multiple of the

Hello interval, and must be the same for the router on the other end of the virtual

link.

RETRANSMISSION INTERVAL

The number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions for this

virtual link. This value is also used when retransmitting database description and

link-state request packets.

TRANSMIT DELAY

The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state update packet

over this virtual link.

NONE Performs no authentication.

SIMPLE Transmits a clear text password in the OSPF hello

packets.

MD5 Selects MD5 as the hashing algorithm that exchanges

keys (passwords) between OSPF routers. Instead of

exchanging the key over the link, the router builds a mes-

sage digest based on the key, the key ID, and the packet.

PASSWORD/

KEY

This menu is available when AUTHEN METHOD = SIMPLE

or AUTHEN METHOD = MD5. This item doubles as a

password (maximum of 8 characters) when simple

authentication is used or as a key (maximum of 16 charac-

ters) when MD5 is used. The password/key is used to

authenticate ourselves and to check the authentication of

the router on the other end of the virtual link.

KEY ID Associates a particular key to an ID. This is necessary

when changing key's in a multi-router system.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 163 of 234

»» DELAY TIME

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

The time between when OSPF receives a topology change and when it starts a shortest path

first (SPF) calculation.

»» HOLD TIME

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

The minimum time between two consecutive SPF calculations.

»» AUTO V-LINK

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

All non-backbone areas must be adjacent to the backbone. Areas not adjacent to the backbone

must create a virtual link through another area to the backbone. When ENABLED, virtual links

are automatically created by the router in ABR mode if it detects an area which is not adjacent

to the backbone.

»» REDISTRIBUTION

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Conveys information from one Autonomous System to another (OSPF and RIP) when they are

operating simultaneously on the router.

RIP-TO-OSPF

RIP routing updates are translated into OSPF external link-state advertisements (LSA)

using the values defined here.

MODE

Redistributes RIP into OSPF, when set to ON.

EXTERNAL TYPE

OSPF defines two external types:

EXTERNAL COST

Shows the cost assigned to all RIP routes learned when being advertised as an

external LSA.

OSPF-TO-RIP

Translates OSPF routing updates into RIP advertisements using the values defined

here:

MODE

When set to ON, the router redistributes OSPF into RIP.

TYPE 1 Cost metrics are comparable to the state link metrics.

TYPE 2 Cost metrics are assumed to be larger than the cost of any

intra-AS path.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 164 of 234

INTRA-AREA METRIC

OSPF intra-area routes are advertised out RIP using this value as the metric or

router hops.

INTER-AREA METRIC

OSPF inter-area routes are advertised out RIP using this value as the metric or

router hops.

EXTERNAL TYPE METRIC

OSPF external types 1 and 2 are advertised out RIP using this value as the metric

or router hops.

STATIC-TO-OSPF

Static routes defined under the STATIC ROUTES menu (see Static Routes on page 142)

can be advertised out OSPF using the values defined here:

MODE

When set to ON, the router advertises the static routes as external LSAs.

EXTERNAL TYPE

Defines two external types:

»» INTERNAL

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Contains the configuration and status information for database overflow.

EXTERNAL LSA OVERFLOW

When the number of non-default external LSAs reaches this value, the router enters

Overflow state. In this state, all locally generated external LSAs are flushed during the

overflow interval and all new external LSAs which push the total past this limit are

not installed or acknowledged. This limit value MUST be set identically in all routers

attached to the OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area. (i.e., OSPF stub areas

and NSSAs are excluded).

OVERFLOW INTERVAL (SECS)

The number of seconds that the router will remain in the overflow state. During this

state, the router will regenerate local non-default external LSAs. When set to 0, the

router will not leave overflow state until restarted.

OVERFLOW STATE

Displays the current overflow state. The selections are ACTIVE and NOT ACTIVE.

TOTAL LSA ENTRIES

The number of LSA entries registered and acknowledged in the LSA database.

TYPE 1 Cost metrics are comparable to the state link metrics.

TYPE 2 Cost metrics are assumed to be larger than the cost of any

intra-AS path.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 165 of 234

DATABASE MEMORY ALLOCATED (BYTES)

The total memory allocated to hold the current LSA database. This is only the memory

of the database itself and does not include the memory used for other OSPF informa-

tion (i.e. neighbor, area, or interface data).

TOTAL ROUTE ENTRIES

The total number of route entries registered and acknowledged in the forwarding

table.

»» DATABASE

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Displays information that the router keeps in a database of all LSAs it has created or has

learned from other routers.

AREA ID

Displays the area to which this LSA entry belongs. This field is not visible when the

LSA is an external type LSA.

LINK ID

Displays the LSA type-specific field containing either a Router ID or an IP Address.

This field identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the

advertisement.

ROUTER ID

Displays the router ID of the router who has originated the LSA.

TYPE

Displays the LSA type. The following types are possible:

ROUTER An advertised router which may be an Area Border Router,

Autonomous System Boundary Router, or Virtual Link

Router signified as (ABR), (ASBR), or (Virtual) respectively.

NETWORK Advertised intra-area network.

SUMMARY NET Summary of multiple inter-area networks

SUMMARY AS Summary of autonomous system networks.

AS EXTERNAL Autonomous system external networks.

MULTICAST

GROUP

Multicast group LSA. This is not currently supported.

NSSA EXTERNAL External Not-So-Stubby-Area networks.

AREA/GLOBAL

OPAQUE

Type 5/7 external networks.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 166 of 234

AGE (SEC.)

The age of this LSA in seconds.

SEQUENCE NO.

The sequence number detects old and duplicate link state advertisements (LSAs). The

space of sequence numbers is linearly ordered. The larger the sequence number, the

more recent the advertisement.

CHECKSUM

This is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the age

field. The age field is not included, so that an advertisement's age can be incremented

without updating the checksum.

»» NEIGHBORS

Write Security: 2; Read security: 2

Contains a list of all the neighbors discovered. The router forms adjacencies with other OSPF

routers on a network; these routers are known as neighbors.

ROUTER ID

Displays the router ID of the neighbor.

PRIORITY

Shows the priority of the selected neighbor.

STATE

Displays the state of the neighbor. The possible states are as follows:

DOWN Indicates no communication has been established.

INIT Indicates a hello packet has been transmitted to the neighbor.

2WAY Indicates a hello packet has been received from the neighbor.

EXCHANGE Exchanges database packet information with this neighbor.

FULL Indicates that an adjacency with this neighbor has been accom-

plished and a router designation has been established. Designated

router, backup designated router, or non-designated router may

appear as /DR, /BDR, or /DROther, respectively. DROther repre-

sents routers which are on point-to-point links such as PPP or non-

meshed Frame Relay.

UP Indicates that an adjacency to a neighbor over a virtual link is

established.

DOWN Indicates that an adjacency to a neighbor over a virtual link has

not been established.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 167 of 234

DEAD TIME

Displays the number of seconds to elapse before the neighbor is considered to be

down.

ADDRESS

Shows the IP address associated with the neighbor.

INTERFACE

Shows the interface to which the neighbor is connected.

> DEDICATED MAPS

The DEDICATED MAPS menu assigns dedicated connections between any two ports in the ATLAS 890

Base Unit. This section describes the DEDICATED MAPS menu items (see Figure 15). These options are

module-dependent; that is, the menu items available depend on the module selected.

Figure 15. Dedicated Maps Menu

»A

CTIVATE MAP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Activates a dedicated map—automatically or manually. You can have up to five different dedicated

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 168 of 234

maps, each with an optionally specified name. The configuration choices are:

»C

URRENT MAP

Read security: 5

Displays the name of the currently active dedicated map (read-only).

»C

REATE/EDIT MAPS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Creates new maps and defines settings, as well as edits existing maps. To add a new map, position the

cursor in the index column and press <I>. ATLAS 890 automatically names the maps in the sequence

in which they are created. You can change the names with MAP NAME.

»» #

Displays the index number of the available maps.

»» MAP NAME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Displays the name of the dedicated map. The name can contain up to 57 alpha-numeric charac-

ters, including spaces and special characters. To edit the name, press <Enter> and type in the

new name.

»» SORT TO/FROM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies sort order based on the end points set in CONNECTS/FROM CONFIG and CONNECTS/

TOCONFIG. You can also turn OFF this option. The sort feature is helpful when you are

attempting to find a particular connection in a large connection list.

»» CONNECTS

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

AUTO Automatically activates a particular dedicated map at the time

and day specified in the ACTIVATE TIME field.

MAPS 1 THROUGH 5 Allows you to manually activate a specific dedicated map. To

manually activate a dedicated map, highlight the ACTIVATE

MAP field and press <Enter>. Choose the desired dedicated

map from the popup menu list.

Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules

selected in the FROM or TO fields. For more information on these submenus, refer to the

individual module discussions in this section.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 169 of 234

FROM SLT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the slot to use for the FROM connection. When you select this option, a list

of all of the slots and the modules installed in the slots displays. Select the appropriate

slot and press <Enter>.

PORT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the port to use for the FROM connection. When you select this option, a list

of ports and module types appears. Select the appropriate port and module type, and

press <Enter>.

TO SLOT/SERVICE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the slot to use for the second end of a connection. Select this option, and a

list of all of the slots and the modules installed in the slots displays. Pick the appropri-

ate slot and press <Enter>. A PKTENDPT or PKTVOICE endpoint may also be selected

as the service for the connection.

PORT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the port to use for the second end of a connection. When you select this

option, a list of ports and module types appears. Select the appropriate port and mod-

ule type, and press <Enter>. If a PKTENDPT or PKTVOICE endpoint is selected for the

TO SLOT/SERVICE field, the available packet endpoints or packet voice endpoints will

display in the drop down menu after pressing <Enter>.

FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection. The selections displayed in this

field are based on the type of module selected in the FROM SLT option. For detailed

information on submenus for a particular module type, please refer to the DEDICATED

MAPS menu discussion for the appropriate network, option, or resource module.

TO CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO connection. The selections displayed in this

field are based on the type of module selected in the TOSLT option. For detailed

information on submenus for a particular module type, please refer to the DEDICATED

MAPS menu discussion for the appropriate network, option, or resource module.

You must return to DEDICATED MAPS in the MAIN MENU for changes to take effect.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 170 of 234

SIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies whether the ATLAS 890 uses active RBS on the connection. Selecting ON

allows the ATLAS 890 to preserve signaling bits between the two endpoints of the

connection. Selecting OFF ignores the signaling bits of the connection. This selection

is automatically set to OFF when RBS does not apply. For example, a T1-to-Nx con-

nection is set to OFF.

»» ACTIVATE TIME

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets the time when the map becomes active if you have selected AUTO in the ACTIVATE MAP

field. Enter this time in hh:mm:ss 24-hour format.

»» ENBL DAY

Security level: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies which days of the week the map is active.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (QUAD T1/PRI OPTION MODULE)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections

may apply to the Quad T1/PRI Option Module, depending on the application:

DS0 SELECTION

Defines DS0s for a T1 port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this connection.

You can enter the DS0s in several ways. For example, to enter DS0s one through

five, enter 1-5. For DS0s one and five, enter 1,5.

DS0 AVAILABLE

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 are assigned. DS0 assignment is based on the fol-

lowing items:

DIGIT 0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last

digit of the DS0 number.

This DS0 has been requested for this connection, but the DS0 is not yet acti-

vated for this port.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 171 of 234

This DS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connec-

tion.

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this con-

nection.

DS0 RATE

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps. This field is only valid for T1 ports

mapped to a PKT ENDPNT.

T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE

Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing DS0s which

are cross-connected to a T1 port experiencing alarms.

The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2.5 second transmission (indicating

call termination), followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final condi-

tion as chosen by the user. This selection is only valid for T1 ports having RBS

set to ON.

This option defines to ATLAS 890 the type of signaling being used on the trunk:

E&M, LS/GS NETWORK or USER, SW56, or CUSTOM.

T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING STATE

Defines the final fault signaling state:

IDLE

Used for one-way trunks; that is, for outgoing or incoming calls only – not

both.

SEIZED

Used for two-way trunks. Prevents connected equipment from attempting to

use a failed trunk for an outgoing call.

T1 FAULT SIGNALING

Displays the final fault signaling state of the AB bits. This field is read-only

unless CUSTOM is chosen for the T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE option.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 172 of 234

T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE

Displays the Hex value of the 2.5 second pre-alarm transmission.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (QUAD E1/PRA OPTION MODULE)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections

may apply to the Quad E1/PRA Option Module, depending on the application:

TS0 SELECTION

Defines TS0s for an E1 port. Use this field to define the TS0s for this connection.

You can enter the TS0s in several ways. For example, to enter TS0s one through

five, enter 1-5. For TS0s one and five, enter 1,5.

TS0 AVAILABLE

Indicates which TS0s of the E1 are assigned. TS0 assignment is based on the fol-

lowing items:

DIGIT 0-9

This TS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last

digit of the TS0 number.

This TS0 has been requested for this connection, but the TS0 is not yet acti-

vated for this port.

This TS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

This TS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

This TS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connec-

tion.

This TS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

This TS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this con-

nection.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 173 of 234

TS0 RATE

Sets the TS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps. This field is only valid for E1 ports

mapped to a PKT ENDPNT.

E1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE

Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing TS0s which

are cross-connected to a E1 port experiencing alarms.

The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2.5 second transmission (indicating

call termination), followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final condi-

tion as chosen by the user. Set the E1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE field to OFF or

VOICE.

T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE

Displays the Hex value of the 2.5 second pre-alarm transmission.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (QUAD Nx 56/64 OPTION MODULE)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection. The following selections may

apply to the Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module, depending on the application:

DS0 SELECTION

Defines DS0s for an Nx port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this connection.

This field only applies to Nx-to-Nx or Nx-to-Pkt Endpt connections.

DS0 RATE

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (QUAD USSI OPTION MODULE)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the FROM connection. The following selections may

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 174 of 234

apply to the Quad USSI Option Module, depending on the application:

DS0 SELECTION

Defines DS0s for an USSI port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this connec-

tion. This field only applies to USSI-to-USSI, USSI-to-Nx or USSI-to-Pkt Endpt

connections.

DS0 RATE

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (OCTAL BRI OPTION MODULE)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections

may apply to the Octal BRI Option Module, depending on the application:

DS0 SELECTION

Defines DS0s for an BRI port. Use this field to define the DS0s for this connec-

tion. This field only applies to BRI-to-BRI, BRI-to-USSI, BRI-to-Nx or

BRI-to-Pkt Endpt connections.

DS0 RATE

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps.

NT/LT

Configures the BRI U interface to be network termination or line termination.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (T3 AND T3 WITH DROP AND INSERT OPTION MODULES)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections

may apply to the T3 or T3 with Drop and Insert Option Module, depending on the

application:

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 175 of 234

DS0 SELECTION

Defines DS0s for a specific T1 in the T3 circuit. Use this field to define the DS0s

for this connection. You can enter the DS0s in several ways. For example, to enter

DS0s one through five, enter 1-5. For DS0s one and five, enter 1,5.

DS0 AVAILABLE

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 are assigned. DS0 assignment is based on the fol-

lowing items:

DIGIT 0-9

This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents the last

digit of the DS0 number.

This DS0 has been requested for this connection, but the DS0 is not yet acti-

vated for this port.

This DS0 is used by this port in this connection and is currently activated.

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN.

This DS0 is used in the switched DIAL PLAN and conflicts with this connec-

tion.

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP.

This DS0 is already used in this DEDICATED MAP and conflicts with this con-

nection.

DS0 RATE

Sets the DS0 rate to either 56 or 64 kbps. This field is only valid for T1s mapped

to a PKT ENDPNT.

T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE

Sets known values in the signaling bits and the data field for outgoing DS0s which

are cross-connected to a T1 port experiencing alarms.

The trunk conditioning process consists of a 2.5 second transmission (indicating

call termination), followed by a continuous transmission signaling the final condi-

tion as chosen by the user. This selection is only valid for T1 ports having RBS

set to ON.

This option defines to ATLAS 890 the type of signaling being used on the trunk:

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 176 of 234

E&M, LS/GS NETWORK or USER, SW56, or CUSTOM.

T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING STATE

Defines the final fault signaling state.

IDLE

Used for one-way trunks; that is, for outgoing or incoming calls only – not

both.

SEIZED

Used for two-way trunks. Prevents connected equipment from attempting to

use a failed trunk for an outgoing call.

T1 FAULT SIGNALING

Displays the final fault signaling state of the AB bits. This field is read-only

unless CUSTOM is chosen for the T1 TRUNK CONDITIONING SERVICE option.

T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE

Displays the Hex value of the 2.5 second pre-alarm transmission.

T1 TROUBLE CODE SERVICE

When RBS signaling is off, the T1 alarm code will be transmitted on an alarm

event. The options to select are OFF, VOICE or DATA trouble code, or the CUS-

TOM data code that is configured in T1 TROUBLE CODE VALUE.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (PKT ENDPT CONNECTIONS)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

To assign a packet endpoint to a physical port, select the port in the FROM SLOT/PORT field

and configure the TO SLOT/PORT as follows:

TO SLOT/SERVICE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Select PKT ENDPNT to activate a list of available packet endpoints in the TO PORT

field.

TO PORT/PEP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Press <Enter> and select the appropriate packet endpoint to assign the endpoint to a

physical port.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 177 of 234

apply to the packet endpoint:

TRANSMIT IDLE CODE

Configures the ATLAS 890 to send idle code on the packet endpoint with marks

or flags.

RECEIVE IDLE CODE

Defines the idle code (either marks or flags) the ATLAS 890 should expect on the

selected packet endpoint.

> DEDICATED MAPS - (PACKET VOICE CONNECTIONS)

»» CONNECTS

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Enters the dedicated map connections. Press <Enter> to activate the submenus.

TO SLOT/SERVICE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Select PKT VOICE to activate a list of available packet endpoints in the TO PORT field.

TO PORT/PEP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Press <Enter> and select the appropriate packet endpoint from the drop-down list.

TO/FROM CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration for the TO/FROM connection. The following selections

apply to the PKT VOICE connections:

DLCI

Press <Enter> and select the appropriate DLCI from the drop-down list.

VOICE PORT

Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit. Express units support ports 1

and 2. A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255.

CONFLICT REPORT

Describes existing conflicts. Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or

Voice port already in use.

VOICE COMPRESSION

Configures the compression algorithm used on the selected packet voice endpoint.

Older FSUs use G.723.1 at 6.3kbps, and newer FSUs use 6.4K Netcoder. The

compression algorithm must match at both endpoints.

SILENCE SUPPRESSION

Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 178 of 234

frames containing a special silence code during periods of silence. Both endpoints

must agree to use silence suppression. By default, silence suppression is

ENABLED to prohibit silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total

system bandwidth.

SIGNALING

Signaling method on the packet voice endpoint. Both endpoints must agree about

the compression algorithm choice.

> CIRCUIT STATUS

The CIRCUIT STATUS menu allows the user to view the status of all circuits configured for dedicated

circuit backup (see Figure 15).

Figure 16. Circuit Status Menu

»F

ROM

Read security: 5

Indicates the slot, port, and name of the endpoint configured for backup.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 179 of 234

» MAN (MANUAL BACKUP)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This activator forces a link in/out of backup.

» BKUP STATUS (BACKUP STATUS)

Read security: 5

The displayed string indicates the current status of the dedicated line. The following selections are

available for the BACKUP STATUS menu item.

Backup was forced through the interface menu.

Restoral was forced through the interface menu.

PRIMARY

The link is active.

DIALING

Attempting to dial the backup link.

BACKUP FAILED

Exceeded MAX NUM REDIALS.

RETRY DIAL [NUM]

Will retry backup dialing in [num] seconds.

PRIMARY DOWN

The link is in error and waiting on backup.

ANSWERING

The link is answering a backup endpoint.

BACKUP

The link is in backup.

»L

INE STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the overall status of the connection. The following selections are available for the LINE

STATUS menu item.

UNKNOWN

Endpoints do not support (or are not configured) for monitoring.

ACTIVE

The connection is up and running.

FB Force Backup

FR Force Restoral

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 180 of 234

INACTIVE

The connection is down due to configuration (i.e., DTR is down).

DATA ALARM

The FROM endpoint is in data alarm.

NETWORK ALARM

The TO endpoint is in network alarm.

NET/DATA ALARM

Both the FROM endpoint and the TO endpoint are in alarm.

DATA UNKNOWN

The status of the FROM endpoint is unknown.

»D

ELAY

When present, this indicates that one ATLAS 890 has detected a change in state and is counting down

to delay/restoral.

»T

EST

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Contains a test activator and test status displays for dedicated dial backup circuits.

»» LAST RUN TIME

Read security: 5

Displays the date and time of the last test call made through this dedicated dial backup circuit.

(Not seen until circuit is tested.)

»» NEXT RUN TIME

Read security: 5

Displays the date and time of the next schedule test call to be made through this dedicated dial

backup circuit. (Not seen unless TEST CALL is configured for something other than manual in

the INTERFACE CONFIG for the CIRCUIT BACKUP ENDPOINT.)

»» LAST TEST STATUS

Read security: 5

Displays the status of the last test call made through this dedicated dial backup circuit. The fol-

lowing status messages may display:

IDLE No current test call on this dedicated dial backup circuit

PASSED Passed last manual or scheduled test

FAILED Failed last manual or scheduled test

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 181 of 234

»» PASS : FAIL

Read security: 5

Displays the number of successful and unsuccessful test calls made through this dedicated dial

backup circuit.

»» TEST NOW

Write security: 5; Read security: 5

Press to initiate a test call on the dedicated dial backup circuit.

> DIAL PLAN

The DIAL PLAN submenus set global ATLAS 890 switch parameters as well as individual parameters for

each ATLAS 890 port handling a switched call (see Figure 16). The individual ports are separated into two

port types: network and user. Network ports terminate a connection from the network. User ports terminate

incoming calls and, in turn may be connected to user equipment.

Figure 17. Dial Plan Menu

»N

ETWORK TERM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a connection from the

network.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 182 of 234

»» SLOT/SVC

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the ATLAS 890 slot or service that terminates a network connection.

»» PORT/PEP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the ATLAS 890 port or packet endpoint that terminates a network connection.

»» SIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the type of signaling being used for this connection (endpoint). Select RBS for a T1

using Robbed Bit Signaling or PRI for a Primary Rate ISDN interface. Select NFAS for a

non-facility associated signalling interface or NONE for OSC when bonding DS0s. This selec-

tion is only necessary if a T1/PRI is selected as the SLOT/PORT type.

»» OUT#ACCEPT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the parameters for the outgoing calls that ATLAS 890 sends to the network.

SRC ID

Identifies the call source ID from which this endpoint accepts calls. This field simpli-

fies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to

a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call. SRC ID may be

entered with the usual wild card entries (except $).

In applications where two ATLAS 890 units are used in a point-to-point configuration, a

port in the ATLAS 890 at one end would act as the network (user termination), while the

ATLAS 890 at the opposite end would be terminating a network connection (network ter-

mination).

There may be more than one “endpoint” associated with a particular port. If a T1 is con-

nected to the PSTN, some DS0s may be used for long distance, while others are used for

local calls. These would constitute two “endpoints” (trunks) over a single physical port.

One HDLC resource is used by each PRI or each Packet Endpoint.

X= Any digit 0 through 9

[1,3,5] =Any of these digits

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 183 of 234

The default ID for all source endpoints all accept numbers is 0. This results in all calls

being routed based on the dialed number.

ACCEPT NUMBER

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Designates which numbers this endpoint passes on toward the network. The accept list

may consist of multiple entries. The numbers are defined using the following “wild

cards”:

Example:

1-800-$ only permits toll-free, long distance calls to 1-800. If this were used, then a

second accept number would need to be specified (NXX-XXXX) permitting local

numbers to be dialed.

Instructs ATLAS 890 in which order to search for an accept number match. Normally,

all searches are set to primary. The secondary search selection forces ATLAS 890 to

only accept a call at this endpoint if all primary endpoints are unavailable.

PRIMARY SEARCH

All long distance calls should go out a PRI directly to an IXC (MCI, ATT, etc.),

and local calls should go out a T1 to the LEC. It may be desirable to place long

distance calls on the local exchange if all of the IXC trunks are unavailable (busy

or in alarm). In this case, the primary accept number for the local exchange would

be N$, and the secondary accept would be 1$.

SECONDARY SEARCH

The same accept rules apply for all secondary number searches as for primary

searches.

0=Default value

X= Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

$=Any number of digits of any value

9= This specific number

[1,2,3...] =A single digit in this group

Any specific entry takes precedence over a wild card. For example, if endpoint A was

designated as $ while endpoint B accepted 963-800X, then an incoming call to 963-800X

would only be accepted by endpoint B.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 184 of 234

DATA 64K, DATA 56K, AUDIO, SPEECH

Reflects the bearer capability the network has provisioned for this line. If the ISDN

lines were purchased with different services provisioned, then ATLAS 890 would

send the call out of the port which supports the type of service the call requires.

For example, the network termination is on a pair of BRIs (with the same phone num-

ber) with one provisioned for data and the other for voice. By enabling data in one and

not the other, ATLAS 890 ensures that calls bearing data will be sent out the right BRI

interface.

TREAT CALL AS

Allows the incoming call to be treated as the selected call type, regardless of the actual

incoming call type. The default selection, AS RECEIVED, effectively disables the fea-

ture by using the actual call type. Other options include DATA 64K and DATA 56K.

»» OUT#REJ

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines parameters for outgoing calls that ATLAS 890 will not send to the network.

REJECT NUMBER

Identifies which numbers this endpoint will not pass on toward the network. The reject

list may consist of multiple entries. The reject list may be used to more easily specify

the call filtering desired. The wildcards are identical as in OUT#ACCEPT (see

Out#Accept on page 182).

DATA 64K, DATA 56K, AUDIO, SPEECH

Rejects outgoing calls based on call type. For example, setting the reject number to $,

Digital 56/64 to ENABLED, and Audio and Speech to DISABLED will reject all digital

calls, but accept analog calls.

The reject list takes precedence over the accept list. For example, 1-900-$ rejects all 1-900

long distance calls, and 1-$ rejects all long distance calls.

This list may remain blank if the accept list meets desired filtering.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 185 of 234

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint. The selections displayed in this field

are based on the type of module selected in the SLOT/SVC option. For detailed information on

submenus for a particular module type, please refer to the dial plan interface configuration

menu discussion for the appropriate network, option, or resource module.

»» SUBST TEMPL

The substitution template allows the ATLAS 890 to select calls (based on telephone number)

and substitute a user-defined number for the received digits after the call has been processed

by the switchboard. Substitution templates are created for each entry in the Dial Plan.

ORIGINAL#

Designates the number(s) to be the search criteria for the substitution template. The

pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used as part of the number spec-

ification.

Example:

963-812[012] would be 963-8120 to 963-8122.

Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules

selected in the SLT/SVC or PRT/PEP fields. For more information on these submenus,

refer to the individual module interface configuration discussions in this section.

X= Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

$=Any number of digits of any value

9= This specific number

[1,2,3...] =A single digit in this group

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 186 of 234

SUBSTITUTED#

Designates the number to be substituted for the number(s) defined in the ORIGINAL#

field. The pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used as a part of the

number specification.

Punctuation characters ( ) - + are ignored and a comma is interpreted as a .5 second

pause in the dial string.

Example:

The ORIGINAL# field contains $ and the SUBSTITUTED# field contains ,256$. All

calls routed out this connection will be delayed .5 seconds and contain a 256 prefix.

»U

SER TERM

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

This menu allows you to define option parameters for ports which terminate a connection from user

equipment. In this case, ATLAS 890 is acting as the network.

»» SLOT/SVC

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the ATLAS 890 slot or service that terminates a user connection.

X= Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

$=Any number of digits of any value

9= This specific number

[1,2,3...] =A single digit in this group

Wildcards used in the SUBSTITUTED# field are only valid when used in the same position

(relative to the end of the digit string) as the ORIGINAL# field.

In applications where two ATLAS 890 units are used in a point-to-point configuration, a

port in the ATLAS 890 at one end would act as the network (user termination), while the

ATLAS 890 at the opposite end would be terminating a network connection (network ter-

mination).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 187 of 234

»» PORT/PEP

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Selects the ATLAS 890 port or packet endpoint that terminates a network connection.

»» SIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the type of signaling being used for this connection (endpoint). Select RBS for a T1

using robbed bit signaling or PRI for a Primary Rate ISDN interface. Select NFAS for a non-

facility associated signalling interface or NONE for OSC when bonding DS0s. This selection is

only necessary if a T1/PRI is selected as the SLOT/PORT type.

»» IN#ACCEPT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the parameters for the incoming calls that ATLAS 890 accepts from the network.

SRC ID

Identifies the call source ID from which this endpoint accepts calls. This field simpli-

fies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching calls to

a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call. SRC ID may be

entered with the usual wild card entries (except $).

The default ID for all source endpoints all accept numbers is 0. This results in all calls

being routed based on the dialed number.

ACCEPT NUMBER

Designates which numbers this endpoint will accept (terminate) from the network.

The accept list may consist of multiple entries. The numbers are defined using the fol-

There may be more than one “endpoint” associated with a particular port. If a T1 is con-

nected to the PSTN, some DS0s may be used for long distance, while others are used for

local calls. These would constitute two “endpoints” (trunks) over a single physical port.

One HDLC resource is used by each PRI or each Packet Endpoint.

X= Any digit 0 through 9

[1,3,5] =Any of these digits

0=Default value

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 188 of 234

lowing wildcards:

Example:

963-8000 would be a specific incoming number that would be accepted by this end-

point. If this endpoint consisted of a T1 with multiple DS0s, a “hunt” group for 963-

8000 would be formed. The entry $ would accept any call.

Instructs ATLAS 890 in which order to search for an accept number match. Normally,

all searches are set to primary. The secondary search selection forces ATLAS 890 to

only accept a call at this endpoint if all primary endpoints are unavailable.

PRIMARY SEARCH

All long distance calls should go out a PRI directly to an IXC (MCI, ATT, etc.),

and local calls should go out a T1 to the LEC. It may be desirable to place long

distance calls on the local exchange if all of the IXC trunks are unavailable (busy

or in alarm). In this case, the primary accept number for the local exchange would

be N$, and the secondary accept would be 1$.

SECONDARY SEARCH

The same accept rules apply for all secondary number searches as for primary

searches.

DATA 64K, DATA 56K, AUDIO, SPEECH

Reflects the bearer capability of the attached user equipment (typically a TA). If the

attached TA can only handle digital calls, then a voice call sent to this endpoint would

be rejected.

TREAT CALL AS

Allows the incoming call to be treated as the selected call type, regardless of the actual

X= Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

$=Any number of digits of any value

9= This specific number

[1,2,3...] =A single digit in this group

Any specific entry will take precedence over a wildcard. For example, if endpoint A was

designated as $ while endpoint B accepted 963-800X, then an incoming call to 963-800X

would only be accepted by endpoint B.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 189 of 234

incoming call type. The default selection, AS RECEIVED, effectively disables the fea-

ture by using the actual call type. Other options include DATA 64K and DATA 56K.

»» OUT#REJ

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Defines the parameters for the outgoing calls that ATLAS 890 will not send to the network.

REJECT NUMBER

Identifies which numbers this endpoint will not pass on toward the network. Use when

the outgoing call filter is different for different users sharing this endpoint. The wild-

cards are identical as in OUT#ACCEPT (see Out#Accept on page 182).

DATA 64K, DATA 56K, AUDIO, SPEECH

Rejects outgoing calls based on call type. For example, setting the reject number to $,

Digital 56/64 to ENABLED, and Audio and Speech to DISABLED, rejects all digital

calls while not rejecting analog calls.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.The selections displayed in this field

are based on the type of module selected in the SLOT/SVC option. For detailed information on

submenus for a particular module type, please refer to the dial plan interface configuration

menu discussion for the appropriate network, option, or resource module.

[0,1]-$ rejects all long distance calls, but only for this User termination. If permitted in the

Network termination endpoint, this user could not dial long distance numbers while other

users could.

This list may remain blank if the accept list meets desired filtering.

Some of the options available in this submenu change depending on the type of modules

selected in the SLOT/SVC or PORT/PEP fields. For more information on these submenus,

refer to the individual module interface configuration menu discussions in this section.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 190 of 234

»» SUBST TEMPL

The substitution template allows the ATLAS 890 to select calls (based on telephone number)

and substitute a user-defined number for the received digits after the call has been processed

by the switchboard. Substitution templates are created for each entry in the Dial Plan.

ORIGINAL#

Designates the number(s) to be the search criteria for the substitution template. The

pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used as part of the number spec-

ification.

Example:

963-812[012] would be 963-8120 to 963-8122.

SUBSTITUTED#

Designates the number to be substituted for the number(s) defined in the ORIGINAL#

field. The pattern can be a specific number, or wildcards can be used as a part of the

number specification.

Punctuation characters ( ) - + are ignored and a comma is interpreted as a .5 second

pause in the dial string.

Example:

The ORIGINAL# field contains $ and the SUBSTITUTED# field contains ,256$. All

calls routed out this connection will be delayed .5 seconds and contain a 256 prefix.

X= Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

$=Any number of digits of any value

9= This specific number

[1,2,3...] =A single digit in this group

X= Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

$=Any number of digits of any value

9= This specific number

[1,2,3...] =A single digit in this group

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 191 of 234

»G

LOBAL PARAM

Write security: 2; Read security: 5

Sets ATLAS 890 options which apply to all switched operations, both incoming and outgoing calls.

»» END OF NUMBER TIMEOUT

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets the length of time ATLAS 890 waits before assuming the outgoing dialed number is com-

plete. The default value is six seconds. This timeout will only be invoked if the dialed number

does not match one of the patterns set in the NUMBER COMPLETE TEMPLATE menu (see Nbr

Complete Templates below).

»» COUNTRY CODE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The country code. Enter your international country code using only digits. For the United

States, enter 1.

»» AREA OR CITY CODE

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

The local area code. Use for sending caller ID to the network.

»» NBR COMPLETE TEMPLATES

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Sets completed number patterns for outgoing calls so that ATLAS 890 recognizes when the

phone number is complete. Fields include the index number (#) and PATTERN. For example, a

local number will be 7 digits long while a long distance (1+ area code + number) will be 11

digits long. The ATLAS 890 defaults cover almost any installation, and these templates should

not require any additional user input – except for unusual circumstances. The template allows

the use of the following wildcard inputs to define numbers:

»» NUMBER TYPE TEMPLATES

Sets call type patterns. ISDN interfaces require that a number type be sent over the D channel

when a call is sent or received. A normal RBS trunk does not send a type designator, but uses

prefixes instead. For example, “1 +” prefix is a national long distance call type while a “011 +”

prefix is an international long distance call type. These templates form a table to permit

ATLAS 890 to translate the RBS prefix into a call type for ISDN and vice-versa.

Wildcards used in the SUBSTITUTED# field are only valid when used in the same position

(relative to the end of the digit string) as the ORIGINAL# field.

X=Any single digit

N=Any single digit 2 through 9

911 =This specific number

[1, 2, 3...] =A single digit in this group

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 192 of 234

Denotes an entry number. The maximum number of entries is 50. Press <I> to insert a

new entry and <D> to delete any entry.

PREFIX

Sets the prefix for the number type. Only digits 0 and 1 are allowed (maximum of

six characters).

PATTERN

Modifies an entry when you press <Enter> (maximum of 40 characters). A pattern

for a normal long distance call, for example, would be 1+(NXX) NXX - XXXX.

Note that the symbols ( ), +, -, and space are not required and are only used to

improve the readability of this example.

NUMBER TYPE

Lists valid selections when you press <Enter>. Selections include LOCAL,

NATIONAL, INTERNATIONAL, PRIVATE, and UNKNOWN.

»» AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

When enabled, AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION prevents calls entering through network

termination interfaces from being forwarded out another network interface. Such an event

could happen if an incoming call specifies a number that has no endpoint configured to accept

it and another network interface has a call acceptance entry which could accept it (such as $).

Without automatic rejection, such a call would be forwarded back to the network. The network

would in turn resend the call to the unit until all incoming resources are consumed.

»» COLLISION RESPONSE

Write security: 0; Read security: 0

When forced, the COLLISION RESPONSE will enable the ATLAS to perform AUTOMATIC

retransmission of SETUP messages when faced with a collision situation. Forcing this

The ATLAS 890 default templates should cover all applications and should not need to be

added to by the user except for very rare circumstances.

Use extreme caution when disabling AUTOMATIC ROUTEBACK REJECTION.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 193 of 234

response is not advised.

»» GLOBAL TONE TYPE

Write security: 1; Read security: 5

Specifies the dialing digit tone encoding to be used throughout the entire system. DTMF (dual-

tone-multi frequency) and MF (multi frequency) are the available options.

> DIAL PLAN - (QUAD T1/PRI, T3, AND T3 DROP AND INSERT OPTION MODULES)

»N

ETWORK TERM (PRI)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRI connection from

the network.

»» IFCE CONFIG (PRI)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following options are

available:

FIRST DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s, starting with this

selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which

are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see page 182) and

OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

OUTGOING NUMBER CONVERSION

Converts outgoing (towards the network) numbers to the selected numbering plan and

type option.

AS DIALED

Sends the digits provided as an unknown number type.

Use extreme caution when forcing COLLISION RESPONSE.

• Lucent 5E • Northern DMS 100

• National ISDN • AT&T 4ESS

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 194 of 234

ISDN-NATIONAL PREFERRED

Regardless of what type of number is received, the outgoing number is substituted

with ISDN-National as the number plan and type. Ten digits are always sent to the

network. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the area code (provisioned

under DIAL PLAN/GLOBAL PARAMETERS) is added, if only seven digits are sup-

plied. This action may be required in areas with ten-digit local dialing.

ISDN-SUBSCRIBER PREFERRED

Examines the incoming number and if seven digits are received or if a ten-digit

number is received with an area code that matches the area code provisioned in

the global parameters, the number is forwarded to the network as a seven-digit

number defined as ISDN-Subscriber number plan and type. If the incoming num-

ber is ten digits, but with a different area code, it is forwarded to the network as

ISDN-National preferred.

ISDN-NATIONAL DMS RESERVED PREFERRED

Ignores the incoming numbering plan and type and substitutes the ISDN/Tele-

phony numbering plan and National number type. Ten digits are sent to the net-

work. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the area code set in global

parameters is added if only seven digits are supplied. This action may be required

in areas with ten-digit local dialing.

ISDN-NATIONAL AS DIALED

Sends the digits provided as National number type.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

When SWITCH TYPE is set to 4ESS, many installations require the National form where

possible; this may also be the preferred form in 10-digit calling areas.

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 195 of 234

NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA

Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this

option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element

is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the selection should

remain set to NORMAL.

The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN. These ser-

vices require that specific information (such as a Network Specific Facility Informa-

tion Element) be sent to the network during call setup.

CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number

(like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to

expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The default is ALL and

would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are sent, then the PREFIX is

defined as follows:

PREFIX

Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL. Enter the pre-

fix for the digits received.

Example:

If the number of digits is four and the number called is 963-8615, the telco’s PRI

switch sends only 8615 and the prefix is set to 963. This entire number is then

used to determine which ATLAS 890 user port endpoint should receive the call.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent

through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT

PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

• AT&T SDN • National ISDN INWATS

• AT&T Megacom 800 • Nortel Private Network

• AT&T Megacom • Nortel InWats

• AT&T Accunet • Nortel OutWats

• AT&T Long Distance • Nortel Foreign Exchange

• AT&T International-800 • Nortel Tie Trunk

• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 196 of 234

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

B CHANNEL SELECTION

Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The

CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels

on this interface.

NORMAL

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e. for a full PRI channel 23 would

be used if available).

CIRCULAR

Contiguous channels from last to first.

BUSY OPTION

Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-

BUSY message from the network.

NORMAL

Send a progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

With this swap, the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The accept number

in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 197 of 234

PASS-THRU

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

»N

ETWORK TERM (RBS)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate an RBS T1 connection

from the network.

»» IFCE CONFIG (RBS)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

FIRST DS0

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s,

starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network. The out-

going calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT

(see page 182) and OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

DS0S AVAILABLE

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 have been defined in this switched endpoint (indicated

by “! “), in another switched endpoint (indicated by “s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP

(indicated by “n”). This field is read-only. The following characters may display in

this field:

0-9 This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents

the last digit of the DS0 number.

*This port is requesting this DS0 for this connection, but the DS0 is

not yet activated.

!This DS0 is used by this endpoint.

SThis DS0 is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

SThis DS0 is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end-

point.

nThis DS0 is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

NThis DS0 is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with

this endpoint.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 198 of 234

SIGNALING METHOD

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the type of signaling to be used across this trunk. The sig-

naling selected needs to match the signaling being provided by the network (PSTN).

The following choices are available:

FGD TX SEQUENCE

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the format in which to present the outgoing digits.

Choices: NORMAL if no digits are to be sent; ANI/DNIS to send both ANI and DNIS;

DNIS to send DNIS only; ANI to send ANI only.

FGD RX SEQUENCE

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the format in which to receive the incoming digits.

Choices: NORMAL if no digits are to be received; ANI/DNIS to receive both ANI and

DNIS; DNIS to receive DNIS only; ANI to receive ANI only.

WINK AFTER ANI/DNIS

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D. When

enabled, the ATLAS 890 will transmit a wink after ANI/DNIS digits are transmitted.

DIGIT SUPPRESSION

When enabled, no digits will be sent toward the network/PBX after going off-hook on

an outgoing call.

DIRECT INWARD DIALING

Defines to the ATLAS 890 whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is being used by the

network. If DID is ENABLED, then the following information must be defined.

DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 890 from the network if DID is used.

This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED.

• E&M Immediate • E&M Wink

• Loop Start • Ground Start

• Feature Group D

The ATLAS 890 converts signaling types between network and user terminations.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 199 of 234

DID PREFIX

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the

DID number. The ATLAS 890 uses the combination of prefix and DID number to

determine the user endpoint that should receive the incoming call. This option only

displays if DID is set to ENABLED. If DID is DISABLED, then you must define the

trunk number.

TRUNK NUMBER

When the network connection does not provide DID digits, the ATLAS 890 must be

given a number to use to determine which user endpoint should receive the incoming

call. TRUNK NUMBER displays only when DID is set to DISABLED.

Example:

To connect an incoming DS0 (trunk) to an endpoint with the accept number of 963-

8615, set the trunk number to 963-8615.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

If FEATURE GROUP D is used, DID only refers to DNIS digits.

The trunk number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 200 of 234

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for switch-

ing calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

DS0 ALIGNMENT

DS0 Alignment is typically enabled when a user needs the ability to maintain align-

ment between T1s as if they were in dedicated map mode. This scenario requires DS0

ALIGNMENT enabled on both interfaces (usually on User Term and on Net Term). An

interface that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled will only process a call from the switch-

board on the same DS0 that the incoming call was received.

Example:

The unit receives an incoming call on DS0 17. The switchboard looks for an interface

who has matching accept criteria to the number it received. A match is found on inter-

face “Z” that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled. This causes interface “Z” to only process

the call if it has DS0 17 available. If all matching interfaces have DS0 ALIGNMENT

enabled and none of those interfaces have DS0 17 available, then a busy or fast busy

will be returned to the calling party.

»N

ETWORK TERM (NFAS)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRI connection

from the network.

»» IFCE CONFIG (NFAS)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SECONDARY INTERFACES

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Allows the user to define the slot and port locations of the secondary interfaces in the

NFAS group.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 201 of 234

Displays the entry number.

SLOT

Configures the slot that the interface is physically connected to.

PORT

Configures the port that the interface is physically connected to.

INTERFACE NUMBER

Configures the NFAS Interface ID associated with the interface. The configure ID

must match the ID configured by the provider.

BACKUP D CHANNEL

Disables or enables backup D channel on the interface.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following options are

available:

FIRST DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s, starting with this

selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which

are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see page 182) and

OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

OUTGOING NUMBER CONVERSION

Converts outgoing (towards the network) numbers to the selected numbering plan and

type option.

AS DIALED

Sends the digits provided as an unknown number type.

Only one backup D channel can be configured per NFAS interface group.

• Lucent 5E • Northern DMS 100

• National ISDN • AT&T 4ESS

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 202 of 234

ISDN-NATIONAL PREFERRED

Regardless of what type of number is received, the outgoing number is substituted

with ISDN-National as the number plan and type. Ten digits are always sent to the

network. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the area code (provisioned

under DIAL PLAN/GLOBAL PARAMETERS) is added, if only seven digits are sup-

plied. This action may be required in areas with ten-digit local dialing.

ISDN-SUBSCRIBER PREFERRED

Examines the incoming number and if seven digits are received or if a ten-digit

number is received with an area code that matches the area code provisioned in

the global parameters, the number is forwarded to the network as a seven-digit

number defined as ISDN-Subscriber number plan and type. If the incoming num-

ber is ten digits, but with a different area code, it is forwarded to the network as

ISDN-National preferred.

ISDN-NATIONAL DMS RESERVED PREFERRED

Ignores the incoming numbering plan and type and substitutes the ISDN/Tele-

phony numbering plan and National number type. Ten digits are sent to the net-

work. Leading ones, if present, are stripped out and the area code set in global

parameters is added if only seven digits are supplied. This action may be required

in areas with ten-digit local dialing.

ISDN-NATIONAL AS DIALED

Sends the digits provided as National number type.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

When SWITCH TYPE is set to 4ESS, many installations require the National form where

possible; this may also be the preferred form in 10-digit calling areas.

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 203 of 234

NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA

Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this

option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element

is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the selection should

remain set to NORMAL.

The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN. These ser-

vices require that specific information (such as a Network Specific Facility Informa-

tion Element) be sent to the network during call setup.

CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number

(like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to

expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The default is ALL and

would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are sent, then the PREFIX is

defined as follows:

PREFIX

Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL. Enter the pre-

fix for the digits received.

Example:

If the number of digits is four and the number called is 963-8615, the telco’s PRI

switch sends only 8615 and the prefix is set to 963. This entire number is then

used to determine which ATLAS 890 user port endpoint should receive the call.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent

through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT

PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

• AT&T SDN • National ISDN INWATS

• AT&T Megacom 800 • Nortel Private Network

• AT&T Megacom • Nortel InWats

• AT&T Accunet • Nortel OutWats

• AT&T Long Distance • Nortel Foreign Exchange

• AT&T International-800 • Nortel Tie Trunk

• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 204 of 234

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

B CHANNEL SELECTION

Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The

CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels

on this interface.

NORMAL

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e. for a full PRI channel 23 would

be used if available).

CIRCULAR

Contiguous channels from last to first.

BUSY OPTION

Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-

BUSY message from the network.

NORMAL

Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

With this swap, the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The accept number

in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 205 of 234

PASS-THRU

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

»U

SER TERM (PRI)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a PRI connection.

»» IFCE CONFIG (PRI)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of PRI switch that the ATLAS 890 emulates. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following options are

available:

FIRST DS0

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s,

starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network. The out-

going calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT

(see page 182) and OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA

Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this

option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element

is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the selection should

remain set to NORMAL.

• Lucent 5E • Northern DMS 100

• National ISDN • AT&T 4ESS

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 206 of 234

The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN. These ser-

vices require that specific information (such as a Network Specific Facility Informa-

tion Element) be sent to the network during call setup.

CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Defines the number of digits to forward from the called number. When attached to a

PBX, the PBX may be provisioned to expect to receive fewer than all of the called

digits of the incoming call; however, this option would normally be set to ALL.

Choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, or ALL.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the Network for outgoing calls sent

through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT

PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num-

bers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

• AT&T SDN • National ISDN INWATS

• AT&T Megacom 800 • Nortel Private Network

• AT&T Megacom • Nortel InWats

• AT&T Accunet • Nortel OutWats

• AT&T Long Distance • Nortel Foreign Exchange

• AT&T International-800 • Nortel Tie Trunk

• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 207 of 234

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

B CHANNEL SELECTION

Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The

CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels

on this interface.

NORMAL

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e. for a full PRI channel 23 would

be used if available).

CIRCULAR

Contiguous channels from last to first.

BUSY OPTION

Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-

BUSY message from the network.

NORMAL

Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

PASS-THRU

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

»U

SER TERM (RBS)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an RBS T1 connection

from the network.

»» IFCE CONFIG (RBS)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

FIRST DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s, starting with this

selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which

With this swap, the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The accept number

in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 208 of 234

are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see page 182) and

OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

DS0S AVAILABLE

Indicates which DS0s of the T1 have been defined in this switched endpoint (indicated

by “!”), in another switched endpoint (indicated by “s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP

(indicated by “n”). This field is read-only. The following characters may display in

this field:

SIGNALING METHOD

Defines the type of signaling to be used across this trunk. The signaling selected needs

to match the signaling being provided by the network. The following choices are

available:

FGD TX SEQUENCE

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.

Defines the format in which to present the outgoing digits. Choices: NORMAL if no

digits are to be sent; ANI/DNIS to send both ANI and DNIS; DNIS to send DNIS

only; ANI to send ANI only.

0-9 This DS0 is available. The digit that displays in this field represents

the last digit of the DS0 number.

*This port is requesting this DS0 for this connection, but the DS0 is

not yet activated.

!This DS0 is used by this endpoint.

SThis DS0 is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

SThis DS0 is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end-

point.

nThis DS0 is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

NThis DS0 is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with

this endpoint.

• E&M Immediate • E&M Wink

• Loop Start • Ground Start

• Feature Group D

The ATLAS 890 converts signaling types between network and user terminations

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 209 of 234

FGD RX SEQUENCE

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D.

Defines the format in which to receive the incoming digits. Choices: NORMAL if no

digits are to be received; ANI/DNIS to receive both ANI and DNIS; DNIS to receive

DNIS only; ANI to receive ANI only.

WINK AFTER ANI/DNIS

Displayed only if SIGNALING METHOD is configured for FEATURE GROUP D. When

enabled, the ATLAS 890 will transmit a wink after ANI/DNIS digits are transmitted.

DIRECT INWARD DIALING

Defines whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is being used by the network. If DID is

ENABLED, then the following information must be defined.

DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS 890 from the network if DID is used.

This option only displays if DID is set to ENABLED.

DID PREFIX

Defines the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID number. The

ATLAS 890 uses the combination of prefix and DID number to determine the user

endpoint that should receive the incoming call. This option only displays if DID is set

to ENABLED. If DID is DISABLED, then you must define the trunk number.

CALLER ID NUMBER

Defines the number the ATLAS 890 uses to provide caller ID to the network for out-

going calls sent through this endpoint. This item is optional.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

If FEATURE GROUP D is used, DID only refers to DNIS digits.

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 210 of 234

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for switch-

ing calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num-

bers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

DIAL ON OFFHOOK

Defines a number that is automatically sent to the switchboard when a call on this end-

point is initiated (goes off hook).

DS0 ALIGNMENT

DS0 ALIGNMENT is typically enabled when a user needs the ability to maintain align-

ment between T1s as if they were in dedicated map mode. This scenario requires DS0

ALIGNMENT enabled on both interfaces (usually on User Term and on Net Term). An

interface that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled will only process a call from the switch-

board on the same DS0 that the incoming call was received.

Example:

The unit receives an incoming call on DS0 17. The switchboard looks for an interface

who has matching accept criteria to the number it received. A match is found on inter-

face “Z” that has DS0 ALIGNMENT enabled. This causes interface “Z” to only process

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

The DIAL ON OFFHOOK number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 211 of 234

the call if it has DS0 17 available. If all matching interfaces have DS0 ALIGNMENT

enabled and none of those interfaces have DS0 17 available, then a busy or fast busy

will be returned to the calling party.

»U

SER TERM (NFAS)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate an NFAS connection.

»» IFCE CONFIG (NFAS)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SECONDARY INTERFACES

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Allows the user to define the slot and port locations of the secondary interfaces in the

NFAS group.

Displays the entry number.

SLOT

Configures the slot that the interface is physically connected to.

PORT

Configures the port that the interface is physically connected to.

INTERFACE NUMBER

Configures the NFAS Interface ID associated with the interface. The configure ID

must match the ID configured by the provider.

BACKUP D CHANNEL

Backup D channel is not supported on User Term NFAS interfaces.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of PRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following options are

available:

Only one backup D channel can be configured per NFAS interface group.

• Lucent 5E • Northern DMS 100

• National ISDN • AT&T 4ESS

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 212 of 234

FIRST DS0

Defines to the ATLAS 890 the first DS0 for this endpoint. The ATLAS 890 uses

DS0s, starting with this selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network.

The outgoing calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by

OUT#ACCEPT (see page 182) and OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA

Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. The default for this

option is NORMAL, and in this case no Network Specific Facility Information Element

is sent. Unless one of the services listed below is subscribed to, the selection should

remain set to NORMAL.

The list below indicates services that may be subscribed to from the PSTN. These ser-

vices require that specific information (such as a Network Specific Facility Informa-

tion Element) be sent to the network during call setup.

CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number

(like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

• AT&T SDN • National ISDN INWATS

• AT&T Megacom 800 • Nortel Private Network

• AT&T Megacom • Nortel InWats

• AT&T Accunet • Nortel OutWats

• AT&T Long Distance • Nortel Foreign Exchange

• AT&T International-800 • Nortel Tie Trunk

• AT&T Dial-It 900/Multiquest

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 213 of 234

expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The default is ALL and

would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are sent, then the PREFIX is

defined as follows.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number for the ATLAS 890 to use to provide Caller ID to the network for

outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTI-

TUTE IF NOT PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num-

bers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

B CHANNEL SELECTION

Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The

CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

With this swap, the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The accept number

in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 214 of 234

on this interface.

NORMAL

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e. for a full PRI channel 23 would

be used if available).

CIRCULAR

Contiguous channels from last to first.

BUSY OPTION

Defines the response propagated to the CPE upon receipt of a DISCONNECT USER-

BUSY message from the network.

NORMAL

Send a Progress message to the CPE and map busy tones.

PASS-THRU

Send a DISCONNECT USER-BUSY message to the User Term CPE device.

> DIAL PLAN - (QUAD E1/PRA OPTION MODULE)

»N

ETWORK TERM (PRA)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a PRA connection from

the network.

»» IFCE CONFIG (PRA)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of PRA switch to which the port is connected. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following option is

available:

FIRST DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s, starting with this

selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network (PSTN). The outgoing

calls which are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see

page 182) and OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

• ETSI/DSS1

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 215 of 234

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA

Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. Currently not supported

for E1/PRA use.

CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Some PRI switches may be provisioned to send only a portion of the called number

(like DID). This menu item allows the ATLAS 890 to know how many digits to

expect (choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, and ALL). The default is ALL and

would almost always be correct. If less than ALL digits are sent, then the PREFIX is

defined as follows:

PREFIX

Displays only if CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED is not set to ALL. Enter the pre-

fix for the digits received.

Example:

If the number of digits is four and the number called is 963-8615, the telco’s PRI

switch sends only 8615 and the prefix is set to 963. This entire number is then

used to determine which ATLAS 890 user port endpoint should receive the call.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent

through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT

PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

DEFAULT VALUE = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept num-

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 216 of 234

bers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

B CHANNEL SELECTION

Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The

CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels

on this interface.

NORMAL

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e. for a full PRI channel 23 would

be used if available).

CIRCULAR

Contiguous channels from last to first.

»U

SER TERM (PRA)

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a PRA connection.

»» IFCE CONFIG (PRA)

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of PRA switch that the ATLAS 890 emulates. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type.

With this swap, the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The accept number

in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 217 of 234

The following option is available:

FIRST DS0

Defines the first DS0 for this endpoint.The ATLAS 890 uses DS0s, starting with this

selection, to send and receive calls to and from the network. The outgoing calls which

are allowed or restricted over these DS0s are set by OUT#ACCEPT (see page 182) and

OUT#REJECT (see page 184).

NUMBER OF DS0S

Specifies the number of DS0s ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

NETWORK SPECIFIC FACILITY VOICE AND DATA

Enables the sending of appropriate information to the PSTN. Currently not supported

for E1/PRA use.

CALLED DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Defines the number of digits to forward from the called number. When attached to a

PBX, the PBX may be provisioned to expect to receive fewer than all of the called

digits of the incoming call; however, this option would normally be set to ALL.

Choose from NONE, THREE, FOUR, SEVEN, or ALL.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number to use to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing calls sent

through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTITUTE IF NOT

PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

• ETSI/DSS1

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 218 of 234

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

B CHANNEL SELECTION

Determines how the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses B channels for call routing. The

CIRCULAR method can be used for call load balancing among the available B channels

on this interface.

NORMAL

Always start with the last channel configured (i.e. for a full PRI channel 23 would

be used if available).

CIRCULAR

Contiguous channels from last to first.

With this swap, the ATLAS 890 switchboard uses ANI to route the call. The accept number

in the dial plan must use the ANI number, not the DNIS number.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 219 of 234

> DIAL PLAN - (QUAD NX 56/64 OPTION MODULE)

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for V.35 connections.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

PORTS AVAILABLE

Indicates which ports of the selected Quad Nx 56/64 Option Module have been

defined in this switched endpoint (indicated by “!”), in another switched endpoint

(indicated by “s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This field is read-only.

The following characters may display in this field:

NUMBER OF PORTS

Specifies the number of V.35 ports ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

NUMBER TO DIAL

Specifies the number to dial on an outgoing call.

CALL TYPE

Configures the call type (either 56K or 64K) used for outgoing calls from this end-

point.

DIAL CALL AS

Allows the outgoing call to be treated as the selected call type. Options include DIGI-

TAL (for 56K or 64K data calls), VOICE (for speech calls), and AUDIO (for 3.1kHz

audio calls).

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoint and all accept numbers.

0-4 This port is available.

*This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is

not yet activated.

!This port is used by this endpoint.

SThis port is used elsewhere in the switched DIAL PLAN.

SThis port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end-

point.

nThis port is used in one or more DEDICATED MAPS.

NThis port is in one or more DEDICATED MAPS, and conflicts with

this endpoint.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 220 of 234

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

MIN DS0’S

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will restrict

connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g., BONDING) of the specified

number of DS0s.

MAX DS0’S

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will accom-

modate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g. BONDING) of up to

the specified number of DS0s. This also sets the number of DS0s presented in the

negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls.

> DIAL PLAN - (QUAD USSI OPTION MODULE)

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for USSI interface connec-

tions.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

PORTS AVAILABLE

Indicates which ports of the selected Quad USSI Option Module have been defined in

this switched endpoint (indicated by “!”), in another switched endpoint (indicated by

“s”), or in a DEDICATED MAP (indicated by “n”). This field is read-only. The follow-

ing characters may display in this field:

0-4 This port is available.

*This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is

not yet activated.

!This port is used by this endpoint.

SThis port is used elsewhere in the switched dial plan.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 221 of 234

NUMBER OF PORTS

Specifies the number of USSI interface ports ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

NUMBER TO DIAL

Specifies the number to dial on an outgoing call.

CALL TYPE

Configures the call type (either 56K or 64K) used for outgoing calls from this end-

point.

DIAL CALL AS

Allows the outgoing call to be treated as the selected call type. Options include DIGI-

TAL (for 56K or 64K data calls), VOICE (for speech calls), and AUDIO (for 3.1kHz

audio calls).

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

MIN DS0’S

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will restrict

connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g., BONDING) of the specified

number of DS0s.

MAX DS0’S

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. Setting this greater than 1 will accom-

modate connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g. BONDING) of up to

SThis port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end-

point.

nThis port is used in one or more dedicated maps.

NThis port is in one or more dedicated maps, and conflicts with this

endpoint.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 222 of 234

the specified number of DS0s. This also sets the number of DS0s presented in the

negotiation of outgoing aggregate calls.

> DIAL PLAN - (OCTAL BRI/U OPTION MODULE)

»N

ETWORK TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which terminate a BRI connection from

the network.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of BRI switch to which the port is connected. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following options are

available:

SPID LIST

To properly operate with a network ISDN switch, the BRI interface must have Service

Profile Identifiers (SPIDs) and phone number(s) that match the SPID(s) and phone

number(s) programmed into the ISDN switch for this line. Each BRI may have one or

more phone numbers and SPIDs. The SPID LIST submenu defines these parameters to

ATLAS.

PHONE NUMBER

The phone number(s) assigned to this BRI phone line.

SPID NUMBER

This entry must match the SPID number(s) which has been set in the network’s

ISDN switch (or in the PBX) for this BRI line. A SPID must be entered for each

phone number.

CALLS

The number of calls (1 or 2) which can be received or sent on this number/SPID.

D64, D56, AUDIO, SPEECH

These options reflect the network provisions for this SPID. If the BRI was pur-

chased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs, then the call must match

the services supported.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

• Lucent 5E • Northern DMS 100

• National ISDN

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 223 of 234

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports which emulate a BRI connection.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

SWITCH TYPE

Defines the type of BRI switch the ATLAS 890 emulates. If connected to another

ATLAS 890, both need to be set to the same switch type. The following options are

available:

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

• Lucent 5E • Northern DMS 100

• National ISDN

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 224 of 234

SPID LIST

The port, acting as the network, must use a Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and

phone number(s) in order to satisfy the ISDN connection protocol expected by the

user’s terminal adapter (TA).

PHONE NUMBER

The phone number(s) assigned to this BRI phone line.

SPID NUMBER

Defines the SPID number(s) used for this BRI line. Although the value of the

SPID is not significant, a SPID must be entered for each phone number. For con-

venience, the SPID can be set to be identical to the phone number.

CALLS

For user termination, the number of calls which can be received or sent on this

number/SPID is fixed at 2.

D64, D56, AUDIO, SPEECH

These options reflect the network provisions for this SPID. If the BRI was pur-

chased with different services provisioned for the SPIDs, then the call must match

the services supported.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

The ATLAS 890 does not support autoSPID detection software which some terminal

adapters offer.

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 225 of 234

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

SWAP ANI/DNIS

Swaps the ANI and DNIS numbers received from the network. ANI (Automatic Num-

ber Identification) is the billing number of the calling party, and DNIS (Dialed Num-

ber Identification Service) is the called party number.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the number for the ATLAS 890 to use to provide Caller ID to the Network for

outgoing calls sent through this endpoint. Choose from SEND AS PROVIDED, SUBSTI-

TUTE IF NOT PRESENT, or SUBSTITUTE ALWAYS.

> DIAL PLAN - (ASYNC-232 OPTION MODULE)

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured for Async-232 connections.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

PORTS AVAILABLE

Indicates which ports of the selected Async-232 Option Module have been defined in

this switched endpoint (indicated by “!”) or in another switched endpoint (indicated

by “s”). This field is read-only. The following characters may display in this field:

The Caller ID number must be specific (i.e., no wildcards).

0-9 This port is available. The digit that displays in this field represents

the last digit of the port number.

*This port is requesting this port for this connection, but the port is

not yet activated.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 226 of 234

NUMBER OF PORTS

Specifies the number of Async-232 ports ATLAS 890 uses for this endpoint.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and all accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

BUSY OUT

Number of milliseconds that passes before this Async-232 endpoint is set to perma-

nently busy and will no longer be available for use.

IDLE TIME

Number of seconds that passes before this Async-232 endpoint is set to idle status.

> DIAL PLAN - (PKT ENDPT CONNECTIONS)

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as packet endpoints.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

OUTDIAL NUMBER

Defines the number dialed to originate a call.

OUTGOING CALL TYPE

Selects the terminating resource type, either DIGITAL 64K or DIGITAL 56K.

!This port is used by this endpoint.

SThis port is used elsewhere in the switched dial plan.

SThis port is in the switched dial plan and conflicts with this end-

point.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 227 of 234

REDIAL TIMER

Selects the time delay in seconds between redial attempts.

RANDOMIZE TIMER

Enables/disables random delay added to the redial timer to avoid glare.

RETRY COUNT

Defines the number of redials to attempt.

OUTGOING CALLER ID

Defines the presentation of the calling party number for this endpoint.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a DIAL PLAN in applications where the criterion for switch-

ing calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default value for all endpoints and all accept num-

bers. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

Example:

An application requires that all calls that originate from Port 1 of the ATLAS 890 in

Slot 1 be switched to Port 2 of that same module. Assign a unique Source ID (e.g. 7)

to Port 1 of the module, and then configure Port 2 to only accept calls from that unique

Source ID (7).

ROUTE INCOMING CALL

Used to define the method which incoming calls are associated to the packet end-

points. This item has three options:

USING INCOMING NUM

Endpoint selection based on the incoming number.

USING CALLING PARTY NUM

Selection based on the Caller ID as presented by the calling party. If this option is

selected, the CALL PARTY NUMBER field is made available to the interface con-

figuration. This number allows you to configure the calling part number used to

select this packet endpoint.

USING DBU HANDSHAKE

Selection based on a proprietary protocol. This option is only available to packet

endpoints with backup sublinks. DBU HANDSHAKE is required to interoperate

with ADTRAN IQ and Express family products. It enables the association of

incoming calls with packet endpoints in cases where there is a single call-in num-

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 228 of 234

ber (hunt group) and no Caller ID information available.

SUPPORT DBU HANDSHAKE

This option is only available when the packet endpoint selected in the PORT/PEP

field has backup sublinks. SUPPORT DBU HANDSHAKE enables/disables the genera-

tion and acceptance of ADTRAN frame relay handshake upon connection. If the end-

point is configured to route incoming calls based on the handshake information, this

option is automatically enabled. If another call routing method is in effect, however,

this option can be enabled to support the use of handshake information at the far end

of the link.

DLCI TRANSLATION

Controls contents of the ADTRAN frame-relay handshake upon connection of a

backup PVC. Normally this field should be set to AUTO. The FORCED mode is

present for compatibility with older IQ units.

MIN DS0’S

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. A value greater than 1 will restrict

connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g., BONDING) of the specified

number of DS0s.

MAX DS0’S

Set this to 1 for typical single-call connections. A value greater than 1 will accommo-

date connections to endpoints supporting aggregation (e.g. BONDING) of up to the

specified number of DS0s. This also sets the number of DS0s presented in the negoti-

ation of outgoing aggregate calls.

CALL ROUTING TABLE

This table is only visible if GROUP is selected in the PRT/PEP field. The table format

changes, based on the selected routing option. For each case, CALL PARAMS contain

OUTDIAL#, CALLER ID, SOURCE ID, and MIN/MAX DS0S, as described above.

> DIAL PLAN - (CIRCUIT BACKUP CONNECTIONS)

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as backup endpoints.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 229 of 234

ORIGINATE/ANSWER

The following selections are available for the ORIGINATE/ANSWER menu item:

OUTGOING CALL TYPE

This only applies to originating endpoints.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all endpoints and accept numbers.

With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

OUTDIAL NUMBER

This only applies to originating endpoints. This is the number dialed when the end-

point goes into backup.

FORCE MODE

This forces the backup state of this endpoint. This is a configuration setting, so it will

retain its value until it is changed. To temporarily force an endpoint into backup, or to

force a restore, try the Manual activator.

BACKUP CRITERIA

Criteria for automatic backup. Note that this setting affects the available options for

RESTORE CRITERIA.

RESTORE CRITERIA

This only applies to originating endpoints. These are criteria for automatically coming

out of backup. Note that NETWORK SUCCESS is only available when a backup crite-

ORIGINATE The endpoint will originate the backup call.

ANSWER The endpoint will answer any incoming calls, but will

only go into backup if an error is detected.

ANSWER ANY The endpoint will answer any incoming calls and go

immediately into backup.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 230 of 234

rion is not NET/DATA FAIL.

STARTUP DELAY

The amount of time to wait after creating or changing the endpoint before allowing

backup.

BACKUP DELAY

The amount of time to delay after detecting an alarm before going into backup. This

only applies to originating endpoints. If the circuit comes out of alarm before this time

has expired, the endpoint will not go into backup.

RESTORE DELAY

The amount of time to delay after clearing an alarm before coming out of backup. This

only applies to originating endpoints. If the circuit goes into alarm before this time has

expired, the endpoint will remain in backup.

MAX NUM REDIALS

The backup endpoint will attempt this many retries before giving up and declaring a

backup failure. This only applies to originating endpoints.

REDIAL TIMER

The amount of time delayed between a failed backup call and the redial. This only

applies to originating endpoints.

ENABLE SCHEDULE

Use this menu to schedule the times when backup is enabled. The following selections

are available for the ENABLE SCHEDULE menu item.

TEST CALL

This only applies to originating endpoints. Use this menu to schedule regularly occur-

NET SUCCESS When network is out of alarm

MANUAL ONLY Only by the Manual activator

ENABLE TIME This is the time of day to enable dial backup.

DISABLE TIME This is the time of day to disable dial backup. If the disable

time is earlier than the enable time, backup monitoring

will be active across midnight.

DAYS ENABLED Use this record to enable/disable backup monitoring on

particular days of the week.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 231 of 234

ring test calls. The following selections are available for the TEST CALL menu item.

MIN NUM DS0S

This option will specify the number of DS0s to use for this switched call. If this num-

ber is 1, all calls will be directed to the endpoint, and not use a BONDING resource.

Any number other than 1 will use BONDING resources to inverse multiplex the mul-

tiple switched channels together.

MAX NUM DS0S

This option will specify the number of DS0s to use for this switched call. If this num-

ber is 1, all calls will be directed to the endpoint, and not use a BONDING resource.

Any number other than 1 will use BONDING resources to inverse multiplex the mul-

tiple switched channels together.

> DIAL PLAN - (PACKET VOICE CONNECTIONS)

»N

ETWORK TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as network packet voice

endpoints.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

DLCI

Selects the appropriate DLCI for this dial plan entry.

VOICE PORT

Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit. FSU 5622s support ports 1 and 2.

A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255.

CONFLICT REPORT

Describes existing conflicts. Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or Voice

port already in use.

VOICE COMPRESSION

Selects the voice compression algorithm used by this endpoint. ADTRAN FSU 5622

and Express 5200 Series FRADs use CCITT G.723.1 compression at 6.3 kbps. The

Express 5200 Series FRADs also support the proprietary NETCODER algorithm at 6.4

kbps. Both endpoints must agree about the compression algorithm choice.

SILENCE SUPPRESSION

Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending frames

PERIOD How often test calls are to be made

NEXT TEST TIME The date of the next scheduled test call

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 232 of 234

containing a special silence code during periods of silence. Both endpoints must agree

to use silence suppression. By default, silence suppression is DISABLED. To prohibit

silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total system bandwidth, ENABLE

this feature.

SIGNALING METHOD

Selects the type of signaling that the remote port is configured to expect. Available

options include E&M IMMEDIATE, E&M WINK, and LOOP START.

DIRECT INWARD DIALING

Defines whether Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is used by the remote equipment. If

DID is enabled, then the following options must be configured:

CALLER ID

Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing

calls sent through this endpoint. Setting this menu item is optional.

SOURCE ID

Defines the Source ID. Setting this menu item is optional.

DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Defines the number of digits sent to ATLAS from the network if DIRECT INWARD

DIALING is enabled.

DID PREFIX

Defines to ATLAS the prefix digits which are not received as a part of the DID num-

ber. ATLAS uses the combination of prefix and DID number to determine the user

endpoint that should receive the incoming call.

TRUNK NUMBER

Determines which user endpoint should receive the incoming call when the network

connection does not provide DID digits. This field only displays if DIRECT INWARD

DIALING is set to DISABLED.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 233 of 234

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. Zero is the default ID for all enpoints and accept numbers. With

default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

»U

SER TERM

This menu allows the user to define option parameters for ports configured as user packet voice

endpoints.

»» IFCE CONFIG

Write security: 3; Read security: 5

Specifies the configuration parameters for the endpoint.

DLCI

Selects the appropriate DLCI for this dial plan entry.

VOICE PORT

Identifies the voice port address of the remote unit. FSU 5622s support ports 1 and 2.

A remote ATLAS supports ports 1 through 255.

CONFLICT REPORT

Describes existing conflicts. Potential problems include DLCI unavailable or Voice

port already in use.

VOICE COMPRESSION

Selects the voice compression algorithm used by this endpoint. ADTRAN FSU 5622

and Express 5200 Series FRADs use CCITT G.723.1 compression at 6.3 kbps. The

Express 5200 Series FRADs also support the proprietary NETCODER algorithm at 6.4

kbps. Both endpoints must agree about the compression algorithm choice.

SILENCE SUPPRESSION

Reduces the total system bandwidth load by preventing ATLAS from sending frames

containing a special silence code during periods of silence. Both endpoints must agree

to use silence suppression. By default, silence suppression is DISABLED. To prohibit

silence frames from transmitting and to decrease the total system bandwidth, ENABLE

this feature.

SIGNALING METHOD

Selects the type of signaling that the remote port is configured to expect. Available

options include the following: E&M IMMEDIATE, E&M WINK, and LOOP START.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 4, User Interface Guide

Page 234 of 234

DIRECT INWARD DIALING

Defines whether or not Direct Inward Dialing (DID) is used by the remote equipment.

If DID is enabled, then the following options must be configured:

CALLER ID

Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing

calls sent through this endpoint. Setting this menu item is optional.

SOURCE ID

Defines the Source ID. Setting this menu item is optional.

DID DIGITS TRANSFERRED

Defines the number of digits ATLAS 890 send to the user equipment.This field only

displays if DIRECT INWARD DIALING is enabled.

CALLER ID NUMBER

Defines the number ATLAS uses to provide Caller ID to the network for outgoing

calls sent through this endpoint. This field only displays if DIRECT INWARD DIALING

is set to DISABLED, and USER TERM is selected. Setting this menu item is optional.

STRIP MSD

Strips a selected quantity (choose from NONE, 1, 2, and 3) of the most significant dig-

its (MSD) of a dialed number prior to being forwarded out of the port.

Example:

A network port could be set to accept all calls beginning with 9 (9$), and then with

STRIP MSD set to 1, all digits would be sent toward the network except the leading 9.

SOURCE ID

Simplifies the creation of a dial plan in applications where the criterion for switching

calls to a certain endpoint is a function of which endpoint originated the call.

Default value = 0. The default ID for all endpoints is 0 and all accept numbers is

0. With default values, all calls are routed based only on the dialed number.

Multiple endpoints can have the same SOURCE ID.

When creating the CALL ACCEPT list, specify a SOURCE ID(s) as well as a dialed

number or range of dialed numbers to accept.

STRIP MSD does not affect CALL ACCEPT criteria. All of the digits (including the MSDs

that are subsequently stripped) are used as accept criterion.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, Detail Level Procedures

Page 1 of 2

DETAIL LEVEL PROCEDURES

Find Your Task in the List Below Then Go To:

Connecting the ATLAS 890 to an External Modem DLP-001

Connecting the Alarm Contacts DLP-002

Setting IP Parameters for the ATLAS 890 DLP-003

Verifying Communications Over an IP LAN DLP-004

Using the Alarm Connections and ACO Button DLP-005

Logging in to the System DLP-006

Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port DLP-007

Adding/Removing Users and Changing Password Security Levels DLP-008

Updating the Firmware of an ATLAS 890 using XMODEM DLP-009

Updating the Firmware of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP DLP-010

Saving the Current Configuration of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP DLP-011

Loading the Current Configuration of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP DLP-012

Using the ADTRAN Utility Syslog with the ATLAS 890 DLP-013

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, Detail Level Procedures

Page 2 of 2

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-001

Page 1 of 4

CONNECTING THE ATLAS 890 TO AN EXTERNAL MODEM

Introduction

The ATLAS 890 can be accessed and managed via modem, allowing the same capabilities to the user as if

connected to the local ADMIN or CRAFT access ports. Access is provided either by a female RJ-45 connec-

tor, labeled ADMIN, located on the back of the unit in the middle of the System Controller module or by the

CRAFT port, located on the right of the front of the unit.

Prerequisite Procedures

The ATLAS 890 should be mounted in its permanent location before connecting to an external modem.

Tools and Materials Required

• Female RJ-45 to Male DB-25 Connector (shipped with unit)

• Modem

• Modem Cable

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-001

Page 2 of 4

DLP-001

1. Mount the modem in its permanent position.

2. Connect power to the modem using manufacturer instructions.

3. Configure the modem as follows:

4. Connect the male RJ-45 connector of the data cable to the female RJ-45 connector, labeled

ADMIN, located on the back of the unit in the middle of the System Controller module.

5. Route the data cable to the modem.

6. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 end of the connector (RJ-45 to male DB-25).

Then, connect the DB-25 end of the connector to the modem, configured as described

above.

7. Connect the modem to the POTS line as required by the manufacturer.

8. Login to the ATLAS 890 system. (Refer to DLP-006 for detailed instructions.)

9. From the MAIN MENU, select the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to enter

the right-pane menus.

10. From the SYSTEM CONFIG menu, select the CHAIN PORT menu and press <Enter>. Once in the

CHAIN PORT menus, press the right arrow key to enter the right-pane menus.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

Speed 9600 bps

Data bits 8

Parity none

Stop bits 1

Flow control hardware

Auto answer on

DTR ignore

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-001

Page 3 of 4

11. From the CHAIN PORT menus, select the PORT TYPE menu and select DIAL.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

If you are connected to the ATLAS 890 using the CRAFT or ADMIN interfaces,

changing the PORT TYPE mode to DIAL will terminate your session. You MUST have

Ethernet access to the ATLAS 890 to change the PORT TYPE back to DIRECT and

restore your terminal session.

To complete the connection to the shelf, the ATLAS 890 must now be called from a PC that

is configured to emulate a VT-100 terminal, with communication software set as in step 3

and configured for dial mode.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-001

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-002

Page 1 of 4

CONNECTING THE ALARM CONTACTS AND THE EXTERNAL INPUT

Introduction

This DLP explains how to connect the alarm contacts and the external input on the ATLAS 890.

Prerequisite Procedures

Before making alarm connections, the unit should be mounted in its permanent location.

Tools and Materials Required

• Wire strippers

• Small, straight slot screwdriver

• 22 or 24 AWG 2-conductor twisted pair cross connect wire

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-002

Page 2 of 4

DLP-002

1. For the alarm relay contacts labeled ALARM on the rear of the ATLAS 890 as shown in

Figure 1, determine whether the external alarm reporting device uses normally open (NO)

or normally closed (NC) relay contacts to sense an alarm condition.

2. Using standard Telco cross connect wire or equivalent, determine and cut the length

required to reach from the alarm header to the alarm-reporting device(s).

3. Using wire strippers, strip ¼-inch from both ends of each wire.

4. Remove the alarm relay (4 pin) terminal block.

5. Using the small, straight slot screwdriver, loosen the screws in the terminal block.

6. Insert one strand into the COM connection from the ATLAS 890 and tighten the screw.

7. Insert another strand into either the NC or NO connections and tighten the screw. A chassis

ground connection is also provided. Replace the terminal block.

1. The external input can be used to sense a relay closure or the presence of -48VDC. To

sense the relay closure, connect VOUT (-48VDC limited to 1 ma) to the COM of the relay to

be monitored and connect INPUT to the normally open (NO) contact of the device to detect

when the relay is energized or the normally closed (NC) to detect when the relay is

de-energized. To sense the presence of -48VDC, connect INPUT to the source to be sensed.

2. Using standard Telco cross connect wire or equivalent, determine and cut the length

required to reach from the external input header to the equipment to be sensed.

3. Using wire strippers, strip ¼-inch from both ends of each wire.

4. Remove the external input (3 pin) terminal block.

5. Using the small, straight slot screwdriver, loosen the screws in the terminal block.

6. Insert the wires in the terminal block as determined in Item 1 and tighten the screws. A

chassis ground connection is also provided. Replace the terminal block.

Connect Alarm Relay Contacts

Connect External Input

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-002

Page 3 of 4

Alarm Relay Connector Pinout

Pin Name Description

1 Normally Closed (NC) Opens when a selected alarm condition is present.

2 Normally Open (NO) Closes when a selected alarm condition is present.

3 Common (COM) Common connection between external circuitry and NC or NO terminal.

4 Chassis Ground (GND)

ALARM

EXT

INPUT

CO M

INPUT

VO UT

External Input

Connector

Alarm Relay

Connector

Figure 1. ATLAS 890 Rear View

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-002

Page 4 of 4

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

External Relay Monitor Connector Pinout

Pin Name Description

1 Alarm Out Outputs EIA-232 level signal for connection to external alarm contacts.

2 Alarm In Monitors signal coming from external alarm contacts.

3 Chassis Ground

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-003

Page 1 of 2

SETTING IP PARAMETERS FOR THE ATLAS 890

Introduction

If the ATLAS 890 is connected to an IP network for Telnet, TFTP, or SNMP management, there are sev-

eral IP parameters that must be set in order for the unit to communicate with the network. These parame-

ters are described in this DLP along with the procedures for setting them.

Prerequisite Procedures

This procedure assumes that the ATLAS 890 unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up.

Tools and Materials Required

• Data cable to connect to either a VT-100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT-100 terminal

• VT-100 terminal or PC configured as a VT-100 terminal

Please see your Network Administrator for the proper assignment of the following

parameters: IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-003

Page 2 of 2

DLP-003

1. Connect the ATLAS 890 unit to your VT-100 system (details found in DLP-007).

2. Login to the system with maximum rights (details for logging in are in DLP-006).

3. From the SYSTEM CONFIG menu, select the ETHERNET PORT option and press <Enter>.

4. From the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET menu, select the IP ADDRESS option and press <Enter>.

Enter the appropriate IP address.

5. From the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET menu, select the SUBNET MASK option and press <Enter>.

Enter the appropriate Subnet Mask.

6. From the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET menu, select the DEFAULT GATEWAY option and press

<Enter>.

Enter the appropriate Default Gateway.

7. Left arrow to highlight the ETHERNET submenu to save changes.

8. Escape out to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and logoff by pressing <Ctrl + L>.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

The next three steps will require confirmation after each change.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-004

Page 1 of 4

VERIFYING COMMUNICATIONS OVER AN IP LAN

Introduction

When an Ethernet Port is connected to a local area network (LAN), test steps must be performed on the

ATLAS 890 to ensure that the unit is communicating properly over the network. This procedure outlines

those steps.

Prerequisite Procedures

Before beginning this procedure, the unit should be physically connected to the LAN and the provisioning

tasks detailed in DLP-003 should be complete.

Tools and Materials Required

• Access to a PC or other computer connected to the LAN

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-004

Page 2 of 4

DLP-004

1. Ascertain the ATLAS 890 IP address.

If you do not already have the IP Address for the ATLAS 890, either obtain it from the Network

Administrator or manually check for the address in the SYSTEM CONFIG/ETHERNET PORT/IP

ADDRESS menu of the Network Management interface.

2. Ping the ATLAS 890 unit from a remote computer on the network.

Using a remote computer system connected to the LAN, perform an ICMP Ping on the IP Address

of the ATLAS 890. Verify that the unit responds properly.

If the ATLAS 890 fails to respond, try the following:

• Verify that the proper IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway are provisioned in the

unit (see DLP-003 for details).

• Verify that the ATLAS 890 is properly cabled into the LAN and that the ethernet cable is prop-

erly seated in the RJ-45 jack on the rear of the unit.

• If the ATLAS 890 is connected to a hub or other network device that provides a carrier sense

light for each port, verify that the carrier sense light for the port to which the ATLAS 890 is

connected is lit. If this light is not lit, check the cabling between the hub and the shelf.

• Verify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on the remote computer system.

If none of these steps are successful, contact the LAN Administrator for assistance.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

You must login with maximum rights to modify the IP parameters on the ATLAS 890.

Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a Ping

command. Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX

allow a Ping to be performed by simply typing “ping <IP Address>” at a command line

prompt. Typically, the Ping program will respond by indicating that the remote IP Address

has responded in a certain amount of time or that no response was received.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-004

Page 3 of 4

3. Telnet to the ATLAS 890.

From the same computer used in the previous step, Telnet to the ATLAS 890 and verify that the

Telnet session is properly opened (see DLP-006 for logging in to a system and establishing a Tel-

net session.) Once the Telnet session is established, press <Ctrl+L> to logout and close the session.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

Some versions of Ping will continue running until you explicitly tell them to stop. If the

program does not terminate on its own, type <Ctrl+C> to get the program to stop.

Refer to the documentation of the computer system if you are unsure how to perform a

Telnet. Most computers running a networked version of Microsoft Windows™ or UNIX

allow a Telnet to be performed by simply typing “Telnet <IP Address>” at a command line

prompt. Telnet is a utility common on many local area networks that allows remote access

to another computer or piece of equipment.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-004

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-005

Page 1 of 4

USING THE ALARM CONNECTIONS AND ACO BUTTON

Introduction

The alarm connections alert the user when a selected alarm condition exists. The alarm may be cleared by

pressing the Alarm Cut-Off (ACO) switch located on the front panel of the ATLAS 890. This procedure

details the steps which must be performed to use the ATLAS 890 alarm connections and ACO switch.

This procedure should be performed at installation on each ATLAS 890 shelf that is wired out to external

office alarm equipment.

Prerequisite Procedures

Before beginning this procedure, the ATLAS 890 should be mounted in its permanent location and the

alarm contacts should be connected (see DLP-002).

Tools and Materials Required

• VT-100 terminal or PC with VT-100 terminal emulation software

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-005

Page 2 of 4

DLP-005

To Begin

1. Connect to the ATLAS 890 using either the 10/100 BASET, ADMIN, or CRAFT interfaces.

If you are not already connected to the unit’s ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces (either with a

VT-100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT-100 emulation software), use the procedure

in DLP-007 to connect to the ADMIN or CRAFT interface.

Alternately, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use

a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. Use the procedures in DLP-003 and

DLP-004 to connect to the 10/100 BASET interface.

2. Login to the unit.

Configure the Alarm Relay

3. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right-pane

menus. Select the ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD menu and choose the appropriate threshold

level. The ALARM RELAY will set for this threshold and all other alarms of greater impor-

tance. Refer to Section 2, System Event Logging of this system manual for a listing of all

alarms and levels of importance.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

Setting the threshold to NORMAL will not set the ALARM RELAY for NORMAL events. No

NORMAL events set the ALARM RELAY.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-005

Page 3 of 4

Configure the Alarm Monitor

4. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right-pane

menus. Then, select the EVENT LOGGING menu and press <Enter>. Once in the EVENT LOG-

GING menu, press the right arrow key to access the right-pane menus.

5. From the EVENT LOGGING menu, select the EXTERNAL INPUT menu and set it to the same value

as the ALARM RELAY THRESHOLD. Any event on the ALARM MONITOR will now be logged in the

EVENT LOG and set the ALARM RELAY.

Clearing the Alarm Relay Remotely

6. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to access the right-pane

menus. Then, select the ALARM RELAY RESET field and press <Enter>.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

Complete the following steps only if you wish to monitor for external alarms.

The ALARM RELAY may be cleared locally by pressing the ACO switch.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-005

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-006

Page 1 of 4

LOGGING IN TO THE SYSTEM

Introduction

Once connected to the ATLAS 890 via either a VT-100 terminal or PC configured as a VT-100 terminal, it

is necessary to login to the system to gain access to the management and provisioning functions. This DLP

provides specific steps for logging in to the system and accessing the various management and provision-

ing functions.

Prerequisite Procedures

Complete DLP-007, Connecting the Terminal or PC to the ADMIN or CRAFT Port, before logging in to

ATLAS 890.

Tools and Materials Required

• Data cable to connect to a VT-100 terminal or a PC configured as a VT-100 terminal (shipped with unit)

• VT-100 terminal or PC configured as a VT-100 terminal

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-006

Page 2 of 4

DLP-006

1. After connecting to the system, a blank screen will appear.

Pressing any key will display the login screen shown below.

The cursor will blink at the LOGIN field, waiting for a password to be entered.

2. At the LOGIN field, enter the password for the ATLAS 890.

The manufacturer’s default password for the ATLAS 890 system is “password” in lowercase let-

ters.

The ATLAS 890 has five levels of access granted to a user. The lowest level of access (Level 5) is

read-only, and allows a user to see, but not change, the current configuration of the system. The

top level of access (Level 0) is read-write and allows the user to both see and change system con-

figuration parameters.

After initial login, the System Administrator is now able to define levels of access for various

users. (See DLP-008, Adding/Removing Users and Changing Password Security Levels for more

details.)

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-006

Page 3 of 4

3. Upon entering the correct password, the ATLAS 890 MAIN MENU is displayed as shown

below.

4. You are now logged in to the ATLAS menu system.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-006

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-007

Page 1 of 2

CONNECTING THE TERMINAL OR PC TO THE ADMIN OR CRAFT PORT

Introduction

ATLAS 890 shelf management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are acces-

sible on a computer screen. Connecting either a VT-100 terminal or a PC emulating a VT-100 terminal to

the ADMIN port on the rear of the unit in the middle of the System Controller module or the CRAFT inter-

face on the unit faceplate allows access to the menus and management features of ATLAS 890. This sec-

tion specifies how to connect the VT-100 terminal or PC to the ATLAS 890.

The front CRAFT interface for the ATLAS 890 is located on the faceplate of the unit and is an RJ-45 con-

nector. Access can also be made to the ATLAS 890 from the back of the unit through the port labeled

ADMIN. It is also an RJ-45 connector, and is located on the System Controller module installed in the back

of the unit.

Prerequisite Procedures

The ATLAS 890 must be powered for terminal communication to function.

Tools and Materials Required

• VT-100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software

• Appropriate cable to connect terminal to the ATLAS 890 (shipped with unit)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-007

Page 2 of 2

DLP-007

1. Connect a VT-100 terminal to ATLAS 890.

2. Connect a PC emulating a VT-100 terminal to ATLAS 890.

Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that will emulate a VT-100

Windows format. However, there are many other adequate, commercially available software pack-

ages which will allow your PC or laptop to emulate a VT-100 terminal. Certain configuration

items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT-100 terminal for the ATLAS 890.

You are now ready to login to ATLAS 890, as described in DLP-006, Logging in to the System.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

• Set the parameters of the VT-100 terminal to:

– 9600 baud rate

– 8 data bits

–No parity

– 1 stop bit

– No flow control

• If the terminal has a parallel setting, disable it and use serial port.

• Plug the RJ-45 male end of the data cable into the ATLAS 890. Make the connection to the

VT-100 terminal as appropriate for your equipment.

• Set the parameters of the communications software to:

– 9600 baud rate

– 8 data bits

–No parity

– 1 stop bit

– No flow control

• Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate com port (instead of dial-up connection).

• Plug the RJ-45 male end of the data cable into the ATLAS 890. Make connection to the PC

or laptop as appropriate for your equipment.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-008

Page 1 of 4

ADDING/REMOVING USERS

AND CHANGING PASSWORD SECURITY LEVELS

Introduction

All menu items in the ATLAS 890 are protected by passwords of varying security levels. By assigning dif-

ferent passwords to different security levels, the ATLAS 890 System Administrator can control which

users can view or change various menu items. You can assign multiple passwords at the same access level.

This way, different users with the same access privileges can have different passwords. This procedure

details the steps which must be performed to add/remove user profiles and assign password security levels

in the ATLAS 890.

Tools and Materials Required

• VT-100 terminal or PC with VT-100 terminal emulation software

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-008

Page 2 of 4

DLP-008

1. Connect to the ATLAS 890 using either the 10/100 BASET, ADMIN, or CRAFT interfaces.

If you are not already connected to the unit’s ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces (either with a

VT-100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT-100 emulation software), follow the proce-

dure in DLP-007.

Alternately, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use

a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. Use the procedures in DLP-003 and

DLP-004 to connect to the 10/100 BASET interface.

2. Login to the unit.

3. Go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and select the ACCESS PASSWORDS menu and press <Enter>.

4. To add a new user profile and password, select the first column (0) and press I (for insert).

5. Give the new user profile a name by selecting the LABEL field, pressing <Enter>, and typing

the user defined name.

6. Determine the password level for the corresponding label.

The ATLAS 890 contains six different password levels. The table below gives a brief description

of each level.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

Select level... If you want the user to....

5 Have read-only permission for all menu items - minimum rights

4 Have read permission for all menu items and permission to use test commands

3Have access to all commands except passwords, flash download,

authentication methods, and interface configurations

2Have access to all commands except passwords, flash download, and

authentication methods

1 Have access to all commands except passwords

0Have permission to edit every menu item, including creating and editing

passwords -- maximum rights

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-008

Page 3 of 4

7. Assign the password level to the appropriate label by selecting the ACCESS RIGHTS field and

choosing the level decided upon in step 6.

8. Personalize the password for the appropriate label by selecting the PASSWORD field, press-

ing <Enter>, then typing the desired password.

Passwords for the ATLAS 890 system are case sensitive. The default password for a new user pro-

file is “password”. The current password displays as a series of asterisks (********).

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-008

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-009

Page 1 of 4

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE OF AN ATLAS 890 USING XMODEM

Introduction

The ATLAS 890 supports firmware updates via the ETHERNET port using either TFTP from a network

server or the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM. This procedure outlines the steps for a success-

ful firmware upgrade using the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces and XMODEM software.

Tools and Materials Required

• VT-100 terminal or PC with VT-100 terminal emulation software

• XMODEM software

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-009

Page 2 of 4

DLP-009

1. Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the RJ-45 ADMIN or CRAFT interface.

If you are not already connected to the shelf’s ADMIN or CRAFT interface (either with a

VT-100 compatible terminal or with a PC running VT-100 emulation software), follow the proce-

dure in DLP-007. Connecting to the ADMIN or CRAFT interface limits the upgrade procedure to

XMODEM Only.

2. Login to the unit.

3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu; press <Enter>.

4. Select the MODULE SLOT menu and press <Enter>.

Select the appropriate module slot to update. Select either SCUA or SCUB to upgrade the

installed System Controller module(s).

5. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select XMODEM.

6. From the RESTART SCHEDULE menu, select the time for the module to perform a restart after

completing the update process.

RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE restarts the system immediately after the update is com-

plete. RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME allows you to select when the updated system

will restart. If you select this option, a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below

the current field. To use that option, enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00

pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 09-30-2000).

7. View CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to verify the progress of the current firmware update or any

errors encountered during the download process.

8. Select BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE to start the update process. Enter Y to confirm the transfer

and set up the module to receive the XMODEM Upload.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

Selecting ALL MODULES OF A TYPE and SYS CTRL will force a controller switchover

during the update process. Take caution to connect both installed System Controller

modules to the Ethernet network to ensure proper Telnet operation following the update.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-009

Page 3 of 4

When the ATLAS 890 is ready to receive the XMODEM upload, the menu screen will clear and

display Awaiting XMODEM Upload....<Ctrl-X> to Cancel. If this does not appear, please

review the steps above for possible configuration errors.

9. From the terminal emulation software, begin the XMODEM upload by using the appropriate

command sequence. This may take several minutes.

If necessary, refer to the terminal emulation software documentation for help. Also, when specify-

ing the filename, ensure that the file transferred is the one provided by ADTRAN. Otherwise, the

update will not complete successfully.

Because XMODEM data is being transferred in-band through the menu interface, the VT-100

menus of the ATLAS 890 will be inoperable from the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces. You can cancel

the update at any time within the terminal emulation software. (Please consult the documentation

provided by the terminal emulation software to determine how to do this.)

10. When the update process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT UPDATE

STATUS field and MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS field.

The ATLAS 890 will either restart immediately and resume operation or restart at the specified

time and day of the week, depending on your selection.

Alternately, if the unit is part of a management cluster connected to the local network, you may use

a PC connected to the network to Telnet into the unit. By utilizing the ETHERNET port, the ATLAS

890 may be quickly upgraded using TFTP, provided there is a TFTP server on the local network.

The ATLAS 890 ships with ADTRAN Utilities software, which includes a TFTP server. See DLP-

010, Updating the Firmware of an ATLAS 890 using TFTP for more details.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-009

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-010

Page 1 of 4

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE OF AN ATLAS 890 USING TFTP

Introduction

The ATLAS 890 supports firmware updates via the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port using either TFTP from a

network server or the ADMIN or CRAFT interfaces using XMODEM. This DLP provides the steps to follow

for a successful firmware upgrade using the 10/100 BASET ethernet port and a TFTP Server.

Tools and Materials Required

• A PC with a Telnet client software

• A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the

ADTRAN Utilities software.)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-010

Page 2 of 4

DLP-010

1. Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the 10/100 BASET interface.

If you are not already connected to the unit’s ETHERNET port using Telnet client software, use the

procedure in DLP-003 to connect to the unit.

2. Login to the unit.

3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the UPDATE FIRMWARE menu; press <Enter>.

4. Select the MODULE SLOT menu and press <Enter>.

Select the appropriate module slot to update. Select SCUA or SCUB to update the installed Sys-

tem Controller module(s).

5. Go to the TRANSFER METHOD menu and select TFTP.

6. Enter the IP address of the network TFTP server into the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS field.

7. Enter the full path name and filename of the update file into the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field.

8. From the RESTART SCHEDULE menu, select the time for the module to perform a restart after

completing the update process.

RESTART IMMEDIATELY AFTER UPDATE restarts the system immediately after the update is com-

plete. RESTART AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME allows you to select when the updated system

will restart. If you select this option, a new field called RESTART DATE AND TIME displays below

the current field. To use that option, enter the time in 24-hour format (such as 23:00:00 for 11:00

pm). Enter the date in mm-dd-yyyy format (for example, 09-30-2000).

9. View CURRENT UPDATE STATUS to verify the progress of the current firmware update or any

errors encountered during the download process.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

Selecting ALL MODULES OF A TYPE and SYS CTRL will force a controller switchover

during the update process. Take caution to connect both System Controller modules to the

Ethernet network to ensure proper Telnet operation after the update.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-010

Page 3 of 4

Refer to the table in step 10 for a detailed description of messages found in this field.

10. Select BEGIN FIRMWARE UPDATE to start the update process. Enter Y to confirm the transfer

and to set up the module to receive the TFTP Upload.

During the TFTP upload process, various status messages display in CURRENT UPDATE STATUS

to indicate progress. The following table describes these messages.

11. When the update process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT UPDATE

STATUS field and MODULE UPDATE COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS UPDATE STATUS field.

The ATLAS 890 will either restart immediately and resume operation, or will restart at the speci-

fied time and day of the week—depending on your selection.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

Message Meaning

Contacting

Server Indicates communication with the TFTP network server is trying to be

established with the specified server address in the TFTP SERVER IP

ADDRESS field.

Beginning

TFTP Transfer Indicates communication with the TFTP network server has been

established and the update file is being transferred between the

ATLAS 890 and the TFTP network server.

Completed Indicates the ATLAS 890 successfully received the update file.

Error:

File Not Found Indicates the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file

name or path in the TFTP SERVER FILENAME field.

Error:

Access Violation Indicates the TFTP network server denied the ATLAS 890 access to the

given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are

selected for the specified path.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-010

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-011

Page 1 of 4

SAVING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION

OF AN ATLAS 890 USING TFTP

Introduction

The ATLAS 890 supports configuration transfers from the unit (via the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port) to a

TFTP server located on the network. This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration

transfer using the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server.

Tools and Materials Required

• A PC with a Telnet client software

• A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the

ADTRAN Utilities software.)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-011

Page 2 of 4

DLP-011

1. Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the 10/100 BASET interface.

If you are not already connected to the unit’s 10/100 BASET port using Telnet client software, use

the procedure in DLP-003 to connect to the unit.

2. Login to the unit.

3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu; press

<Enter>.

4. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server

Program.

5. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename. This will be the name of the configura-

tion file saved to the remote server.

Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the

server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 for-

mat filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters).

6. Select the SAVE CONFIG REMOTELY menu field and press <Enter>.

Enter Y to confirm the request.

7. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current transfer.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field.

For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-011

Page 3 of 4

8. When the transfer process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT

TRANSFER STATUS field and TFTP DOWNLOAD COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS TRANSFER

STATUS field.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access

files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target filename.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-011

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-012

Page 1 of 4

LOADING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION

OF AN ATLAS 890 USING TFTP

Introduction

The ATLAS 890 supports configuration uploads from a unit (via the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port) to a

TFTP server located on the network. This DLP provides the steps to follow for a successful configuration

upload using the 10/100 BASET Ethernet port and a TFTP Server.

Tools and Materials Required

• A PC with a Telnet client software

• A TFTP Server accessible on the local network (A TFTP server is provided with the unit as part of the

ADTRAN Utilities software.)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-012

Page 2 of 4

DLP-012

1. Connect to the ATLAS 890 using the 10/100 BASET interface.

If you are not already connected to the unit’s 10/100 BASET port using Telnet client software, use

the procedure in DLP-003 to connect to the unit.

2. Login to the unit.

3. Go to the SYSTEM UTILITY menu and select the CONFIGURATION TRANSFER menu, then press

<Enter>.

4. Set the TFTP SERVER IP ADDRESS to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP Server

Program.

5. Change TFTP SERVER FILENAME to a unique filename including path. This will be the name of

the configuration file retrieved from the remote server.

Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename depending on the operating system of the

server. For example, a TFTP server running on a PC under Windows 3.1 may only permit 8.3 for-

mat filenames (8 characters, period and three extension characters).

6. Select the LOAD AND USE CONFIG menu field and press <Enter>.

Enter Y to confirm the request.

7. View CURRENT TRANSFER STATUS to verify the progress of the current upload.

Perform Steps Below in the Order Listed

If you are using the ADTRAN TFTP server, the IP address displays in the STATUS field.

For other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation.

The ATLAS 890 system is rebooted immediately after a configuration is successfully

loaded. No additional confirmation is requested, and any online sessions will be

terminated.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-012

Page 3 of 4

8. When the upload process has successfully completed, IDLE displays in the CURRENT TRANS-

FER STATUS field and TFTP DOWNLOAD COMPLETE displays in the PREVIOUS TRANSFER STATUS

field.

Follow-up Procedures

Once this procedure is complete, return to the procedure which referred you to this DLP and continue with

the tasks indicated there.

TFTP is not secure. No passwords are required for client access. Anyone can access

files through the IP port on the server machine if they know the target file’s name.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-012

Page 4 of 4

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-013

Page 1 of 4

USING THE ADTRAN UTILITY SYSLOG WITH THE ATLAS 890

Introduction

The ATLAS 890 Event Log is used to log various message types at settable threshold levels. The Event

Log is a useful tool for troubleshooting switchboard (or call connection) activities including the viewing of

digits received, digits transferred, and ISDN Messages. The Event Log can maintain the most recent 350

lines of data in a first in/first out buffer. To ensure that important data is not lost, saving the Event Log mes-

sages to an external Syslog server is advised. The ATLAS 890 ships with an ADTRAN provided Syslog

server.

Prerequisite Procedures

This procedure assumes that the ATLAS 890 unit is connected to an IP network and is powered up.

Tools and Materials Required

• Syslog Server (provided on ATLAS 890 System CD in ADTRAN Utilities)

To prevent electrical shock, do not install equipment in a wet location or during a

lightning storm.

Electronic modules can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before handling

modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic

components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing.

When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is

electrically grounded.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-013

Page 2 of 4

DLP-013

have logged in to the ATLAS 890, go to SYSTEM CONFIG/SYSLOG SETUP. The options should

be set as follows:

•T

RANSMISSION: Enabled

•H

OST IP ADDRESS: Enter the IP address of the PC where the Syslog host resides

•H

OST FACILITY: Specifies the facility destination of log events;

Options are LOCAL0 to LOCAL7

On your PC, go to START/PROGRAMS/ADTRAN UTILITIES/SYSLOG. When the Syslog window opens, you

will see LOCAL0 through LOCAL7 listed on the left. This should correspond with the HOST FACILITY speci-

fied in the ATLAS 890. The Syslog program must be open on your PC in order for it to record ATLAS 890

information. The Syslog files can be viewed through the Syslog window. They are also available under the

ADTRAN Utilities folder, LOCALX.TXT, where X can equal 0 through 7. You can also view the LOCALX.TXT

file by clicking on EDIT LOG.

Setting Up the ATLAS 890 to use the Syslog

Setting Up the Syslog Host

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-013

Page 3 of 4

Any event logged in the ATLAS 890 Event Log (SYSTEM STATUS/EVENT LOG) should also appear in the

Syslog.

•The

MONITOR feature allows all Syslog messages to be pre-filtered by SYSTEM NAME, SOURCE, SLOT,

and PORT before displaying these messages to the user and logging the message to the predesignated

monitor log file. Various filter options may be defined by selecting SOURCE. The figure below shows

the SOURCE FILTER window. When the MONITOR button is selected, the file will be logged to

LOCAL8.TXT. To look at the text file, click on the EDIT LOG button on the left side of the Syslog screen.

Only source options selected with an ‘X’ will be displayed in the Syslog file. In this example, all options

will be displayed.

• Under the LOG FILES menu option, the user may erase log files, define Red events, set priorities and clear

Red events. The ERASE LOG FILES option will erase the specified txt log file. DEFINE RED EVENTS allows

the user to predefine a message priority condition so that if the condition occurs, the file is highlighted

in red. In the figure below, any CRITICAL or MAJOR conditions will cause any LOCAL0 through LOCAL7

facility to become highlighted in red if it receives a critical or major alarm.

Additional Syslog Features

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 5, DLP-013

Page 4 of 4

•The PROPERTIES menu allows the user to specify what types of messages will be logged to an ASCII

text file. Mark the lowest priority Event Log message you want to log to the Syslog server text file. For

example, the figure below shows that all messages will be logged to the text file.

•The

HELP menu also explains these features. Click on HELP/CONTENTS/SYSLOG HOST DAEMON for fur-

ther explanation of Syslog features.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 1 of 16

SYSTEM EVENT LOGGING

The ATLAS 890 Event Log is used to log various message types at settable threshold levels. This section

describes the entries that may be logged by the system Event Log.The Event Log CATEGORY threshold is

particularly important – this is the minimum severity level that must be set in order that the event be

logged.

The Event Log is a useful tool for troubleshooting switchboard (or call connection) activities including the

viewing of digits received, digits transferred, and ISDN Messages. Since most of the events discussed in

the following tables are used primarily during troubleshooting, they should be turned off in normal opera-

tion.

CONTENTS

1. Setting the Event Log Category ............................................................................................................. 2

2. Viewing the Event Log .......................................................................................................................... 3

3. System Events ........................................................................................................................................ 5

4. ISDN Cause Codes ............................................................................................................................... 13

5. Cause Code Log Entries ....................................................................................................................... 14

TABLES

Table 1. System Controller Events .......................................................................................................... 5

Table 2. Switchboard Events ................................................................................................................... 6

Table 4. Nx 56/64 Events ........................................................................................................................ 7

Table 3. ICC Events ................................................................................................................................7

Table 5. T1 Events ..................................................................................................................................8

Table 6. Ethernet Events ....................................................................................................................... 10

Table 7. ISDN Events ........................................................................................................................... 10

Table 8. Circuit Backup Events ............................................................................................................ 11

Table 9. DP Outgoing Signaling Events ............................................................................................... 12

Table 10. ISDN Cause Code Events ....................................................................................................... 13

Table 11. Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations .......................................................................14

Table 12. ISDN L2 Messages ................................................................................................................. 15

Table 13. ISDN Call Control Messages .................................................................................................. 15

Table 14. Source: ISDN Information Elements ...................................................................................... 15

Use caution when changing CATEGORY values from their default levels. If too many

sources have their CATEGORY values set too low, the number of messages being logged in

a given period can be very large. If too many messages are being logged too rapidly,

system performance can be adversely affected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 2 of 16

1. SETTING THE EVENT LOG CATEGORY

The following steps outline the procedure for setting up the event CATEGORY thresholds for the Event

Log.

1. From the MAIN MENU, go to the SYSTEM CONFIG menu and press the right arrow key to enter

the right-pane menus.

2. Select the EVENT LOGGING field and press <Enter>. Once in the EVENT LOGGING menus,

press the right arrow key to access the right-pane menus.

3. Refer to the tables in this section to determine the desired CATEGORY thresholds.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 3 of 16

4. To change the CATEGORY, select the appropriate field and press <Enter>. This will provide a

list of available options. Highlight the desired threshold and press <Enter> to select it.

2. VIEWING THE EVENT LOG

The following steps outline the procedure for viewing EVENT LOG messages.

1. From the MAIN MENU, go to the SYSTEM STATUS menu and press the right arrow key to enter

the right-pane menus.

Use caution when changing CATEGORY values from their default levels. If too many

sources have their CATEGORY values set too low, the number of messages being logged in

a given period can be very large. If too many messages are being logged too rapidly,

system performance can be adversely affected.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 4 of 16

2. Select the EVENT LOG field and press <Enter>. Once in the EVENT LOG, press the right arrow

key to access the actual messages.

The EVENT LOG messages are stored in a first-in/first-out table. Therefore, the most

recent log entry is found at the top of the log.

EVENT LOG messages may be sent to an external Syslog server for storage. Refer to

DLP-013, “Using the ADTRAN Utility Syslog with the ATLAS 890,” for more details.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 5 of 16

3. SYSTEM EVENTS

Table 1 through Table 9 provides a listing of ATLAS system events. This includes tables of events for each

category, according to the order they appear in the EVENT LOG setup screen.

Table 1. System Controller Events

Console Log String Category Event

AC Power Supply has Recovered CRITICAL AC power supply is functioning normal

again

AC Power Supply has Failed CRITICAL AC power supply is not operating properly

AC Power Supply has Exceeded

Temperature Limit CRITICAL Internal system temperature has exceeded

safe operating limit

AC Power Supply is Under Temperature

Limit CRITICAL Internal temperature has cooled to safe

operating limit

DC Power Supply has Recovered CRITICAL DC power supply is functioning normally

again

DC Power Supply has Failed CRITICAL DC power supply is not operating properly

DC Power Supply has Exceeded

Temperature Limit CRITICAL Internal system temperature has exceeded

safe operating limit

DC Power Supply is Under Temperature

Limit CRITICAL Internal temperature has cooled to safe

operating limit

Firmware invalid CRITICAL Corrupted firmware

Firmware update failed CRITICAL Flash download failed

Fan 1 is Disconnected CRITICAL Fan 1 is disconnected

Fan 2 is Disconnected CRITICAL Fan 2 is disconnected

Fan 3 is Disconnected CRITICAL Fan 3 is disconnected

Fan 1 is Connected CRITICAL Fan 1 is connected

Fan 2 is Connected CRITICAL Fan 2 is connected

Fan 3 is Connected CRITICAL Fan 3 is connected

Fan 1 is Below Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 1 is rotating too slowly

Fan 2 is Below Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 2 is rotating too slowly

Fan 3 is Below Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 3 is rotating too slowly

Fan 1 is Above Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 1 is rotating too fast

Fan 2 is Above Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 2 is rotating too fast

Fan 3 is Above Speed Threshold CRITICAL Fan 3 is rotating too fast

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 6 of 16

Fan 1 Speed is Normal CRITICAL Fan 1 has returned to an acceptable speed

Fan 2 Speed is Normal CRITICAL Fan 2 has returned to an acceptable speed

Fan 3 Speed is Normal CRITICAL Fan 3 has returned to an acceptable speed

System Configuration Uploaded CRITICAL ATLAS configuration file loaded into the

system and activated

Module Not Responding WARNING Module removed or not responding

ACO Switch pressed MINOR ACO switch pressed

External Alarm Detected MINOR Alarm detected on External Alarm Monitor

External Alarm Cleared MINOR External alarm cleared

Timing source changed to Internal MINOR Neither the primary nor the backup are valid

Timing source changed to Backup MINOR The primary source is not Backup valid

Timing source changed to Primary MINOR The timing source changed to primary

Not responding to programming MINOR Unable to program module

Cold NORMAL System cold startb

Firmware update completed INFO Flash download successful

Module Found INFO Module found

SNMP Authentication Failure INFO SNMP authentication failurec

a. Three consecutive logins were attempted and failed.

b. Generated five seconds after the completion of system initialization.

c. Generated if the ATLAS receives an SNMP request from an SNMP manager defined in the ATLAS SNMP communities

list but with a community name that does not match the community name defined in the SNMP communities list.

Table 2. Switchboard Events

Console Log String Category Event

<number> rejected: No such number WARNING Call rejecteda

<number> rejected: Outgoing reject list NORMAL Call rejectedb

Table 1. System Controller Events (Continued)

Console Log String Category Event

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 7 of 16

<number> rejected: Busy NORMAL Call rejectedc

<number> accepted: <slot> <port> NORMAL Call successfully routed

a. No such number in dial plan.

b. Number is on outgoing reject list.

c. All endpoints busy.

Table 3. ICC Events

Console Log String Category Event

Unable to Allocate Memory for Flash

Download CRITICAL Not enough memory available to flash the

controller

ICC is up MINOR Communication link between redundant

controllers is active

ICC is down MINOR Communication link between redundant

controllers is down

SCUA(B) - incompatible hardware MINOR Redundant controllers do not have the same

version of hardware

SCUA(B) - incompatible software MINOR Redundant controllers do not have the same

version of software

Table 4. Nx 56/64 Events

Console Log String Category Event

Nx 56/64 511 Test Pattern Active WARNING 511 Test Pattern Activated

Nx 56/64 511 Test Pattern Cleared WARNING 511 Test Pattern Deactivated

Nx 56/64 Bilateral Loopback Active WARNING Bilateral Loopback Activated

Nx 56/64 Bilateral Loopback Cleared WARNING Bilateral Loopback Deactivated

Nx 56/64 Excessive Zeros Alarm WARNING Excessive Zeros from DTE

Nx 56/64 Excessive Zeros Alarm Cleared WARNING Excessive Zeros condition cleared

Nx 56/64 Clock Slip Alarm Active MAJOR Clock Slip Alarm Active

Nx 56/64 Clock Slip Alarm Cleared MAJOR Clock Slip Alarm Cleared

Nx 56/64 External Clock Alarm Active MAJOR External Clock Alarm

Table 2. Switchboard Events (Continued)

Console Log String Category Event

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 8 of 16

Nx 56/64 External Clock Alarm Cleared MAJOR External Clock Alarm Cleared

Nx 56/64 PLL Alarm Active MAJOR PLL Alarm Active

Nx 56/64 PLL Alarm Cleared MAJOR PLL Alarm Cleared

Nx 56/64 CTS Asserted INFO CTS Asserted

Nx 56/64 CTS Dropped INFO CTS Dropped

Nx 56/64 DCD Asserted INFO DCD Asserted

Nx 56/64 DCD Dropped INFO DCD Dropped

Nx 56/64 DTR Asserted INFO DTR Asserted

Nx 56/64 DTR Dropped INFO DTR Dropped

Nx 56/64 RTS Asserted INFO RTS Asserted

Nx 56/64 RTS Dropped INFO RTS Dropped

Table 5. T1 Events

Console Log String Category Event

T1 Curr CSS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Controlled Slip Seconds

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr ES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Errored Seconds Threshold

Exceeded

T1 Curr LCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Line Code Violations

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr LES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Line Errored Seconds

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr PCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Path Code Violations

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr SEFS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Severely Errored Framing

Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr SES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Severely Errored Seconds

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Curr UAS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Current T1 Unavailable Seconds

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Line Loopback Active WARNING Line Loopback Active

Table 4. Nx 56/64 Events (Continued)

Console Log String Category Event

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 9 of 16

T1 Loopback Cleared WARNING Loopback Cleared

T1 Payload Loopback Active WARNING Payload Loopback Active

T1 Total CSS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Controlled Slip Seconds

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total ES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Errored Seconds Threshold

Exceeded

T1 Total LCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Line Code Violations Threshold

Exceeded

T1 Total LES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Line Errored Seconds Threshold

Exceeded

T1 Total PCV Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Path Code Violations Threshold

Exceeded

T1 Total SEFS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Severely Errored Framing

Seconds Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total SES Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Severely Errored Seconds

Threshold Exceeded

T1 Total UAS Thrs Exceeded WARNING Total T1 Unavailable Seconds Threshold

Exceeded

T1 Blue Alarm Cleared MAJOR Blue Alarm Cleared

T1 Blue Alarm Active MAJOR Blue Alarm Set

T1 D Channel Alarm Cleared MAJOR D Channel Alarm Cleared

T1 D Channel Alarm Active MAJOR D Channel Alarm Set

T1 LOS Cleared MAJOR LOS Alarm Cleared

T1 LOS Active MAJOR LOS Alarm Set

T1 Red Alarm Cleared MAJOR Red Alarm Cleared

T1 Red Alarm Active MAJOR Red Alarm Set

T1 Tx Blue Alarm Cleared MAJOR Tx Blue Alarm Cleared

T1 Tx Blue Alarm Active MAJOR Tx Blue Alarm Set

T1 Tx Yellow Alarm Cleared MAJOR Tx Yellow Alarm Cleared

T1 Tx Yellow Alarm Active MAJOR Tx Yellow Alarm Set

T1 Yellow Alarm Cleared MAJOR Yellow Alarm Cleared

T1 Yellow Alarm Active MAJOR Yellow Alarm Set

Table 5. T1 Events (Continued)

Console Log String Category Event

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 10 of 16

Table 6. Ethernet Events

Console Log String Category Event

Out of memory CRITICAL Not enough memory for Ethernet driver

Table 7. ISDN Events

Console Log String Category Event

BRI configuration failed: No ISDN resources

are available CRITICAL No BRI resources available

PRI configuration failed: No ISDN resources

are available CRITICAL No PRI resources available

No SPID matches the call profile: <called

number> <call type> WARNING No Matching SPID found

No SPID with free B channels matches call

type: <call type> WARNING No Matching SPID found

LT: Tried to call unregistered SPID <spid> WARNING SPID Unregistration attempted

D channel is DOWN MAJOR D Channel Down

<message>: Incorrectly formatted cause IE MAJOR Incorrectly formatted IE

BRI NT: Spid <spid> was rejected MAJOR SPID Failed

BRI NT: SPID Negotiations failed - resetting

the link MAJOR SPID Negotiation failed

BRI LT: SPID <spid> received - NOT IN

LIST MAJOR Unknown SPID received

BRI NT: SPID Negotiations failed - Retrying MINOR SPID Retry in progress

Configured BRI as LT NORMAL BRI LT configuration successful

Configured BRI as NT NORMAL BRI NT configuration successful

Rejected an incoming call for an unregistered

SPID NORMAL Call Rejected

D channel is UP NORMAL D Channel Up

Released: No longer an ISDN line NORMAL ISDN line released

No outgoing B channel available for call to

<number> NORMAL No B channels for call

Configured PRI as central office emulator NORMAL PRI CO configuration successful

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 11 of 16

Configured PRI as CPE NORMAL PRI CPE configuration successful

BRI NT: Spid <spid> registered NORMAL SPID registered

BRI LT: All SPIDs registered NORMAL SPID Registration complete

BRI NT: All SPIDs registered NORMAL SPID Registration complete

BRI LT: Registering SPID <spid> NORMAL SPID Registration in progress

BRI NT Registering SPID <spid> NORMAL SPID Registration in progress

Call to <called number> declared busy after

leaving ATLAS INFO Call busy

Call to <called number> refused: Busy INFO Call busy

Call to <called number> cleared from

ATLAS end INFO Call cleared

Call to <called number> connected INFO Call connected

Call to <called number> disconnected by far

end INFO Call disconnected

Call not accepted to <called number>: No

channel available INFO Call not accepted

Call to ATLAS: <called number> received INFO Call received

Call to <called number> ringing INFO Call ringing

Dialing <called number> INFO Dialing number

Incoming call to <called number> accepted INFO Incoming call accepted

Incoming call to <called number> refused INFO Incoming call refused

Table 8. Circuit Backup Events

Console Log String Category Event

Circuit Backup Attempt Failed MAJOR Outgoing backup call was unsuccessful

Circuit Backup Test Call Failed MAJOR Outgoing backup test call was

unsuccessful

Attempting Circuit Backup MINOR Circuit Backup call attempted to restore

data circuit

Circuit Backup Active MINOR Port is currently in backup

Table 7. ISDN Events (Continued)

Console Log String Category Event

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 12 of 16

Circuit Backup Deactivated, Primary

Restored MINOR Port was in backup, but primary data

function was restored

Circuit Backup Data Alarm Active MINOR Inband keep alive messages were

disrupted or corrupted

Circuit Backup Data Alarm Cleared MINOR Inband keep alive messages are

functioning properly

Circuit Backup Test Call Originated INFO Circuit Backup test call was attempted by

the unit

Circuit Backup Test Call Connected INFO Circuit Backup test call was successfully

connected to backup site

Circuit Backup Test Call Passed INFO Circuit Backup test call was successfully

maintained for test period

Table 9. DP Outgoing Signaling Events

Console Log String Category Event

TX Set Rx ABCD < > Tx ABCD < >a

a. The ATLAS 890 uses only AB signaling bits. The CD signaling bits are a copy of the AB values. These values are shown

in hexadecimal notation. For example, if AB signal bits are 01, then the total signal bits would be 01 01. Putting that in

hexadecimal notation results in an event of Tx set Rx ABCD 0x 05.

INFO ATLAS changed signal bits on port

RX Change Rx ABCD < > Tx ABCD < > INFO Equipment connected to port changed

signal bits

Table 8. Circuit Backup Events (Continued)

Console Log String Category Event

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 13 of 16

4. ISDN CAUSE CODES

In addition to the above events, certain recognized ISDN cause codes are sent to the Event Log from the

ISDN message facility during ISDN EVENTS, L2 MESSAGES, and L2 FORMATTED event categories.

Table 10 lists the codes applicable to the ATLAS 890 and the minimum category required for logging the

cause code event.

Table 10. ISDN Cause Code Events

Cause Code Event Category Code

ACCESS_INFO_DISCARDED WARNING 43

BAD_INFO_ELEM MAJOR 99

BEAR_CAP_NOT_AVAIL MINOR 58

CALL_REJECTED INFO 21

CAP_NOT_IMPLEMENTED MINOR 65

CHAN_NOT_IMPLEMENTED MINOR 66

CHANNEL_UNACCEPTABLE INFO 6

DEST_OUT_OF_ORDER INFO 27

FACILITY_NOT_IMPLEMENTED MAJOR 69

FACILITY_NOT_SUBSCRIBED MINOR 50

FACILITY_REJECTED INFO 29

INCOMING_CALL_BARRED MINOR 54

INCOMPATIBLE_DEST MAJOR 88

INTERWORKING_UNSPEC MAJOR 127

INVALID_CALL_REF MAJOR 81

INVALID_ELEM_CONTENTS MAJOR 100

INVALID_MSG_UNSPEC MAJOR 95

INVALID_NUMBER_FORMAT INFO 28

MANDATORY_IE_LEN_ERR MAJOR 103

MANDATORY_IE_MISSING MAJOR 96

NETWORK_CONGESTION WARNING 42

NETWORK_OUT_OF_ORDER WARNING 38

NO_CIRCUIT_AVAILABLE WARNING 34

NO_ROUTE INFO 2

NO_USER_RESPONDING INFO 18

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 14 of 16

5. CAUSE CODE LOG ENTRIES

Cause Code IEs that are non-Q.931 (i.e., the Coding Standard field is not 0) are logged with the following

format:

The coding standard field is one of the following: Reserved, National, or Local. Each Cause Code IE log

entry ends with a location designation. Table 11 shows these designations. Table 12 through Table 14 pro-

vides a listing of system events.

NONEXISTENT_MSG MAJOR 97

NORMAL_CLEARING INFO 16

NUMBER_CHANGED INFO 22

OUTGOING_CALL_BARRED MINOR 52

PRE_EMPTED WARNING 45

PROTOCOL_ERROR MAJOR 111

REQ_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAIL WARNING 44

RESP_TO_STAT_ENQ INFO 30

SERVICE_NOT_AVAIL MINOR 63

TEMPORARY_FAILURE WARNING 41

TIMER_EXPIRY MAJOR 102

UNASSIGNED_NUMBER INFO 1

UNSPECIFIED_CAUSE INFO 31

USER_BUSY INFO 17

WRONG_MESSAGE INFO 98

WRONG_MSG_FOR_STATE MAJOR 101

Table 11. Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations

Code Location

IN0TL International network

INWK Network beyond internetworking point

Table 10. ISDN Cause Code Events (Continued)

Cause Code Event Category Code

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 15 of 16

LN Public network serving the local user

LPN Private network serving the local user

RLN Public network serving the remote user

RPN Private network serving the remote user

TN Transit network

UUser

Table 12. ISDN L2 Messages

Console Log String Category Event

<message contents> INFO ISDN Layer 2 (LAPD) Messagea

a. Provides a hex dump of the entire LAPD frame.

Table 13. ISDN Call Control Messages

Console Log String Category Event

Host>>CC <tag><call ID> <message> INFO ISDN Call Control Messages

CC>>Host <tag><call ID> <message> INFO ISDN Call Control Messages

Table 14. Source: ISDN Information Elements

Console Log String Category Event

<message contents> INFO ISDN Information Elementa

a. Provides a hex dump of the ISDN IE sent with a call control message.

Table 11. Cause Code Log Entry Location Designations (Continued)

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Section 6, System Event Logging

Page 16 of 16

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 1 of 12

GLOSSARY

10/100BaseT Ethernet connection

The ATLAS RJ-48C port that provides Ethernet LAN connection for TFTP, SNMP, and Telnet.

A-Law

PCM coding method as defined by the ITU-T. It is a companding standard for converting between

analog and digital in a PCM system. A-Law is mainly used in Europe. µ-Law is the North American

equivalent.

AMI Alternate mark inversion. A Layer 1 line code used in a T1 carrier. Zeros are transmitted as zero volts,

and ones are transmitted as pulses that alternate polarity. Although B8ZS is an enhancement to AMI,

B8ZS and AMI are normally referred to as mutually-exclusive options for a T1. (See also B8ZS.)

ANI Automatic Number Identification. Service provided by a local phone company that provides the

transmission of the Billing Number for the originating party. ANI information is sent through the net-

work, from the originating central office, through all intermediate tandem offices, to the terminating

central office. Unlike Caller ID, ANI information cannot be blocked by the calling party.

Annex A

Standard for frame relay signaling as defined by the International Telecommunication Union Tele-

communication in publication Q.933-A.

Annex D

Standard for frame relay signaling as defined by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) in

publication T1.617-D.

ANSI T1.617-D (Annex D)

See Annex D.

ANSI T1.617-D (Annex D)

See Annex D.

ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol that maps an IP address to an ethernet MAC address.

B channel

Bearer channel. Bearer channels of an ISDN service carry provide data transmission. Compare with

D channel.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 2 of 12

B8ZS

Bipolar eight zero substitution. In a T1 carrier system, a specific eight bit pattern containing two

deliberate bipolar violations which replaces eight consecutive data zero bits.

bandwidth

The transmission capacity of a communications channel, stated in megabits per second (Mbps).

BECN

Backward Explicit Congestion Notification. Sent to the device generating excessive frame relay traf-

fic as a means to slow down the flow of data to the network. Compare with FECN.

bit Bit is a contraction of the term binary digit. It is the smallest unit of information a computer can pro-

cess representing either high or low, yes or no, or 1 or 0. It is the basic unit in data communications. A

bit can have a value of zero (a mark) or one (a space).

bps Bits per second. A measure of the speed of data communications.

BRI Basic Rate ISDN. An ISDN service that offers two bearer (B) channels operating at 64 kbps for data

transfer and a 16 kbps D channel for signaling and control information.

BurstA sporadic increase in a transmission.

Bursty traffic

Traffic that alternates between steady transmission and short bursts of high transmission.

byte Eight bits of information composed of zeros or ones, one of which may include a parity bit.

Caller ID

Caller ID is information about the originating party (telephone number, name, date, and time of call)

that is transmitted on the subscriber loop using frequency shift keyed (FSK) modem tones. The mes-

sage is transmitted using the ASCII character code form. Caller ID is not the same as ANI.

CIR Committed Information Rate. The guaranteed bandwidth available for customer data under normal

circumstances.

Companding

The process of compressing and expanding a signal.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 3 of 12

clocking

An oscillator-generated signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission link. A clock pro-

vides signals used in a transmission system to control the timing of certain functions. The clock has

two functions, (1) to generate periodic signals for synchronization and (2) to provide a time base.

CPE Customer premise equipment. All telecommunications terminal equipment located on the customer

premises, including telephone sets, private branch exchanges (PBXs), data terminals, and customer-

owned coin-operated telephones.

CS See CTS.

CSU Channel Service Unit. A device that functions similarly to a modem except that the CSU works with

digital signals rather than analog signaling.

CTS Clear to send. A signal on the DTE interface indicating that the DCE is clear to send data.

D channel

Delta channel. Controls the operation of the ISDN connection.

DACS

Digital Access Cross-Connect System. An architecture that allows the cross-connecting of several T1

circuits; that is, any DS0 on any T1 circuit can be groomed to any other DS0 on any of the other T1

circuits in the system.

DCEData communications equipment. The part of a computer or data terminal that connects to a commu-

nications channel or network.

dedicated bandwidth

Bandwidth which has been set aside (dedicated) for a specific connection and service.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Allows dynamic IP address allocation.

Dial plan

The numbering plan for ATLAS ports (user and network) handling switched connections. Individual

dial plans contain phone number and features associated with DTMF dialing, PRI and BRI.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 4 of 12

DID Direct Inward Dial. True DID lines provided as a service are inbound trunks that provide dialed infor-

mation, but have no outbound dialing capability. In ATLAS, DID refers to digits received or transmit-

ted that allow the attached equipment to further route a call.

Digital Access Cross-Connect System

See DACS.

Discard Eligible (DE)

A flag that can be set to indicate to the network that if excess traffic is received, this frame can be dis-

carded if necessary.

DLCI

Data Link Connection Identifier. Identifies each virtual circuit within a shared physical channel.

DLCIs have significance only for the physical circuit for which they are assigned (local significance).

DNIS

Dialed Number Identification Service. Service provided by a telephone company that allows the

caller to see what number has been dialed.

DS0 Digital signal (or service) having a transmission rate of 64 kbps intended to carry one voice channel

(a phone call). Also called a fractional T1 because it bridges the gap between 56-kbps direct dial ser-

vice (DDS) and a full T1 implementation (24 channels).

DSUData Service Unit. A device used with a CSU to support digital communications by converting sig-

nals. (See also CSU.)

DTEData terminal equipment. The portion of a data terminal that interfaces to the end-user’s equipment.

The main difference between DCE and DTE is that pins 2 and 3 are reversed on the EIA-232.

DTMF dialing

Dual tone multifrequency dialing. The tones used by customer equipment to signal the network.

E1 circuit

European equivalent to the T-1 with a capacity of 2.048 Mbps. An E1 can handle 32 voice channels

with each conversation being digitized at 64 kbps.

ESF Extended superframe. A method of grouping T1 carrier frames into larger superframes, each contain-

ing 24 consecutive T1 frames.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 5 of 12

FECN

Forward Explicit Congestion Notification. Sent to the device receiving data from the frame relay net-

work to indicate that there is congestion in the receive direction. The receiving DTE device should

take action to slow down traffic from the remote end. Compare with BECN.

flash memory

A kind of non-volatile storage device, similar to EEPROM, where erasing can only be done in blocks

or the entire chip.

flash upgrades

Upgrades that can be downloaded into the flash memory.

FRAD

Frame Relay Access Device. Any equipment that provides a connection between a frame relay net-

work and a LAN.

Frame Relay

A subset of the X.25 packet switching protocol that allows for efficient transmission of data by utiliz-

ing many virtual circuits on a single physical interface.

FTP File Transfer Protocol. The TCP/IP protocol used to log in to a network, list files and directories, and

transfer files.

Full Status Poll

A poll that occurs each N391 polls and reports the status of each PVC. During this poll the frame

relay switch can also notify the user side of the UNI of any creation or deletion of frame relay PVCs.

G.711

ITU-specified voice compression algorithm designed to transmit and receive PCM voice at rates of

48, 56, and 64 kbps.

G.723.1

ITU-specified voice compression algorithm with a low hit rate (5.3 kbps or 6.3 kbps) output quality.

Groom

The assignment and redistribution of any DS0 on any T1 circuit to any other DS0 on any on the T1

circuits in a DACS.

Group of Four

The Frame Relay Consortium, composed of Cisco Systems, DEC, Nortel, and StrataCom, which

defined an interface for the UNI.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 6 of 12

HDLC

High Level Data Link Control. A generic link-level communications protocol developed by the Inter-

national Organization for Standardization (ISO). HDLC manages synchronous code-transparent,

serial information transfers over a link connection.

hot swappable

A device is hot swappable if it can be installed without powering down the main unit.

IAD Integrated Access Device. A network access device that provides many services from a single plat-

form. The ATLAS is an IAD.

IARP

Inverse Address Resolution Protocol. Used for resolving the protocol address when the hardware

address is known.

ICMP

Internet Control Message Protocol. Specified in RFC-292 to provide diagnostic functions.

Integrated Access System

A chassis-based product that supports a number of end-user applications on the subscriber side and a

number of carrier interfaces on the trunk side. The ATLAS is an Integrated Access System designed

to provide significant wide-area cost savings through the consolidation of voice, data, fax, and video.

IP Internet Protocol. A protocol which provides for transmitting blocks of data between hosts identified

by fixed-length addresses.

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network. A network architecture that enables end-to-end digital connec-

tions. The network supports diverse services through integrated access arrangements and defines a

limited set of standard, multipurpose interfaces for equipment vendors, network providers, and cus-

tomers. Interworking with a public switched telephone network is retained.

ITU-T Q.933-A (Annex A)

See Annex A.

IXC Interexchange Carrier. Phone companies that connect LECs.

kbps Kilobits per second. 1,000 bits per second.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 7 of 12

LANLocal area network. A group of computers and peripheral devices connected by a communications

channel, limited by distance.

leased line

A telecommunication facility or link reserved for the exclusive use of one customer. Also called a

dedicated line.

LEC Local Exchange Carrier. Provides local access to public data and phone networks.

LEDLight emitting diode.

Link Integrity Poll

A poll that occurs each T391 seconds to determine the state of the connection to the frame relay

switch.

LLC2

Logical Link Control Type 2. Upper portion of the Data Link layer (layer 2) that handles flow control

and error control.

LMI Standard published by the Frame Relay Consortium in 1990 to create a defined interface on the UNI.

The Consortium was composed of Cisco Systems, DEC, Nortel, and StrataCom, and is commonly

referred to as the Group of Four. LMI has become a generic term to indicate the type of frame relay

signaling used and could be used to mean Annex A or Annex D.

local loop

In telephony the wire pair that connects a subscriber to a phone company end office, typically con-

taining two wires. Four-wire local loops are common, however, especially with leased voice grade

circuits.

loopback

A diagnostic procedure where data is sent to the device being tested, and the output of the device is

fed directly back to its input, looped around, and the returning data is checked against that which was

sent.

MAC Address

Data link address that is unique for every device that gets connected to a LAN. Devices on the LAN

use these addresses to update routing tables.

MbpsMega bits per second. A measure of the amount of information travelling across a network or com-

munications link.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 8 of 12

MIB Management information base. The MIB is an index to the organized data stored within a network

device.

µµ

-Law

A companding standard for converting between analog and digital in a PCM system. µ-Law is mainly

used in North America. A-Law is the European equivalent.

multiplexer

A device (mux) that takes several low-speed channels and merges them into one high-speed channel

at one end of a link. Another multiplexer at the other end of the link reverses this process.

N391Defines how many link integrity polls occur before a full status poll. One out of the number defined

in N391 is a full status poll. Default is 6.

N392Defines how many bad polls can occur within an N393 window before the link is declared down.

N393Defines the number of polls that make up the window used by N392 to determine if a link is opera-

tional.

NNI A standard interface between two frame relay switches.

nonvolatile memory

Any form of memory that retains its contents when power is removed (for example, ROM, EPROM,

etc.)

NT1 Network termination 1. A unit that provides physical and electromagnetic termination of the U-inter-

face, 2-wire transmission line; converts between Layer 1 formats used at the U- and T- reference

points; and performs some maintenance functions.

option modules

Any optional, hot-swappable module that can be added to the ATLAS system for a variety of applica-

tions.

OSI Open System Interconnection. It is a standard defined by ISO and the ITU-T to allow interoperability

between equipment of different vendors.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 9 of 12

overbooking

ATLAS feature that reduces telecommunications expenses by allowing you to over-subscribe

switched bandwidth for situations where simultaneous access to the network by every subscriber is

not required.

Packet

A transmission that contains both control information and data.

Packet Endpoint

A virtual port within the ATLAS that a specified physical port terminates its data into for further rout-

ing by the system.

Packet Switching

A method of routing packets that avoids congestion and minimizes delivery time.

PBX Private branch exchange. A telephone system usually owned by the customer that serves a particular

location. It provides connections from one phone extension to another and connects to the external

telephone network.

PCM

Pulse Code Modulation. The most common method for encoding analog voice into a digital bit

stream.

PIV Port/PVC Interval. Think of this as a resource meter. The ATLAS can track up to 10,000 PIVs. The

PIV is derived from the Max Number of Days and Max Number of Intervals selected by the user.

Changing one affects the other.

PRI Primary Rate ISDN. An ISDN service that provides 23 B (bearer) channels (64 kbps each) for data

transmission and 1 D (data) channel (64 kbps) for signaling and control.

PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit. Virtual circuit within the frame relay network that has all bandwidth

parameters permanently defined upon ordering the circuit.

QOSQuality of service. A means of guaranteeing available bandwidth under normal operating conditions.

Remote Access

The ability to connect to non-local communications equipment.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 10 of 12

RIP Routing Information Protocol. A protocol used to exchange routing information among a set of com-

puters connected by a LAN. RIP uses hop count as a routing metric.

robbed bit signaling

A type of in-band signaling used with voice transmissions for multiplexing multiple voice circuits

onto a T1.

Router

An interface which finds the best path between two networks. Routers forward packets from one net-

work to another, based on network layer information.

Routing Metric

The method by which a routing algorithm determines that one route is better than another. This infor-

mation is stored in routing tables. Such tables include reliability, delay bandwidth, load, MTUs, com-

munication costs, and hop count.

SNA Systems Network Architecture. Network architecture developed by IBM in the 1970s.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol. A control and reporting scheme widely used to manage

devices from different vendors. SNMP operates on top of the Internet protocol.

SVC Switched Virtual Circuit. Virtual circuit within the frame relay network that is created only when

needed. Bandwidth parameters are defined each time the circuit is created.

synchronous

1. The condition occurring when two events happen in a specific time relationship with each other,

both under control of a master clock.

2. A method of data transmission requiring the transmission of timing pulses to keep the sender and

receiver synchronized in their communication used to send blocks of information. Synchronous

data transmission is used in high speed data circuits because there is less overhead than asynchro-

nous transmission of characters which contain two extra bits per character to affect timing.

T1 circuit

Also T-1. A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mbps. T1 uses two pairs of normal

twisted wires. T1 normally can handle 24 voice conversations with each conversation being digitized

at 64 kbps. With more advanced digital voice encoding techniques, it can handle more voice chan-

nels. T1 is a standard for digital transmission in North America.

T391Defines the time in seconds between frame relay link integrity polls.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 11 of 12

T392Defines the time in seconds the frame relay switch will wait for a poll from the user before declaring

the poll bad.

TBOP

Transparent Bit Oriented Protocol. ADTRAN proprietary method for transmitting HDLC traffic

across a frame relay network.

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. Connection oriented protocol that provides error control of IP traffic.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A set of communications protocols that encom-

passes media access, packet transport, session communications, file transfer, electronic mail, and ter-

minal emulation.

TDMTime Division Multiplexing. A method for sending two or more signals over a common transmission

path by assignment the path sequentially to each signal, each assignment being for a discrete time

interval.

TelcoTelephone company.

Telnet

A terminal emulation protocol, part of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, that provides remote terminal-

connection services. (See also VT-100.)

TFTP

Trivial File Transfer Protocol. A simplified version of the TCP/IP file transfer protocol that does not

include password protection or user-directory capability.

TIA 464A

Telecommunication Industry Association’s standard for DTMF detection and generation.

Transparent (voice compression)

Similar to G.711 with echo cancellation (for voice) disabled. This algorithm is primarily used for

video-conferencing.

Transparent BOP

See TBOP

trunkA direct line between two telephone switching centers.

61200321L1-1A

ATLAS 890

Glossary

Page 12 of 12

TSU T1 Service Unit.

UDPUser Datagram Protocol. Connectionless protocol defined by RFC 768 for transmission of data with-

out acknowledgment or error control.

UNI User to Network Interface. Defines the interface between the CPE and the frame relay providers

switch.

Voice Compression

A means of reducing the bandwidth required for transmission of voice traffic with minimal impact on

the quality of the voice.

VT-100

A non-intelligent terminal or terminal emulation mode used for asynchronous communications. Used

to configure the ATLAS 890.

WANWide Area Network. A network that connects users across large distances.

XMODEM

An error-correcting file transfer, data transmission protocol used to transmit files between PCs. The

XMODEM protocol sends information in128 byte blocks of data. Some sums (check sums) are done

on each block and the result is sent along with the block. If the result does not check out at the other

end, the computer at the other end sends a request (a NAK-negative acknowledgment) to retransmit

that block again. If the block checks out, the computer send ACK (an acknowledgment). In this way,

relatively error-free transmissions can be accomplished.

Front ATLAS 890 System Manual (Rev A)

ATLAS_890_System_Man.. ATLAS_890_System_Manual__Rev_A_

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation